Home

R&S®ViCom User Manual - Rohde & Schwarz Österreich

1. Load csm nws M3 Peri cim CR E Conce Receiver Selection le lines ines Sample Lines ud Gs we ES Sais E Ee Be best Request GSM NWS Settings Aiken EE Frequ AutoD Frequ Frequ SI Mode t Frequ SI Ind t MHz ST1 4 Index Index Type 100ms Index Type SCHInd 100ms y Scanner Settings Frontend FE1 e Enter new line Ctrl Enter new line Ctrl Enter new line Ctrl Enter Demodubinr Settings 2112 800000 0 o 3 0 0 eres o D TSMx Time Base ps Result Buffer Depth 1024 Result Count To Read 80 r Measurement details setup Set Receiver Index Setup measurement Set TSMx Time Base details for start of measurement Set Result Buffer E Se measurement Set Measurement Details Set Demodulation Settings Store Mode Start Measurement Throw Results Away Get Result Counters Store Results Get Results Result Viewer Stop Measurement Total Power Offset in dB10th 0 Write exe Release GSM NWS Scanner in Terminate GSM NWS Scanner Results Send SI Type Demod Request View Figure 7 11 R amp S ViCom GSM technology demo application e Basic Channel Configuration inn aii asta 92 e Specifying Measurement Details 93 e Requesting System Information Type 95 Basic Channel Configuration The first step when using the application is to define the list of frequencies that shall be scanned Therefore the following steps must be done e Load the R amp S TSM Instrument by pressing Loa
2. Hefe rey Jo di C3OS RuS ViCom 1551 tools y 49 Search tools ol Organize v Open Burn New folder Se e Gil e 3k Favorites 2 EI Name 3 Date modified Type RE Desktop 3 J TSME 27 07 2015 14 39 File folder B Downloads Ji TsMw 27 07 2015 14 39 File folder 7 Lotus Notes Data de TSMx 27 07 2015 14 39 File folder S Recent Places E TsmTransducerTables xml 22 06 2012 10 14 XML File J RSINT NET DATA E vcredist x86 2008 1 exe 01 06 2011 09 43 Application RSINT NET DATA MU v gl vcredist x86 2010 1 exe 02 02 2012 11 25 Application J SATURN FRANETA 8 vcredist x86 2013 0 exe 15 11 2013 15 03 Application A SATURN GROUP B WirelessCommunicationsCalculator exe 02 06 2014 14 55 Application J SATURN Hu H vcredist x86 2010 1 exe Date modified 02 02 2012 11 25 Date created 02 02 2012 11 25 We i Application Size 4 83 MB R amp S TSMx K14 Option for TSMX ROMES WCDMA BCH Demodulator Diagnostics Information e RS232 Output with the R amp S TSMx Family Products esere ereenn 30 e Managing more than one R amp S TSM Instrument ooccncccinnncccnnncccnnonnnnnncccnnnrnnnancnninos 31 RS232 Output with the R amp S TSMx Family Products Diagnostic information is available in a text file from the R amp S TSMx receivers via the RS232 interface Connect the null modem cable into the back of the R amp S TSMx Family instrument and connect the other end to the appropriate connector on the control c
3. Setup Connection The first action after starting the sample application should be to click the Load PN Scanner button highlighted in the figure Before that the receiver that shall be used should be chosen i e if it is one out of the R amp S TSM Instruments Load PN Scanner Receiver Ern nee sm 3 Address 192 158 0 4 If the PN Scanner is connected to an instrument and this is switched on as described above then clicking Load PN Scanner will cause the sample application to load a ViComWCDMA Technology interface See Chapter 5 Programming with the R amp S ViCom Interface on page 38 for more explanation about loading the interface If the scanner is loaded successfully information similar to that shown in the previous figure will appear in the text box below the Load PN Scanner button Setup Measurement Command The interface functions can now be accessed by clicking the buttons highlighted in the ring below Sample Application Load PN Scanner r Receiver Selection Type ba y Address 192 168 0 4 m Scanner Settings Scanner Frontend FE i m Demodulator Settings Demod Frontend FE 1 Get Result Counters The Set buttons correspond to interface functions that set parameters in the scanner An initial set of default values will appear in the settings fields circled in ring 3 and the two long fields in the centre of the window
4. Channel Number This number is automatically generated from the program and it is the same as the zero based line number of the edit box This value is for the user s reference only changing it at the edit box won t affect ViCom s fre quency settings Demodulation mode There are different modes to perform LTE demodulations at measurement startup and during measurement The meaning of each demodulation mode and its usage is explained in the following table Table 9 2 LTE Demodulation Modes tion a new one will be started automatically after the repetition time specified in wRepetitionDe layIn100ms Mode Integer value Meaning Usage 1 ONCE 0 Demodulate the PDU for each S BTS at the specified channel only once ON CMD 1 The PDU is only demodulated if S an extra command for demodula tion requests the demodulation REPETITION 2 After each successful demodula S GUI Sample Application Mode Integer value Meaning Usage CHANNEL_RESET 6 Delete all demodulation results for D all BTS at the specified channel Restart demodulation for this channel as specified in the com mand BTS 3 For a special basestation on one D channel this command tries to decode a defined message Start Measurement POU Settings while Starting Measurement Channel PDU Mode Repetition ms 0 10 0 0 This text box specifies demodulation configurations for
5. oo D le http 192 168 0 2 iv GIE Google File Edit view Favorites Tools Help ke Bree raum 1503 3001K02 100008 D e page G Toos gt Firmware Update S Insta TSMW Firmware files tfw are accepted here for installation After pressing Install your browser will upload the selected file to the device which may take a few minutes When the upload has successfully finished the device will automatically boot the just installed Firmware and you will be informed about the result Your browser will automatically try a reconnection to the newly booted Firmware If no error occured so far the new Firmware will become permanently active when detecting such a connection Otherwise the retained former version keeps active and will be used again on the next reboot Local intranet Always install the latest available firmware version use the https www rohde schwarz com en software tsmw link 18 3 R amp S TSME Configuration After installing the R amp S ViCom on a PC the C RuS ViCom_ lt version gt doc directory contains the TSME user manual TSME User Manual pdf The manual describes how to obtain information e g version number about the device how to install options and how to configure measurement bands Always install the latest available installer version use the https www rohde schwarz com en software tsma link 18 4 Frequently Asked Questions
6. 130 M Measurement Rates ocasiona 111 Measuring of CDMA 2000 Signals 99 Configuration Measurement types dereen reso costes 99 Measuring of EVDO Signals sess 110 Measuring of GSM Signals Measurement specials cc ccseceerersessesscnencentereercoaees Measurement tasks errore rotas Measuring of LTE Signals ES Error handling seirene nE EE MIMO measurement results sssss Narrowband measurement results Narrowband measurements configuration 113 New throughput estimation algorithm 131 Throughput estimation results is Wideband measurement results 126 Wideband measurements configuration 117 Measuring of WCDMA Signals BGbldemodulatior uen rrr ro eres Miscellaneous coros atinado Sample application A He le BE te Bel E Setup measurement command tee EE TEE Measuring of WiMAX Signals eeseesseee Configuration B tele Hare ao e Ec Measurement results rrr Measuring with the RF Scan Technology Multiple R amp S TSM Instruments P Post Pocessor Chain for RF Scan Technology 175 Programming with the R amp S ViCom Interface 38 DevicesdetallS c 38 Start programming KE 40 R R amp S TSME Diagnosis and Updates 33 R amp S ViCom Automatic
7. CIR A list of discrete peaks of the channel impulse response of the BTS based on the midamble correlation For each peak the absolute power level and the arrival time with respect to the beginning of the acquisition is provided R amp S ViCom R amp S ViCom TD SCDMA Technology The general RF characteristics of the radio channel are the spectrum and the power profile The spectrum is measured over a 320 usec interval in the acquisition providing a reso lution of 3 125 kHz and a bandwidth of 4 1 MHz Assuming a channel spacing of 1 6 MHz parts of the spectral components of neighbor channels are included Due to the bursty nature of the TD SCDMA signal the spectrum measurement may be mislead ing If at least one single BTS has been acquired the spectrum measurement is cen tered over slot O of the strongest BTS If no BTS has been detected the spectrum mea surement is centered over the strongest power in time domain which may come from a nearby mobile station ET 70 Figure 12 4 Spectrum example from a live measurement with active neighbor channels Power profile shows the received signal power as a function of time The channel filter is applied to the input data and the power is averaged over slices of 12 5 usec 16 chips The power profile shows the different power levels for the slots and synchroni zation sequences and provides an indication of downlink uplink distribution It can be used for first verificat
8. Does the ViCom system take advantage of multi core PC architecture Yes ViCom is designed internally to use multiple threads for different measurement tasks so more CPUS result in a more parallel execution of the measurement processing algorithms When run the sample application it asks for dlls that are not listed in Section 2 of this document and are not present on the CD ROM Check that all dlls in the Application sub directory are writeable as well as readable Read Only box of the Properties is not checked Technical Notes When click Load PNS Scanner in the sample program get an error message The interface ver sion of the ViCom library and the interface header file does not match The interface version corresponds to the last part of the file version string of the ViCom interface dll named ViComXXXX dll where XXXX specifies the interface type For example if the file version of the interface dll ViComWCDMA3GppPns dll is 10 70 0 18 then the interface version of the DLL is 18 The interface version of the DLL has to match the interface version that is defined in the corresponding ViCom header files If the version does not match then the interface loader will fail and will produce a ViCom Error In this case please contact Rohde amp Schwarz Technical Support You can view the version of the interface dll by right clicking on the dll in Windows Explorer choosing Properties and the Version tab
9. When click Start Measurement in the RS232 application get the message Hardware Selected R amp S TSMx does not support desired measurement What is wrong here The firmware version does not support the RS232 application Please make sure to have a firmware version of 12 x x x or higher installed on the R amp S TSMx device Refer to the firmware installation sec tion to update your device Why do I always get a message Connection lost when try to debug the ViCom sample application or my own ViCom using programs The communication between the device and the internal processing modules assumes to have very lit tle timeouts When the processing of an application is paused for example because a breakpoint is hit in the debugger chances are high that the timeout is reached before execution is continued Use the TsmuWorkerDebugSettings reg file in the LogFiles to increase the timeout and leverage that effect in your debug environment Please be aware that this also changes the behavior in released versions so be sure to disable that setting again when doing tests in the release version Refer to chapter Debugging Techniques 18 5 Technical Notes 18 5 1 UMTS Technical Notes Channels The relationship between UMTS UARFCNs UTRA Absolute Radio Frequency Chan nel Numbers N and carrier frequencies F is defined in Reference 6 Section 5 From Reference 6 UARFCN is calculated according to the following form
10. Mode C Throw Results Away C Store Results Store Results without P Sync CIR A sample of an R amp S TSM Instruments measurement file is shown in the following fig ure For an explanation of the shown fields see the R amp S ViCom data fields and the SMeasResult structure El ViComMeasurements txt WordPad File Edit View Insert Format Help Dee 66 A e B Loa File of ViCom WCDMA 3GPP PN Scanner MeasResult pTimeBaseSynchronisation eMode 1 676ns s 10278061ms 37 34 C dwChannellndex 0 dwPcTimeStamp 10276060ms TSMxTimeIn40ns 9791795786 siveragelnbandPower InDBmi00 8888 PSyncCir excluded MeasResult ListOfCPichCirs dwCount CPichCir for SC Ox14D0 429 0 TimeDelayInCirSamples 47104 CountOfCodePowerValues 1 C PICH CIR in 0 01dBrm 9452 sInbandPover in O 01dBm 8888 sRSCP in 0 01dBm 9461 sISCP in 0 01dBm 9023 wRmsDe laySpreadInchipi100 lDriftInNsPerSec D lStdDevOfDriftInNsPerSec 101 CPichCir ListOfPeaks dwCount 1 TimeDelayInCirSamples 47104 PeakPower in 0 01dBm 9470 SCHPowerValues in 0 01dBm sInbandPower 8831 PSCHPower 9851 SSCHPower 10044 MeasResult pTimeBaseSynchronisation eMode 1 676ns s 10278061ms 37 34 C dwChannelIndex 1 dwPcTimeStamp 10276200ms TSMxTimeIn4Ons 9795297210 saverageInbandPowerInDBm100 9035 PSyneCir excluded WCDMA BCH Demodulation 6 2 4 Update GUI with Current Scanner Settings 6 2
11. Noise clipped RSRQ value based on the wide band reference signal power measurement in 0 01 dB For this value the measured RS CINR was taken into account to correct the RSRQ result regarding noise and interference Mea sured from RO on Fron tend RF1 over the com plete system bandwidth sNoiseClippedRSR QinDB100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result Building a LTE TopN View Measurement Description ViCom Name Part of ViCom struc ture WB RSRQ noise clip ped TX1 RX0 dBm Noise clipped RSRQ value based on the wide band reference signal power measurement in 0 01 dB For this value the measured RS CINR was taken into account to correct the RSRQ result regarding noise and interference Mea sured from R1 on Fron tend RF1 over the com plete system bandwidth sNoiseClippedRSR QinDB100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result WB RSRQ noise clip ped TX0 RX1 dBm Noise clipped RSRQ value based on the wide band reference signal power measurement in 0 01 dB For this value the measured RS CINR was taken into account to correct the RSRQ result regarding noise and interference Mea sured from RO on Fron tend RF2 over the com plete system bandwidth sNoiseClippedRSR QinDB100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort V
12. Scanner Frontend FE 1 y TSMx Time Base 3452816845 Result Buffer Depth Measurement Mode Measurement Rate Firmware Version 1 13 255 255 per 1000 Seconds sw jon 0 15 223 72 Option Mask Ox8006FF2D ene WES FrontEnd Mask 0x00000003 y Store Mode Throw Results Away Store Results Store Results without P Sync CIR add SIB Text Layer 3 Decoder RR Result Viewer Write exe Browse View Results Figure 6 2 R amp S ViCom WCDMA technology demo application The important parts of the demo application concerning the BCH demodulator are the center and right handed columns and the Add SIB Text checkbox For the case that dynamic requests shall be issued during the measurement the Issue Request button can be used Once the application has been started the following operation sequence should be performed to do a first sample measurement e Load a PN scanner This can be done by clicking on Load PN Scanner button If this command was successful the list box is filled with some details of the device e Click the buttons Set Receiver Index Set TSMx Time Base and Set Result Buf fer to do a proper setup of the standard settings in the R amp S TSM Instruments These set the values in the text fields next to Receiver Index TSMx Time Base and Result Buffer Depth in the R amp S TSM Instruments e Define the frequency table and se
13. The WCDMA Technology R amp S ViCom API changes several constants and thresholds depending on used instrument e Maximum number of channels that can be measured sequentially in an active mea surement e Maximum measurement rates where different limits are set for high speed and high dynamic mode e Certain minimum Ec lo must be measured to start the demodulation process this limit varies with the device used 3 2 1 2 3 2 1 3 3 2 1 4 R amp S TSM Instruments Product Family R amp S TSMU R amp S Instruments Max Number of Channels R amp S TSMQ R amp S TSML W R amp S TSMW R amp S TSME Max Measurement Rate in High Dynamic Mode with BCH Demodula tion Max Measurement Rate in High Speed Mode with BCH Demodula tion Min Ec lo threshold for demodulation GSM A maximum value for the measurement rate can be specified via the GSM Technology R amp S ViCom API The maximum value depends on the model of the instrument In the case of the R amp S TSML models the values are reduced in all cases R amp S Instruments R amp S R amp S R amp S R amp S R amp S TSME TSMU TSMQ TSML G TSMW Max Measurement Rate 80 Hz 100 Hz 40 Hz 500 Hz 800 Hz CDMA EVDO The part of the settings in the CDMA EVDO Technology R amp S ViCom API that depend on the instrument model are basically the same as the ones defined for WCDMA The only difference is that there is no Hig
14. URA Identity 10 2 48 8 5 16 Parameters needed for cell selection and rese lection including the identity of the current cell 10 2 48 8 6 17 Parameters needed for cell selection and rese lection when in connec ted mode 10 2 48 8 7 18 Parameters for the con figuration of the common physical channels in the cell 10 2 48 8 8 19 Parameters for the con figuration of the common and shared physical channels to be used in connected mode 10 2 48 8 9 20 Two fast changing parameters UL interfer ence and Dynamic per sistence level 10 2 48 8 10 21 not defined 22 not defined 23 10 not defined 24 11 Measurement control information for the cell that is broadcasting the SIB 10 2 48 8 14 25 12 13 Measurement control information to be used in connected mode ANSI 41 system infor mation 10 2 48 8 15 10 2 48 8 16 26 27 13 1 ANSI 41 RAND informa tion 10 2 48 8 16 1 28 13 2 ANSI 41 User Zone Identification information 10 2 48 8 16 2 29 13 3 13 4 ANSI 41 Private Neigh bour List information ANSI 41 Global Service Redirection information 10 2 48 8 16 3 10 2 48 8 16 4 30 31 Technical Notes 15 2 ferential GPS measure ments Assistance data for A GPS measurements 10 2 48 8 18 2 SIB Number Contents Refere
15. Seguridad el ctrica Si no se siguen o se siguen de modo insuficiente las indicaciones del fabricante en cuanto a seguridad el ctrica pueden producirse choques el ctricos incendios y o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte 1 Antes de la puesta en marcha del producto se deber comprobar siempre que la tensi n preseleccionada en el producto coincida con la de la red de alimentaci n el ctrica Si es necesario modificar el ajuste de tensi n tambi n se deber n cambiar en caso dado los fusibles correspondientes del producto Los productos de la clase de protecci n con alimentaci n m vil y enchufe individual solamente podr n enchufarse a tomas de corriente con contacto de seguridad y con conductor de protecci n conectado Queda prohibida la interrupci n intencionada del conductor de protecci n tanto en la toma de corriente como en el mismo producto La interrupci n puede tener como consecuencia el riesgo de que el producto sea fuente de choques el ctricos Si se utilizan cables alargadores o regletas de enchufe deber garantizarse la realizaci n de un examen regular de los mismos en cuanto a su estado t cnico de seguridad Si el producto no est equipado con un interruptor para desconectarlo de la red o bien si el interruptor existente no resulta apropiado para la desconexi n de la red el enchufe del cable de conexi n se deber considerar como un dispositivo de desconexi n El dispositivo de desc
16. Spectrum measurement The measurement provides a spectrum in psRmsSpectralPowerValueInDBm100 This measurement is particularly useful for TDD LTE networks RSSI measurements are synchronized with the TDD frame structure and allow easy interference hunting UL RSSI interference if there is no UE close to the scanner The spectrum view allows to see at which frequency the interference takes place MIMO Measurement Results The MIMO measurement provides condition number rank and H Matrix per resource block in ViCom LTE SMeasResult SMimoResult SChannelMatrix Depending how the scanner has been configured several MIMO results can be inclu ded in one measurement result See section MIMO Scanner Configuration Measure ments above The total measurement count i e the number of available MIMO channel matrices is wRBNumberOfBts wNumberOfMeasTimes For example wRBNumberOfBts 50 and wNumberOfMeasTimes 4 means that BTS has a system bandwidth of 50 RBs and there are 4 channel matrices for every resource block so in total 200 matrices The matrix ordering is first measured matrix first and lower RB number meaning lower frequency first e g H RBO TOH RB1 TO H RBn TOH RBO T1H RB1 T1 H RBn T1 where RBX is a RB index and TY is a time index The rank is available in pbRankFor2x2Mimo respectively pbRankFor2x4Mimo The condition number is available in pwConditionNumber2x2MimoInDB100 respec tively pwConditionNumber2x
17. The TD SCDMA Technology R amp S ViCom API does not offer support for the R amp S TSMx Family R amp S Instruments R amp S TSMW R amp S TSME Max Number of Channels 32 32 Max Measurement Rate in High Dynamic Mode 8 Hz 20 Hz Max Measurement Rate in High Speed Mode 20 Hz 80 Hz What you need 4 Getting Started To get started R amp S ViCom you need the Programming Demo application s along with the R amp S ViCom Interface and R amp S TSM Instruments control software The Program ming Demo application demonstrates the basic functionality of the R amp S ViCom inter face s e Wilat E E 24 E UE EE 29 e Diagnostics Informalloh iot teet eoe ie tao Heec tcd dendi sns 30 e Getting Started with R amp S TGME nennen 32 4 1 What you need 4 1 1 Hardware Requirements Host PC or laptop Running operating system Microsoft Windows 7 any edition 32 64 bit and higher versions Atleast 2 GHz CPU clock speed 512 kB cache 512 MB of RAM FireWire connection or Ethernet connection depending on the used scanner model e R amp S TSM Instruments R amp S TSMx Family receiver with OEM option s R amp S TSMU K3x with power cable for the R amp S TSM Instruments included in the R amp S TSM Instruments shipment 12V 1 ADC power supply not included for example R amp S TSML Z1 R amp S TSMU Z1 FireWire cable 6 6 pin connector and 6 4 pin connectors are included Optional Fo
18. ing it by 0 1 The offset power specifies the total power of the signal not only of the time slot which is assigned to a BTS as offset to the already available minimum value Slot Alignment According to the GSM standard one TDMA frame consists of eight timeslots Each timeslot can contain at most 156 25 bits of information Of course the decimal part is not really a carrier of information it is just a tribute to the timing constraints As an alternative to send the burst in that odd time delta a GSM cell is allowed to insert a full filling bit after each 4 burst The overall time of the TDMA frame is there fore not changed but the timing properties of the burst have With the knowledge whether the first or second option is used additional information about the cell can be gained TDMA Frame STS Ma Mica Ea Ma ee A TDMA Frame e Te TS gm TS m ts M Figure 7 9 TDMA Slot Alignment Schemes in GSM These aforementioned timing effects are used by the GSM NWS API to make an as good as possible guess what slot alignment is used by a cell The internal calculation of the slot alignment uses a probabilistic algorithm to finally find some probabilities for each of five possible positions Time Slots are equidistant as shown in the figure above upper half or the fill bit is placed before every 0 15 274 or 3 timeslot The maximum probability is then referred to as 100 Then the scanner software reports two results in form o
19. 0 4 TSMW TSME Settings Scanner Frontend rei y 100009 ion 1 14 255 255 0 15 223 72 Figure 10 3 Scanner information The information box in the figure are two groups of settings Frontend selection for measurement settings e Frontend selection for demodulator settings The first settings defines the frontend number on which measuremnts will be per formed The R amp S TSMW has 2 frontends and each can be configured using the pull down list The demodulator settings defines the frontend number for BCH GUI Sample Application 10 2 2 Measurement Controls The interface functions can now be accessed by clicking on the buttons shown below The parameters to be used by the scanner e g frequency and bandwidth can be entered and edited in the columns in the center of the GUI Channel Start Measurement During Measurement PDU Mode t 100ms Channel PDU Mode t i00ms BtsId new line Ctrl Enter new line Ctrl Enter Load Save OK Request Scanner Settings Cancel Result Buffer Depth 1024 CINR Threshold for gt Demodulation in 0 01 de eq MHz BW w line Ctrl Enter ses V nengen Start Measurement EC ss E wimax scanner J Results Issue Request bese Figure 10 4 Control buttons and parameter fields The Set buttons correspond to interface functions that set parameters in the scanner An initial set of default values appear i
20. 8 3 1 Power NET 79 SCH Measurement Report Data 80 Counting SCH Measurement Falures sss 81 Demodulation of BCCH and System Information Tvpe sss 81 Spectrum Measurement ii iia d ER rae ERR adi 82 Channel Power Meas remiett 22 nicer esce da enc nta ida 85 Time Slot Measurement id ecran ala be daa d UR 88 Removing Dummy Burst Measurements sse 91 GSM Measurements Demo Application leues 91 Basic Channel Config ratior uoce iiec vtt deae den eade eR RYE e 92 Specifying Measurement Details rote cde dete dee ecd 93 Requesting System Information Tvpe nenne 95 GSM BCH Demodulation eese nice 96 Sample ee een EE 96 R amp S ViCom CDMA EVDO Technology eese 99 Measuring of CDMA 2000 Sigtnals ccccsceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseseeeeessenseeseeeensnnes 99 Measurement qoc 99 ESTI sse nnns 99 PN Offset Detechon nennen nennen nennen nsn nens 101 Channel Impulse Hesponse eene eren nnne nennen 102 F SYNC Demodulzaton eee ene mne enn aa anaa 103 Time dst E iaa anna 104 terne 105 Channels and PN Offset 105 Ken 105 E ee 105 Sample Application for CDMA 2000IEVDO REENEN EEEE EEN EEE 106 Setting the PN Offsets for Time Estimation ssse 107 Sync Channel Demodulation Mode 10
21. As marker result this maximum of 61 9 dBm would be returned then as special marker result The standard result structure would contain 62 2 dBm 62 1 dBm and 61 5 dBm 11 2 2 6 Result Conditioner User Manual 1505 1329 42 26 The result conditioner is a utility to convert the resulting power values into a specific layout Therefore it provides several options 183 Sample Application Minimum Power Level and Resolution The final results are returned in a WORD Array The unsigned integer numbers stored there have to be set in relation to a minimum threshold and have been shifted to make the minimum resolution that shall be available an integer For example a resolution of 0 1 and a base level of 120 the value 234 means 120 234 0 1 96 6 dBm Histogram Axis Definition The maximum value of the power dimension when a histogram is calculated can be set in this structure That means that the size of the histogram is number of frequencies channel maximum power value 1 This value is specified as an integer The calculation of the dBm value is the same as mentioned previously so you can calculate that value by using the inverse function wMaxPowerInteger p dBm fMinPowerValueInDBm fPowerResolutionInDB Overflow Representation If an overflow occurs while the measurement is done in the R amp S TSM Instrument this can be signalized in the result The least significant bit in the result can be use
22. Before the measurement tasks are described the following sections set the scene for the usage and explain some common elements of the R amp s ViCom API for GSM tech nology Most of them deal with configuration and result interpretation 7 1 1 1 Time Synchronisation GSM network scanners permit the following time synchronisation modes e Internal e GSM network R amp S ViCom R amp S ViCom GSM Technology EH e PPS GPS e GSM network PPs 7 1 1 2 Measurement Scans When the R amp S TSM Instrument has measured all channels and gathered the results this is called a scan One scan always covers the complete band specified by the fre quencies configured before These channels are measured and processed in groups of at most ten by the R amp S TSM Instrument due to internal reasons Since most of the R amp S TSM Instrument can perform multiple different measurements in parallel it might occur that one scan cannot be performed completely in one row In such a case another measurement task is processed before the scan is continued A scan interrupted in that way is finished as fast as possible but it might be the case that the API reports some results before the complete task is finished It is even possible that some results of a not finished scan have to be thrown away and another scan is started The missing parts are then measured as soon as there is time to do so The channel groups that are measured can contain up to 10 channels whe
23. Ee TE 57 R amp S ViCom WCDMA Technology eene 58 Measuring of WCDMA Signals cesses eeeneeeenne nennen nennen nnn nennen nnns 58 CPICH Channel Impulse Response CIR Measurements sss 59 misi Latte aru iror m 60 Sample Applicatioh eri iren bree ia 60 Setup Oe a 4 160 ee 62 Setup Measurement Commande 62 Save and LOA EE 64 Update GUI with Current Scanner Settings sss 66 IMIS COMM COUS sissies Pu an aet SEN SANNES EEEE EENE AEE DEN NEE EEE Neee 66 WCDMA BCH Demodulation eese enne nnne nennen nnns 66 Measurement Detalls ci Ri 67 Demodulation Modes eene nennen nennen emnes 68 Performance Measurements nenne nnnm 69 Sample Applicaton BEE 71 Issuing a Request during Measurement ccoo nana nannn o nn emen 74 Frequently Asked Ouestton eene 75 R amp S VIGOM GSM Technol Y cicicinicnnnicicn incite 77 Measuring of GSM Signals niri ida irnos 77 LESA cadueaceksaaaadaneeanauacacaaas 77 TAME SYnchroniSatiON scores 77 Measurement SCANS benceno Ra A S A 78 Result Detalls scoren naan S 78 Measurement Tasks E Ebr ER tt 79 7 1 2 1 4 1 2 2 7 1 2 3 7 1 2 4 7 1 2 5 7 1 2 6 7 1 2 7 7 1 2 8 7 2 7 2 1 7 2 2 7 2 3 7 3 7 3 1 8 1 8 1 1 8 1 1 1 8 1 1 2 8 1 1 3 8 1 1 4 8 1 1 5 8 1 2 8 1 2 1 8 1 2 2 8 1 2 3 8 2 8 2 1 8 2 2 8 2 3 8 2 4 8 3
24. In the source folder you will find a Visual Studio NET 2003 6 project that is set up to work in the created folder structure The project is a Windows console project so if you need some other type of project like one for a MFC application you should carefully read through the following paragraphs There you can find the important settings that Setting up a Custom Project make the project run When the console project is sufficient for your needs you can skip the rest of the section The first important part of the project configuration is the default inclusion of the R amp s ViCom headers The header files were copied while running the script to the inc folder which therefore must be set in the C C General settings new Property Pages Configuration active Debug y Platform active win32 y Configuration Manager amp Configuration Propertie Additional Include Directories Ainc General 3 Resolve using References Debugging Debug Information Format Program Database for Edit amp Continue 21 a Suppress Startup Banner Yes fnologo 3 General Warning Level Level 3 W3 Optimization Detect 64 bit Portability Issues Yes Wp64 Preprocessor Treat Warnings As Errors No Code Generatio Language 4 Precompiled He Output Files Browse Informe Advanced Command Line Linker Browse Information Build Events Custom Build Step Web Deployment SEES o Additional Include Directories Specifies one
25. Instrument is successfully synchronized to a BTS The data can be found in the viCom GSM SMeasResult SSCHInfoResult structure and can directly be used to fill the request structure for a decoding request Counting SCH Measurement Failures Not every SCH demodulation attempt will be a successful one For some applications it might be useful to know how many failures occurred when SCH demodulation was requested Therefore the GSM technology measurement gives also the number of fail ures when the SCH measurement mode is active The power values derived from those attempts can be used as an estimation of the upper limit of the measured signal Since the scanning already extracted all channel information it could from the incoming signal the remaining signal power is at most the one from one or more remaining cells some noise The result values are returned in the same way as the default power measurements described above Demodulation of BCCH and System Information Type Another measurement task allows the demodulation of the System Information SI Type messages sent on the BCCH Before that can be done the scanner must be synchronized on a BTS signal i e there must be at least on successful attempt to demodulate the SCH burst There are two different ways of requesting the decoding from the scanner e Either during the initial configuration procedure In the frequency table a flag can be set that the decoding process shall
26. These can be edited in the fields and sent to the scanner by clicking the corresponding button Note that the PN scanner has its own set of default values for all parameters except the frequencies The PN scanner will use its own default values unless they have been overridden by interface function calls using the dialogue buttons Because there is no default value for the frequency in the PN scanner at least one frequency must be set using the Set Frequencies dialogue button before any measurements can be taken The PN Scanner settings remain in the scanner until new interface functions are called and the only exception to this is the settings for the BCH demodulator These settings are channel specific and set to default values PDU 17 SIB 3 for each channel if the frequency settings are changed Sample Application Another buttons in the previous figure correspond to the interface functions that deal with measurements and with unloading the scanner Start Measurement starts the scanner measuring Get Result Counters causes displaying the current number of measurement results in the ViCom interface buffer as well as the number of measure ments that have been deleted if the buffer has overflowed Get 100 Results causes the application to get the next 100 measurement results from the interface buffer Results are either stored or thrown away according to the radio buttons in the Store Mode box If stored the results will be
27. average of all values 4 ROHDESSCHWARZ Throughput results Bluetooth ViComServerApplication unknown 80 86 F2BA 70 38 Throughout Average Measurement Max Through 160 kB s Ave Through 79 kB s Last Through 79 kB s Results Figure 17 12 Throughput Result View Following additional information is displayed Results e Max ThroughDisplays the maximum throughput e Ave ThroughDisplays the average throughput e Last ThroughDisplays the current throughput 17 4 5 RF Power Scan In order to start an RF power scan the following steps must be performed 1 Specify the parameters Start Frequency in Mhz and End Frequency in Mhz to define the frequency range of the RF power scan The maximum range is from 350 MHz to 4 400 MHz Task Configuration 4 ROHDESSCHWARZ Set test preferences 94 44 Stp Start Frequency in Mhz End Frequency in Mhz 350 4400 Start Test Figure 17 13 RF Power Scan Preferences 2 Click Start Test to start the scan The result of the RF power scan is a spectrum of the frequency range set before with the following axes x axis The x axis displays the frequency e y axis The y axis displays the power level for each frequency dBm IE ESE H ROHDERSCHWARZ D H Set scan preferences Bluetooth ViComServerApplication unknown PMA Frequency Parameters Status RF Power Scan Start 350 MHz End 4400 MHz 00 12 2 meas second Figure 17 14 RF Po
28. bMEAS DB REMOVAL in the structure SChannelMeasSpec accordingly GSM Measurements Demo Application Like with all other R amp S ViCom APIs a demo application is packaged with the GSM measurements The interface is similar to the other demo applications To start the application double click the C RuS ViCom_ lt version gt bin SampleForViComGSM exe file in the bin folder Refer to Sample Application The application window is a dialog that is organized in columns The left most column is similar to the one from other demo applications It contains the control center in which buttons are provided that relate to the methods in the 7 2 1 GSM Measurements Demo Application CViComGsmInterface Class and their base interface The order of the buttons implies the logical order in which they should be executed The middle column provides fields for setting the measurement and technology specific properties In the frequency list the channels that shall be measured must be speci fied This is the only setting that must be done before starting the measurement For each frequency the automatic demodulation of SI messages can be specified upfront as well as the frequency index which must be ascending starting by 0 and unique The right column contains a mixture of functions like settings management basic set tings and result evaluation i e showing the results which are written into a text file in an editor
29. dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result WB RSRQ dB Wideband RSRQ com bined from RO and R1 over the complete sys tem bandwidth sRSRQinDB100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result WB RSRQ TXO RX0 dB Wideband RSRQ mea sured from RO on Fron tend RF1 over the com plete system bandwidth sRSRQinDB100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result WB RSRQ TX1 RX0 dB Wideband RSRQ mea sured from R1 on Fron tend RF1 over the com plete system bandwidth sRSRQinDB100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result WB RSRQ TXO RX1 dB Wideband RSRQ mea sured from RO on Fron tend RF2 over the com plete system bandwidth sRSRQinDB100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result WB RSRQ TX1 RX1 dB Wideband RSRQ mea sured from R1 on Fron tend RF2 over the com plete system bandwidth sRSRQinDB100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result Building a LTE TopN View Measurement Description ViCom Name Part of ViCom struc ture WB RSRQ TX2 RX0 dB
30. e Set up an R amp S TSM Instrument connection e Set up measurement commands e Start and stop measurements from the R amp S TSM Instrument e Retrieve measurement results e Get error information e Generate log files ROMES Demo e Application R amp S TSMx Firewire Family Receiver Connection Standard Firewire Driver R amp S Processing R amp S TSMW Modules Receiver Phylis GSM WCDMA CDMA2K R amp S TSME EIE Receiver Gigabit LAN Figure 3 1 System overview of the software modules on the controlling computer Ee TL EE 18 e R amp S TSM Instruments Product Family rod ertet rt eet te de 20 Configuration 3 1 Configuration 3 1 1 Setup an R amp S TSM Instrument Connection The hardware configuration is quite straightforward The control computer is connected to an R amp S TSMx Family Receiver with an IEEE1394 FireWire connection A Windows device driver available from Rohde amp Schwarz handles communication with the R amp S TSMx Family receivers In case of the R amp S TSMW and R amp S TSME the instruments are connected with a standard LAN cable This must support Gigabit LAN and should therefore be at least a Cat5 cable The R amp S TSMW R amp S TSME is connected to a PC or Laptop via an Ethernet LAN connection on the rear panel Antenna 1 Antenna 2 GPS antenna JF O SA PC R amp S ViCOM Interface Figure 3 2 Hardware setup The R amp S TSMW has two frontends each with a co
31. lioration continue de la durabilit environnementale 1 Systeme de management environnemental certifi selon ISO 14001 1171 0200 11 V 05 01 1171020011 Customer Support Technical support where and when you need it For quick expert help with any Rohde amp Schwarz equipment contact one of our Customer Support Centers A team of highly qualified engineers provides telephone support and will work with you to find a solution to your query on any aspect of the operation programming or applications of Rohde amp Schwarz equipment Up to date information and upgrades To keep your instrument up to date and to be informed about new application notes related to your instrument please send an e mail to the Customer Support Center stating your instrument and your wish We will take care that you will get the right information Europe Africa Middle East Phone 49 89 4129 12345 customersupport rohde schwarz com North America Phone 1 888 TEST RSA 1 888 837 8772 customer support rsa rohde schwarz com Latin America Phone 1 410 910 7988 customersupport la rohde schwarz com Asia Pacific Phone 6565 13 04 88 customersupport asia rohde schwarz com China Phone 86 800 810 8228 86 400 650 5896 customersupport china rohde schwarz com ROHDE amp SCHWARZ 1171 0200 22 06 00 2 1 2 2 3 1 3 1 1 3 1 2 3 2 3 2 1 3 2 1 1 3 2 1 2 3 2 1 3 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 5 3 2 1 6 4 1 4 1 1 4 1 1 1 4 1 2 4 1 3 4 1 3 1 4
32. measured frequency in MHz the bandwidth in Hz the attenuation mode and the mea surement time in microseconds It is important to specify all of these settings If there are less than four columns entered separated by at least one space character the line is rejected when clicking the Set Frequencies button Sample Application New lines can be entered by pressing Ctrl Enter Once the frequencies are specified a click on Set Frequencies transfers these settings to the R amp S TSM Instrument if all validation routines have been passed successfully The measurement type can be one of the values listed below and is set using the Set Measurement Mode button e 0 Single Channel Mode each channel is measured until one power value can be calculated based on the measurement time specified e 1 Multi Channel Mode Channels are grouped and measured together if possible As detector the following values are valid which can be set by pressing Set Detec tor e 0QO Peak detection highest power value is chosen when multiple raw measure ments are available e 1 The raw data is averaged i e the linearized power values are averaged e 2 Root Mean Square The single linearized values from the raw measurements are squared and the square root of the sum of the power values makes the final power value Once configuration is finished the measurement can be started by clicking on Start Measurement After checki
33. of the SMeasurementDetails structure When the channel power measurement mode is enabled in the details structure the Channel PowerSpec field must be config ured properly The result of the channel power measurements are similar to the ones created by the Spectrum mode There is again an array of power values that follow some defined order The actual power values in the buffer are specified in steps of 0 5 dB and have to be added to some given minimum power value Inside the buffer the values are structured similar in two dimensions First they are grouped by channels then by sub group within one time slot DEEN 3 sMinPowerValuelnDBm100 wCountOfChannels dwCountOfResultsPerChannel 5 Figure 7 7 Result of Channel Power Measurement The figure shows the conversion from the linear result buffer into the aforementioned two dimensions and the calculation of the power values based on a specific sample The calculation is done in exactly the same way as shown in the spectrum measure ment mode That means The it power value of the k channel can be calculated as follows Pk i 0 01 sMinPowerValuelnDBm100 0 5 pbBuffer k wCountOfResultsPer Channel i J Time Slot Measurement Multiple BTS can send their information on a same GSM channel In urban areas it might happen many times that for example ten different BTS transfer data on a same physical channel The signal from one such BTS can be separated from
34. results press the Get 100 Results button It will gather 100 measurement results and write them to the log file LogFiles ViComLteMeasurements txt every time it is pressed Building a LTE TopN View 9 3 1 4 9 4 Stop Measurement To end measurement press the Stop Measurement button to stop the measurement and the Release LTE Scanner button to destroy the R amp S ViCom interface Building a LTE TopN View A TopN view is a sorted list of measurements of all LTE cells that the user wants to scan The R amp S TSMW R amp S TSME ViCom interface provides all information to build such a TopN view In this section we describe which measurements need to be configured to create a typ ical TopN view for drive testing The following measurements are provided by the LTE scanner The measurements typically shown in a TopN view in a 2x2 MIMO system are marked bold Some of the values could also be combined before showing them in the TopN for example it could be useful to display RS CINR MAX RS CINR TX1 RXO dB RS CINR TXO RX1 dB RS CINR TX0 RX0 dB RS CINR TX1 RX1 dB instead of the individual val ues This is up to the measurement philosophy of the user Measurement Description ViCom Name Part of ViCom struc ture EARFCN or frequency Center frequency of the measured channel input parameter to configure the scanner dCenterFrequencyInHz ViCom LTE SFrequen cySetting PCI The physi
35. the offset value is set to invalid The second attempt seems to provide a better result either from demodulation or time esti mation 1 154 32 2 154 32 Different BTS since they were measured on different channels 1 14 31 1 18 98 No certain conclusion can be made but the cells are very likely to be different Measuring of CDMA 2000 Signals 1 98 87 1 98 89 Probably identical BTS since channel and indicator are equal sec ond PN Off set is pre sumably cor rect 1 98 87 1 98 87 Identical BTS when PN off set was demodula ted all val ues are the same 8 1 1 2 PN Offset Detection The identification of a PN offset is done as shown in the figure below At first the signal is handled as pseudo noise if all attempts fail to match the identifying sequence in the signal The only value reported now is the inband power of the channel After some signal power can be separated from the noise and other information in a channel the CIRs of the F PICH is are measured and reported The PN offset is still unknown at that point of time if no prior demodulation has been done In that case the PN offset is set to an invalid value 65535 If there has been a successful demodula tion on that frequency before the new incoming signal is set into relation to the previ ous demodulation result Based on the arrival time the scanner makes an assumption what PN off
36. warz ViCom Xxx namespace e g RohdeSchwarz ViCom LTE for LTE Load handling has two variants one with CVicomError return parameter and one with out CVicomError throwing an exception instead of returning a CVicomError The R amp S ViCom API can only be used when a specific set of files is installed on the target machine In this section the list is given For each technology there are some specific DLLs that are required only for the technology besides a basic set of files General Files These files are necessary to run any of the supported technologies To run the R amp S ViCom specific technology API and or the BCCH demodulator the list of the general i e common files is completed with the needed files for that technol ogy The common and technology specific files are listed in the following tables What you need Table 4 1 Common Files Dynamic Libraries Supporting Files Header Files AppSpecificRuSLogFilelnter ELF Firmware Files ViComBasicErrors h face di TSMx Application elf ViComBasiclnterface h CMS IMB all tsme_xxxxxxxx bin ViComBasiclInterfaceData h See Al TsmeBitFilelnfo txt ViComError h SE EE LteMimoScannerRsCinrEstima ViComLoader h GE tors hex ViComDataProcessor h IMD_Base dll PEC Files k1394api dll TSMUFrames pec libfftw3 3 dll TSMWFrames pec libfftw3f 3 dll Microsoft Libraries log4cxx dll Visual C Runtime Libraries ModulePool dll Configurarion Files PhylisCrashReport dll PhylisKernalRuntime
37. which are the results of the FFTs applied to the digitized signal The data from the FFTs is reduced to a configurable number of spectrum power values for a GSM channel Therefore the channel bandwidth of 200 KHz is divided in N equally sized intervals For each interval the highest power value is used as character istic value From that spectrum data one sub spectrum result is derived This time aggregation can either be done in the same way as described above or the root mean square is calcu Measuring of GSM Signals lated for the set of sub channel peaks To illustrate that calculation the figure Spec trum Calculation shows the combination of 3 FFTs to one single sub spectrum Each sub spectrum is based on a number of FFTs The number of FFTs is chosen to best fit into the collection time constraint specified in the spectrum setting p f Channel FFT 1 FFT 2 FFT 3 Sub Spectrum Figure 7 2 Spectrum Calculation There are five sub channels and three FFTs shown in the example From the in this sample highly reduced amount of raw data the sub channel data per scan is found by using the peaks For time aggregation also the peak power value is used The first and the third sub channel have their time peak in the first FFT The second sub channel is taken from the second one and the last two values are derived from the third FFT The settings can be defined in the CViComGSMNWSInterfaceData SSpectrum
38. 10 spectrum lines in the resulting spectrum of the FFT contribute to the overall power value for one channel For example if two channels shall be measured with a bandwidth of 50 kHz at frequen cies 400 1 and 400 15 MHz and one with 3 1 MHz at 401 7 MHz This would mean that the total bandwidth is 3 2 MHz and since this bandwidth would be split into 512 spectrum lines the distance between each line is 6 25 kHz In this case two groups would be created from these three channels because the 6 25 resolution would not lead to 10 power values for the channels with 50 kHz bandwidth Measurement Scheduling One major difference to the other APIs in the R amp S ViCom library is that the measure ment results are not necessarily delivered when the internal processing is finished or some time has elapsed One of the available operation modes works in that way but there is also the possibility to make the result creation depending on an external trigger device rr User Manual 1505 1329 42 26 209 R amp S ViCom R amp S ViCom CW Technology PE 13 1 2 1 Free Run The Free Run Mode works without external triggering and processes the raw data as soon as enough chunks are available to serve the required measurement time In sin gle channel mode that means that one channel is measured until the total time required to measure the raw chunks exceeds the required measurement time Based on these chunks the overall power is calculated as described
39. 10 26 HFile GB Y franeta view 3 Wwiew ViComGpsErrors h 26 08 2014 11 21 H File e ViComGpsInterface h 18 12 2014 16 11 H File Di Network ViComGpsInterfaceData h 13 02 2015 14 05 H File E ViComGsmErrors h 19 09 2013 13 12 H File Se 4 m d r A 42 items Access to the runtime files libraries etc the interface libraries and other files are found in the sub directory bin 5 2 2 On Startup A typical series of steps is described below that an application might follow in order to start using the R amp S TSM Instrument Create a CViComError object to be used as a parameter in R amp S ViCom functions in order to get an error code if the function fails 5 2 2 1 Connecting to the R amp S TSMx Family Connecting the R amp S Vicom interface to the R amp S TSMx Family is realized in two steps Create interface Create a CViComLoader object to get the R amp S ViCom interface that you need To do this you must instantiate the CviComLoader template with the chosen inter face class for example CViComLoader CViComWcdmaInterface myViComLoader Connect interface After the application has finished initialising call the CVicomLoader function Con nect with the CViComError object as a parameter for example bool bLoaded myViComLoader Connect myViComError 5 2 2 2 Start Programming Loading the chosen interface takes 20 30 seconds since the complete FireWire chain is searched for all connect
40. 17 10 LTE Scan Result View Following additional information is displayed Parameters Displays the configured parameters for the LTE scan Status Displays the measurement duration and the measurement rate The status button dis plays the colored statuses previously mentioned see Chapter 17 4 1 GSM RSSI Scan on page 236 17 4 4 Throughput Test The throughput test case is useful to find out the throughput speed of your connection This allows to decide which connection type WLAN or Bluetooth should be used In order to start the throughput test the following steps must be performed 1 Specify the parameter Buffer size in Byte The default buffer size is 20480 byte ROHDESSCHWARZ Set test preferences 9444 sepas Buffer size in Byte 20480 Start Test Figure 17 11 Throughput Preferences 2 Click Start Test to start the throughput test Task Configuration 3 In order to s87top the scan use Stop scan in the menu inflator in the top right corner For WLAN the optimal buffer size varies between 950 000 byte and 1 000 000 byte For Bluetooth the optimal buffer size varies between 81 000 byte and 165 000 byte The result of the throughput test case is a line chart with the following axes e x axisThe x axis displays the number of measurements e y axisThe y axis displays the corresponding throughput value kbit s The blue line shows the measured values The orange line represents the visualized
41. 2 4 3 4 3 1 4 3 2 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 2 4 4 Contents Conventions Used in the Documentation 13 Important NEE asian Eege 14 hire 14 Key to Technical Terms uenerat eme eiie iere dE nes 14 General es 17 Configuratio M pL 18 Setup an R amp S TSM Instrument ConnectiON cocooooocccnninococnnncononnnnnnnonnnonnccnnnnnonnccannn ono 18 R amp S ViCom Interface Functions ssssssssssssssseeee eene nnne 20 R amp S TSM Instruments Product Family eese nnne 20 Technology Specific Features cccsscecccceteseeccceenseecccshedageccccnresececcnteageceeetedauaccanersne 21 WCDMA m X 21 CHI Peatecead 22 CDMA Tlu om PY 22 Mj SM 22 WIMAX 23 TD SCDMA E 23 Getting KE ET C 24 What you n t 24 Hardware Redq iremlents nain vetere a EE ee ua Rr Vea n vs deed aed aen 24 Synchronizing the R amp S TSM Instruments Internal Clock from an External Source 25 Software UE 25 Installing the R amp S ViCom Interface Dataset and Demo Applications 26 R amp S ViCom Interface Files rre rire a 26 SE UE 29
42. 2 3 or 6 sub bands o fig the 1MHz BW around center frequency where PBCH is broadcast NB sub band RS CINR Narrowband sub band pNarrowbandRsCinrVal ViCom LTE SMeasRe TX2 dB RS CINR measurements ues sult SSignals SReferen 2 3 or 6 values are hee un Po 5 bRsCinrMeasResultCon ceSignal provided in 2 3 or 6 sub bands o fig the 1MHz BW around center frequency where PBCH is broadcast NB sub band RS CINR Narrowband sub band pNarrowbandRsCinrVal ViCom LTE SMeasRe TX3 dB RS CINR measurements ues sult SSignals SReferen 2 3 or 6 values are GE e CE E je bRsCinrMeasResultCon ceSignal provided in 2 3 or 6 sub bands o fig ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SSignals SReferen ceSignal SSYNC CINR high speed for servers CINR of the S SYNC signal for possible serv ing cells CINR gt OdB up to 200 measurements per seconds pfCinrSSyncInDB timestamp dwPcTimeS tampInMs pdwTimeFromStartOf BlockInNs ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SSignals SPower Value PSYNC CINR high speed for servers CINR of the P SYNC signal for possible serv ing cells CINR gt OdB up to 200 measurements per seconds pfCinrPSyncInDB timestamp dwPcTimeS tampInMs pdwTimeFromStartOf BlockInNs ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SSignals SPower Value SSYNC CINR normal speed for interferers CINR of the S SYNC signal for possible inter fering cells CINR OdB fCinrInDB if pdwTime
43. 2 Sweep Reporting value 1 3 Sweep 4 Sweep Reporting value 2 5 Sweep Buffer 6 Sweep Reporting value 3 T Sweep 8 Sweep Reporting value 4 9 Sweep 10 Sweep Reporting value 5 Sweeps are done with rate Values are reported with rate fMaxMeasRateTSMWInHz fM ax ReportingRatelnHz Figure 11 16 Aggregated measured data Measurement data is aggregated from measured to reported data The buffer needs to keep as many sweeps as are needed for the aggregation to reduce the rate from fMaxMeasRateInHz to fMaxReportingRateInHz Therefore the minimum buffer length to be configured as dwMaxAgeOfBufferedMeasInMs is 1 fMaxMeasRateInHz fMaxMeasRateInHz fMaxReportingRateInHz 1 fMaxReportingRatelnHz Therefore dwMaxAgeOfBufferedMeasInMs set this to 1 fMaxReportingRateInHz For a normal drive test application the following settings are recommended Using R amp S TSMW RF Power Scan in a Typical Drive Test Use Case ViCom REPOWERSCAN SSpectrumSettings fMaxMeasRateInHz 10 fMaxReportingRateInHz 5 dwMaxAgeOfBufferedMeasInMs 200 These rates are the requested measurement rates to the R amp S TSMW The R amp S o TSMW will aim to fulfill these rates but depending on other measurement tasks run ning on the scanner e g GSM WCDMA CDMA EV DO LTE it may not be possible to fulfill the rates This needs to be taken into account by the developer of the drive test SW or the user of that SW 11 6 4 Data Aggregation For
44. 22 1 Permanent 8 TSME K28 1514 6842 02 396728081230820681532616209685 Customer Order 2014 07 14 12 22 1 Permanent gt al m r Inactive Options Option Type Option Material No Option Key Privilege Time Stamp License Count Activation Type Valid 2 TSME KIB 1514403 02 068868269942190892583007811966 Customer Order 2014 07 14 12 22 1 Permanent 3 TSME IQB 15147410 02 058963841230481818223913843103 Customer Order 2014 07 14 12 22 1 Permanent 4 TSMA K3B 1524 6200 02 305809366234697682031380291814 Customer Order 2014 07 14 12 22 1 Permanent 5 TSME K4B 1514 7432 02 303368340805107001340857573860 Customer Order 2014 07 14 12 22 1 Permanent 6 TSME KAB 1514 7384 02 028981978700854781602270091283 Customer Order 2014 07 14 12 22 1 Permanent zi m D Device Analysis Output Qosros ASowarnings Do infos Descripti Figure 4 3 R amp S TSME Device Manager window The lower part of the R amp S TSME Device Manager window shows the current errors warnings and info Device Analysis Output Br2eErors A2wamings imfos Descrip 3 Self alignment data is missing 4 Shutdown temperature has been manually modified to 0 C default 75 C 5 A newer FPGA for section 0 is available It s possible but not recommended to update basic FPGA ui Figure 4 4 Device analysis output For the complete information on the tool see the R amp S TSME User Manual 4 4 3 1 Obtaining Firmware and Correction Data
45. 5 6 3 The Request PN Scanner Settings button highlighted in the following figure displays all PN Scanner settings which apply at that moment to the scanner This button can be clicked after starting a measurement and will display the settings in the appropriate dialogue fields The settings can also be stored in an R amp S TSM Instruments settings file tsm and later reloaded using the Save and Load buttons respectively There is also a function to force a reset of the PN Scanner interface which has to be used if the R amp S TSM Instruments are not responding due to longer disconnection or due to reset or power off during PN Scanner operation Miscellaneous Cancel and OK buttons terminate the application OK will store the settings in the WCDMA3GPP PnScannerSettings bin file of the application directory If available this file is used to initialise the application not the scanner after reloading The interface must be reloaded if a new R amp S TSM Family instance is connected to the FireWire or an R amp S TSM Family instance is switched off Note that although short interruptions of the IEEE1394 connection are tolerated the R amp S TSM Family instance must not be switched off disconnected or re ordered while the interface is loading or loaded To see the code of the test application in MS Visual Studio open the project file SampleForViComWcdma vcxproj in the folder SampleForViComWcdma WCDMA BCH
46. 5 Setting up a Custom Project It is similar to the mode described previously but utilizes more receiver resources since no probability calculation is done to reduce resource allocation like above The demodulator then does all it can do to demodulate the result in the given time constraint if specified As in the Demodulate BTS mode a time out can be set for this operation in which it must complete Otherwise the request is stopped The time out can again be 0 which tells the demodulator to try demodulation until it succeeds It is also possible to clear the contents of the internal message containers associ ated with a channel and the BTS Two commands are designed for that purpose e Demodulate BTS RESET 5 Clears only the frame container content within one basestation of a channel This can be used to explicitly restart demodulation for a specific cell e Demodulate CHANNEL RESET 6 This clears all demodulation results associated with a certain channel After this command the demodulation for that channel will restart according to the configura tion made before the measurement was started The Demodulate BTS and Demodulate BTS FORCE commands have a sec ond variation These modes are e Demodulate BTS OLD 7 e Demodulate BTS OLD FORCE 8 The difference is in both cases that old results might be returned if available The old content can be deleted with the Reset command described above All commands can be issu
47. Address IP Netmask 192 168 0 2 255 255 255 0 currently active 192 168 0 2 255 255 255 0 Please carefully verify IP address und netmask settings in the corresponding input fields before pressing Change IP Setting IP address and netmask settings of the host PC LAN adapter potentially need to be adapted in order to reconnect with the R amp S TSMW successfully Done 0 J Local intranet 100 gt 18 2 2 Option Handling The options currently installed on the R amp S TSMW are listed in the Active Optionkeys section of the page An additional section lists the options that were once active but have been disabled in the meantime R amp S TSMW Configuration Go y http 192 168 0 2 ln Google File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ke d Erase Tsmw 1503 3001K02 100009 Active Optionkeys Option Option Material Index Type Number 1 TSMW 1503 3960 02 K1 21 TSMW 1503 4514 02 K21 22 TSMW 1503 4520 02 K22 26 TSMW 1510 8792 02 K26 27 TSMW 1503 4537 02 K27 28 TSMW 1503 4543 02 K28 29 TSMW 1503 4550 02 K29 TSMW 1503 4589 02 K121 TSMW 1503 4595 02 K122 TSMW 1503 4789 02 K126 TSMW 1503 4614 02 K127 TSMW 1503 4566 02 K128 TSMW 1503 4572 02 K129 TSMW 1503 4795 02 K221 TSMW 1503 4808 02 K222 Inactive Optionkeys Option Option Material Index Type Number 0 TSMW 1514 4327 02 380469971912113853
48. Channels Freq MHz 2145 000000 Channel Time Resolution ms SEE Result Mask for 2 x 2 np Result Mask for 2 x 4 r CINR Threshold for Rank dB 0 00 Max No of eNodeBs r Min Center RSRP dBm 110 00 Max RSRP Difference dB 10 00 Min S SYNC CINR dB o ME Cancel a Figure 9 7 Additional channel settings for single channel Leave the All Channels checkbox at the right upper corner of the dialog box unchecked to configure a single channel In this single channel configuration mode you can switch among the channels by clicking the big horizontal spin control at the right side of the dialog box or you can directly input the channel number into the Channel box just above the spin control The large vertical horizontal progress bar is an obvious indicator of the channel you are configuring it changes its progress position when the channel is changed If you made some changes in the dialog box you will be prompted to save the changes to that channel before switching to another channel GUI Sample Application Additional Channel Settings Frequency Settings Wideband RS CINR Settings RSSI Settings Iv jai ls OFDM Symbols Per Slot Average Meas Rate Hz RSSI Meas Time ms E 6 Symbols 7 Symbols 1 000000 tt bur Average Meas Rate Hz Resource Blocks in Subband Spectrum Meas Time ms moo u
49. Diagnostics InformatioN oomimmiiiii ina 30 RS232 Output with the R amp S TSMx Family Products errereen eeren 30 Managing more than one R amp S TSM Instrument sssseseseeeeeeeseeenetsensstrresirresrrsssrnene 31 R amp S TSMX Family Receivers o eate ect need ieee a E a 31 R amp S TSMW and R amp S TSME Receivers nen 31 Getting Started with R amp S TSME eeeeesssseeeeeeeeeeeeneen nnne nnn nennen 32 4 4 1 4 4 2 4 4 3 4 4 3 1 4 4 3 2 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 4 4 4 2 4 4 4 3 5 1 5 1 1 5 1 1 1 5 12 5 2 5 2 1 5 2 2 5 2 2 1 5 2 2 2 5 2 2 3 5 2 3 5 2 4 5 2 5 5 2 6 5 3 5 3 1 5 3 2 5 4 5 4 1 5 4 1 1 5 5 5 5 1 5 5 2 ronda it li ad dida Doc 32 R amp S ViCom KNOWN ISSUES ridere iode tee concerted ee ena ERR de 33 R amp S TSME Diagnosis and Updates 33 Obtaining Firmware and Correction Data Updates 34 Automatic firmware updates 35 Getting Started with R amp S TSME MIMO Measurements sse 35 rond 35 R amp S TSME Setup for MIMO Operation Mode 36 R amp S ViCom Setup for MIMO Operation Mode 37 Programming with the R amp S ViCom Interface 38 Device Details enne inti NNNNA ENANA EN ESSA eiue c e xD Pann SEENEN 38 Measurement scheduling on the R amp S TSM Instruments renerne rennene 38 Automatic Load Handling 39 Resource Allocation on the R amp S TOM 40 Start Programming erinnerte erae
50. FromStartOfBlockInNs NULL ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SSignals SPower Value SSYNC Power high speed for servers Power of S SYNC signal up to 200 measurements per seconds fPowerlnDBm timestamp dwPcTimeS tampInMs pdwTimeFromStartOf BlockInNs ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SSignals SPower Value User Manual 1505 1329 42 26 143 Building a LTE TopN View Measurement Description ViCom Name Part of ViCom struc ture SSYNC CINR for serv ers and interferers CINR of the S SYNC signal take fCinrInDB if pdwTi meFromStartOfBlock InNs NULL take pfCinrSSyncInDB if pdwTimeFromsStartOf BlockInNs NULL ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SSignals SPower Value PSYNC Power high speed for servers Power of P SYNC signal up to 200 measurements per seconds fPowerlnDBm pfSSyncToPSyncRa tiolnDB timestamp dwPcTimeS tampInMs pdwTimeFromStartOf BlockInNs ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SSignals SPower Value ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult Ssignals CINR of the S SYNC based on amplitude noise CINR of the SSS in dB based on amplitude noise The measurement performed for this result value reduces noise con tributions produced by transmitter or receiver phase noise If either receiver or transmitter phase noise contribu tions are not neglectable then the amplitude based CINR is higher than the CINR based on the regular CINR mea sur
51. GHz 3 GHz 6 GHz 6 GHz 4 4 GHz quency Resolution 10 kHz 10 kHz 10 kHz 10 kHz 140 Hz 140 Hz Bandwidth RAKE 2500 2500 51202 Limited by Limited by Receivers SW only SW only High Speed Y Mode Parallel Mea Y Y Y surements Max Mea 333 Hz 40 Hz 625 Hz 2 surement WCDMA 2 Speed Sin te gle Mode Supported technologies GSM Y Y 7 Y Y WCDMA Y Y v y s Y Y 3 2 1 3 2 1 1 R amp S TSM Instruments Product Family Device type R amp S TSMU R amp S TSMQ R amp S R amp S TSML R amp S TSMW R amp S TSME SA MUA TSML G cw m B L TSMC a TSML W az CEE CDMA y Y Li e s 7 EVDO LTE Y Y Cw Y Y Y RF Power Y Y Y Y Scan RS 232 Y Y Y WIMAX 2 TD SCDMA 1 only R amp S TSML G 2 only R amp ST SML W and R amp S TSML C The type of R amp S TSM Instruments can be assigned during the usage of the R amp S ViCom API and once the initial setup has been performed The SConnectedReceiver structure contains the type descriptor of the connected instru ment It can be requested using the Get ConnectedReceivers method of the basic R amp S ViCom interface after the ViComLoader has been used to load an inter face successfully Technology Specific Features Some of the functionality that is specified to a certain technology API differs in the same way as described above for different devices WCDMA
52. RSRP value based on the reference signal power measurement of the 6 innermost resource blocks 1MHz BW around center frequency If both RO and R1 can be received the average of both is takes to compute RSRP bAntennaMaskUsedForRSRP indicated if only RO or the combination of RO and R1 has been used pNarrowbandRSRPinDBm100 RSRP from narrowband scanner per eNB s antenna port e RSRP RO e RSRP R1 e RSRP R2 e RSRP R3 RSRQ sPBCHbasedRSRQinDB10 RSRQ value based on sCenterRSRPinDBm100 and the total inband power in those symbols used to transmit the PBCH RS CINR The NB RS CINR measurement in pNarrowbandRsCinrValues delivers one value for the complete measurement bandwidth 72 SC or individual values per configurable number of sub bands 1 2 3 or 6 depending how the setting is done see Narrowband Measurements Configuration Measurements are provided for e NB RS CINR TXO dB e NBRS CINR TX1 dB e NB RS CINR TX2 dB e NB RS CINR TX3 dB Measuring of LTE Signals 9 1 4 Wideband Measurement Results If any of the wideband scanner modules are active the returned measurement results include also wideband results e Wideband Reference Signal Measurement Results 126 e Wideband RSSI Measurement Results 128 9 1 4 1 Wideband Reference Signal Measurement Results The results are available in ViCom LTE SMeasResult SWidebandRsCinrResult The scanner provides measurement results according to the tasked se
53. RX0 dBm Noise clipped RSRP value based on the wide band reference signal power measurement in 0 01 dB For this value the measured RS CINR was taken into account to correct the RSRP result regarding noise and interference Com bined from RO and R1 over the complete sys tem bandwidth Noise clipped RSRP value based on the wide band reference signal power measurement in 0 01 dB For this value the measured RS CINR was taken into account to correct the RSRP result regarding noise and interference Mea sured from RO on Fron tend RF1 over the com plete system bandwidth sNoiseClippedRSR PinDBm100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort sNoiseClippedRSR PinDBm100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result WB RSRP noise clip ped TX1 RX0 dBm Noise clipped RSRP value based on the wide band reference signal power measurement in 0 01 dB For this value the measured RS CINR was taken into account to correct the RSRP result regarding noise and interference Mea sured from R1 on Fron tend RF1 over the com plete system bandwidth sNoiseClippedRSR PinDBm100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result Building a LTE TopN View Measurement Description ViCom Name Part of ViC
54. S Set TSMx Time Base SecmeTwemee Measurement Rate mHz 10000 Max velocity km h 100 Demodulation for EVDO Set em it puter Full Sync Rate mHz 1000 Eh tres ddia Jo F Use PPS Synchronisation Set Fre i PN Offs Lim 5000 equendes Short Sync Rate mHz 5000 Faling Edge Delay sec p SetRate Short Sync Range Chips 160 AE Saas Stop after CDMA 2000 Sync BCH Demodulation Settings Set max Velocity Special Sync Channel Demodulation Mode valid 1 2 4 2 y Store Mode 7 Start Measurement new line Ctrl Enter e Seco Channel Msgld Mode t 100ms e un Re ped Set Demodulation Settings Decode L3 Messages Start Measurement Get Result Counters 7 Result Viewer 3 During Measurement new line Ctrl Enter Get 100 Results Channel BTS ePdu Mode t i00ms sue Request Write exe Stop Measurement E Browse Release PN Scanner View Terminate PN Scanner Results Figure 8 3 R amp S ViCom CDMA EVDO technology demo application Below that element some CDMA 2000 specific settings can also be specified These measurement settings are described in the following sections e Setting the PN Offsets for Time Eastimatton nn 107 e Sync Channel Demodulation Mode 108 e Performing Measurements ccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeenaenaeeereeeeeeeess 108 e Sample Application inicia ad aca 109 Setting the PN Offsets for Time Estimation To specify which P
55. S TSMA scanner R amp S Vicom R amp S Remote Vicom Smartphone Measurement Application Tablet Measurement Application R amp S Remote ViCom Client Connect Configure Start GetResult Stop 0 B Disconnect s E LAN WLAN j Bluetooth R amp S ViCom R amp S TSMA R amp S Remote ViCom Server Provided by R amp S Developped by OEM Figure 17 1 R amp S Remote ViCom Architecture In contrast to the standard R amp S ViCom application interface API the R amp S Remote ViCom API is based on a client server architecture as shown in previous figure The Remote ViCom client is running together with the measurement application on a smartphone or tablet PC Via LAN WLAN or Bluetooth the client is communicating with the Remote ViCom server which is running on the R amp S TSMA For details about the R amp S TSMA see the R amp S TSMA Autonomous Mobile Network Scanner User Manual R amp S No 1177 5610 02 17 2 17 3 17 3 1 Example of R amp S Remote ViCom Application with R amp S TSMA Usage of R amp S Remote ViCom Interface The delivery of the R amp S Remote ViCom package contains a sample application com piled as an apk and the related structured source code It can be downloaded also from the R amp S website http www rohde schwarz com en software tsma The following measurement tasks are supported by the sample application e Scanning of GSM UMTS and LTE e RF Powe
56. Scan in a Typical Drive Test Use Case This section describes the typical R amp S ViCom settings and their background for a typi cal drive test application e Frequency ROESOLUIONL oer ese rre tu oce dee tne 196 e Measurement Geitings nennen entrent senten 196 e Measurement Sal ecl cce A ae 197 e Data Aggregation E 199 11 6 1 Frequency Resolution Recommended mode is to enable autobandwidth set to 1 The scanner will split the frequency span automatically in blocks of 20 MHz to make most efficient use of the R amp S TSMW RF frontend ViCom REPOWERSCAN SSpectrumSettings bAutoBandwidth 1 this means auto bandwidth is enabled Then the frequency resolution is AF 20MHz 1 15 FFT size Recommended FFT size is 1024 ViCom REPOWERSCAN SSpectrumSettings etFFTSize set this to RFROWERSCANTSMW_FFTSIZE_1024 1024 With FFT size of 1024 the frequency resolution is AF 22 46 kHz with is fully sufficient to measure power and interference in cellular networks 11 6 2 Measurement Settings Following settings are recommended for drive test use case Using R amp S TSMW RF Power Scan in a Typical Drive Test Use Case ViCom REPOWERSCAN SSpectrumSettings bAutoAttenuation set this to 1 to enable automatic attenuation management in the instrument Other setting is expert mode eWindowType set this to RFROWERSCAN_WINDOWTYPE_FLATTOP 4 This is the same window as used by a spectrum analyzer Other settings are exp
57. Signals Bit 0 RO Bit 1 R1 Bit 2 R2 Bit 3 R3 For example to measure RO and R1 bit O and bit 1 needs to be set so decimal 3 bTransmitAntennaSelectionMask Which scanner frontend shall be used for measurements can be configured with dwFrontEndSelectionMask Bit 0 frontend O Bit 1 frontend 1 E g to measure on both frontends bit O and bit 1 need to be set so decimal 3 dwFrontEndSelectionMask The scanner can provide sub band measurements if activated When configuring the scanner the granularity can be defined by setting wNumberOfRBsInsub band With wNumberOfRBsInsub band 1 one sub band value is provided per resource block It is possible to use a coarser granularity and aggregate up to 5 RB in one sub band measuremenet wNumberOfRBsInsub band 5 Typically sub band measurements are performed for possible server cells only not for interferes The following thresholds can be set depending on the results of the narrow band scanner bMaxCountOfeNodeBs Maximum number of eNodeB s per channel index for which sub band measurements shall be done Typical range 3 to 5 sMinCenterRsrpInDBm100 The minimum required sub band RSRP value in 0 01 dB obtained from the narrow band LTE technology measurement for the eNodeB to enable the sub band measure ments Typical range 110 dBm to 130 dBm wMaxRsrpDiffToBestCellInDB100 The maximum difference distance allowed in sub band RSRP in 0 01 dB obtai
58. TSMQ Radio Network Analyzer R amp S TSMQ Multi Tech R amp S TSMU Radio Network Analyzer R amp S TSMU Single Tech Key to Technical Terms Abbreviation R amp S TSMW Meaning High End Radio Network Analyzer R amp S TSMW Multi Tech R amp S TSMx Family Signifies any of the R amp S TSML W R amp S TSML C R amp S TSML G R amp S TSML CW R amp S TSML E R amp S TSML GW R amp S TSMU or R amp S TSMQ SC Scrambling Code SIB System Information Block SSCH Secondary Synchronisation Channel TDD Time Division Duplex TD SCDMA Time Division Synchronous CDMA UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunications System UTRA UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access WCDMA Wideband CDMA WiMAX Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access 3 General Description This document describes the R amp S ViCom software interface for R amp S TSM Instruments Using the R amp S ViCom interface developers can easily integrate the R amp S TSM Instru ments into their own Coverage Measurement Software applications as a kind of OEM receiver The R amp S TSM Instruments offer solutions for various kinds of mobile radio network technologies e g GSM WCDMA TD SCDMA CDMA2000 EVDO LTE WiMAX and CW RF Power Measurement For more details about the R amp S TSM Instruments refer to manuals mentioned in Chapter 2 1 References on page 14 The R amp S ViCom interface allows you to
59. There is no support of LTE for the R amp S TSMx Family this technology is only supported by the R amp S TSMW and R amp S TSME The programming API for the R amp S TSMW R amp S TSME and the LTE specific measure ment details are described in the following sections A short introduction to which and how the LTE measurements are made in the R amp S ViCom is given After that the LTE sample application included in the R amp S ViCom delivery is explained The LTE sample application is a command line application similar to the small sample programs shown in the other R amp S ViCom APIs e IMaasutnng OF LTE TEE 112 e LTE BCH Demodulationm EE 132 e GUliSample elei e DEE 132 e Building a LTE TORN RE 140 Measuring of LTE Signals Compared to GSM and WCDMA LTE is a fairly new technology Experience in the field of measurement modes and data analysis is currently gained and the ViCom LTE module supports building such knowledge by providing different power quality and channel impulse response measurements The LTE module itself offers a simple and straightforward interface to achieve that The configuration of an LTE measurement mainly consists of a list of frequencies that shall be monitored This frequency is the center frequency of the LTE channel The LTE module consists of three scanner algorithms that build on top of each other e The Narrowband scanner takes measurements from the inner 72 LTE subcarriers on SYNC and Reference
60. Time Base Set Result Buffer Set Frequencies Set Measurement Details Set Demodulation Settings Start Measurement Get Result Counters Get Results Stop Measurement Release GSM NWS Scanner Terminate GSM NWS Scanner Renate System Information Type Demodulation Requests 4 At Start of Measurement Sample Lines o w o During Measurement Sample Lines 0 2bis 0 3 Frequ SI Ind Index Type SCHInd new line Ctrl Enter 30 OK Cancel Load Save Request GSM NWS Settings t 100ms Receiver Index D 2 Result Buffer Depth 150 GE Rate 0 Result Count To Read 80 Measurement details setup TSMx Time Base Setup measurement details for start of measurement Redefine measurement details during measurement Store Mode C Throw Results Away Store Results p Result Viewer Total Power Offset in dB10th 0 Send SI Type Demod Request View Write exe Browse Figure 7 15 Enhanced Sample Application GSM demodulator In the left list the configuration is entered to setup an initial configuration of the demod ulation process that is used when the measurement is started Four values have to be entered in one line and each line is one configuration record These values have the following meaning e Channel Index The index of the frequency for which the configuration records shall be applied entered in the lis
61. Updates The R amp S TSME Device Manager is always provided with the most recent basic FPGA If a newer one becomes available due to security or functional issues a message is issued in the Device Analysis Output at the bottom of the R amp S TSME Device Man 4 4 3 2 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 Getting Started with R amp S TSME ager window In this case and only in this case it is recommended that you install this update on your R amp S TSME The correction data on your R amp S TSME should always be kept up to date Available updates are also indicated in the Device Analysis Output and it is recommended that you install them Risk of inoperability of device due to FPGA update Before performing an update make sure you have a stable power supply and the LAN connection will not be interrupted Both updates take a few minutes If the LAN connection is interrupted during an FPGA update the device may become inoperable Thus only install such an update if it is explicitly recommended by a mes sage in the Device Analysis Output of the R amp S TSME Device Manager or by the Rohde amp Schwarz support center You can update the basic FPGA or the correction data on your R amp S TSME directly from the R amp S TSME Device Manager in the Update tab The currently installed ver sions and the newest supported version of the FPGA or the minimum recommended version of the correction data are indicated Automatic firmware updates Each t
62. ViComCdmaErrors h ViComCdmalnterface h ViComCdmalnterfaceData h Table 4 5 R amp S ViCom LTE Technology related Interface Files Dynamic Libraries LteDemodulator dll LteScanner dll ViComLTEw dll ViComLTEe dll LteMimoScanner dll Header Files ViComLteErrors h ViComLtelnterface h ViComLtelnterfaceData h Table 4 6 R amp S ViCom WiMAX Technology related Interface Files Dynamic Libraries WiMaxDemodulator dll ViComWIMAXe dll ViComWIMAXw dll WiMaxScanner dll WiMaxScannerSync dll Header Files ViComWiMaxErrors h ViComWiMaxlnterface h ViComWiMaxlnterfaceData h Table 4 7 R amp S ViCom RF Power Scan Technology Prerequisites related Interface Files Dynamic Libraries Header Files ViComRFPOWERSCANe dll ViComRFPOWERSCANw dll ViComRFScan dll ViComRFScanErrors h ViComRFScanlnterface h ViComRFScanlnterfaceData h ViComRFPowerScanErrors h ViComRFPowerScanlnterface h ViComRFPowerScanInterfaceData h Table 4 8 R amp S ViCom TD SCDMA Technology rela ted Interface Files Dynamic Libraries Header Files TDSCdmaDemodulator dll TDSCdmaScanner dll ViComTDSCDMAe dll ViComTDSCDMAw dll ViComTdScdmaErrors h ViComTdScdmalnterface h ViComTdScdmalnterfaceData h Table 4 9 R amp S ViCom CW Technology related Interface Files Dynamic Libraries Header Files ViComCW dll ViComCWErrors h ViComCWinterface h ViComCWinterfaceData h Table 4 10 R amp
63. Worker thread to communicate with a single R amp S TSM Instrument User Manual 1505 1329 42 26 174 11 2 2 Architecture and Functionality of the RF Scan Technology R amp S ViCom RF Power Scan Technology Interface ueJnsee A EE 1 EC E ucc ay W JINSE N Figure 11 2 RF Power Scan Technology Architecture The Post Processor Chain In the previous section the calculation of the derived results was described as a way to convert the raw measurement data from the R amp S TSM Instrument to a more conven ient presentation form The details how to configure that post process are explained in this section One important part of data preparation is reduction Since it is not useful in most cases to use each of the incoming values for analysis it is crucial to reduce the amount of data to a manageable size For example most GUI applications are not able to display all measured power values in the frequency range from 100 MHz to 1 GHz using the native solution of the R amp S TSM Instrument of 12 8 KHz This would result in approx 70000 values which is difficult to show using about 1000 pixels width of modern screens The post processing step is designed in a modular way so that processing is split up in small units The processing units work in a pipeline Each element takes the input of the previous element applies its own filter and calculation mechanisms and provides the result to the next element Arc
64. accuracy of the time drift can be estimated by considering the standard deviation i e if the deviation is low then the calculated time drift is likely to be accu rate Peak Information If the signal of one CPICH has reached the scanner via several different paths there may be several peaks either overlapping or single peaks The R amp S TSM Instruments separate these peaks and returns a list of structures containing peak information The information returned includes the time delay of the peak relative to the start of the measurement and a measurement of the peak power Each time that the R amp S TSM Instruments synchronise to a CPICH by using the Pri mary and Secondary Synchronisation Channels it also returns the inband power and the code power measurements for the PSCH and SSCH If the R amp S TSM Instruments are reporting a measurement of a CPICH to which it synchronised previously then these values will not be reported In the peak information structure the R amp S TSM Instruments will also report an esti mate of the frequency drift of the CPICH signal This frequency drift could be caused by movement of the receiver if it is mounted in a moving vehicle for example How ever if the receiver is stationary then the frequency drift of a Node B can be mea sured Sample Application The sample application is a simple implementation of the R amp S ViCom Interface to con trol the R amp S TSM Instruments PN scanner It may
65. bandwidth Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Bandwidth Bandwidth Bandwidth Center Frequency Center Frequency Center Frequency IQ Data leading to IQ Data leading to IQ Data leading to a single power a single power a single power measurement value measurement value measurement value Figure 13 2 Single channel measurement S User Manual 1505 1329 42 26 208 R amp S ViCom R amp S ViCom CW Technology 13 1 1 2 13 1 2 Multi Channel Measurement To gain high measurement performance the channels specified to be measured are grouped together to cover a bandwidth of at most 4 MHz in each group One such group is then measured together which leads to higher measurement rates since the frequency has to be set only once in the hardware There are several drawbacks of this measurement method One problem that might arise is that the attenuator is set for the set of frequencies which may lead to higher noise levels in the case of some strong channels and the others being relatively weak Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Bandwidth Bandwidth Bandwidth e Reech gt l p f Center Center Frequency Frequency Center Frequency 512 Spectrum Lines FFT created from one measurement several channels around one frequency Figure 13 3 Multi channel measurement Grouping Algorithm The grouping mechanism is a sophisticated algorithm to also assure that at least
66. be used to e test the R amp S TSM Instrument s PN scanner e understand the R amp S ViCom programming interface The sample application is supplied in both Release and Debug versions In this docu ment it is assumed that the Release version is being used The code for the sample application is found in the directory named SampleForViComXXX where XXX describes a particular R amp S ViCom Interface User Manual 1505 1329 42 26 60 Sample Application The application and its user interface is rather designed to test the R amp S ViCom inter face functions than to give an example for a measurement application Therefore it is possible to call the interface functions at any time from the GUI and it is possible to set values out of range to check the responses and the behaviour of the measurement in different situations The test applications for different RAN technologies are located in the C RuS ViCom_ lt version gt bin folder In the following figure selected is the SampleForViComWcdma exe file which opens the demo application for WCDMA e lets QUO FRANETA G MU720515 C OS RuS ViCom 1551 bin y 4 Search bin P Organize v Open Burn _ New folder Ze DN e Ji Rus 2 Name S Date modified Type Size ViCom_15 51 19 RUMIESICUNS UN 10 1 U1 4 10 22 AppliCduuri exteris bm 7 RSToolbox dll 08 01 2015 15 28 Application extens 9 Bi Logfiles SampleForViComCDMA
67. been sent In the figure shown above the first peak found also includes a minor reflection two steps after the peak occurred The calculated peak is therefore higher than the original one it is drawn as red circle like the two peaks found later As another part of the result for the code power measurements the RSCP and inband power values are measured for a detected F PICH From both values it is also possible to derive the Ec IO of the pilot You can do so by subtracting the RSCP from the inband power If no CIR measurement can be performed the R amp S TSM Instruments report the aver age inband power that has been measured on the channel It can be found in the psAverageInbandPowerInDBm100 parameter if that parameter is not set to NULL 8 1 1 4 F SYNC Demodulation Once the R amp S TSM Instruments have detected a pilot on the F PICH they try to syn chronize on the F SYNC and to demodulate the information on that channel If this is 8 1 1 5 Measuring of CDMA 2000 Signals performed successfully the result is returned in the SSyncChannelDemodulationResult structure The number of demodulation attempts can be controlled using the etSyncChannelDemodulationMode input parameter For this value three possible values can be set each specifying a different kind of demodulation strategy resulting in a different amount of result data e ONCE 1 For each channel frequency the F SYNC is only demodulated once The other PN offs
68. before the measurement is started For messages that don t need to be decoded all the time but only in special cases the Demodulate ON CMD setting should be chosen All those settings apply to all basestations found on one channel BTS specific decod ing is only possible during measurement see the following section assigned to the mode in the API Since they are part of an enumeration names similar to the appropriate meaning are also available so you normally want to deal with those identifiers o The numbers in braces after the demodulation type refer to the number that is Demodulation Modes during the Measurement In some cases it might be desired to save resources and decode messages only for special basestations or under certain circumstances As mentioned above for such messages the Decode on Command setting has to be specified before a measure ment is started At any point when a measurement is active it is then possible to issue one of the decoding commands below e Demodulate BTS 3 For a special basestation on one channel this command tries to decode a defined message To avoid too much resource allocation a time out can be specified when using this command If the specified time is consumed and no decoding could be done no result is returned and the resources are freed for other tasks The timeout can be 0 as well in which case the demodulation is performed until it succeeds e Demodulate BTS FORCE 4 5
69. can be mapped to the according value of the available physical units by changing the receiver index in Receiver Index and then pressing Set Receiver Index Receiver Index fo Set Receiver Index 11 3 1 2 Sample Application The combo box right to the Load RF Power Scanner button controls to which logical receiver all the changes made in the rest of the GUI apply to If you change the value in here the control values also update accordingly except for the settings in the right most column Step 2 Reading the Device Settings Before you change the general configuration of a logical receiver you should first retrieve the current settings from the R amp S ViCom interface This can be done by click ing the button Request RF Scanner Settings By the successful completion of the operation the controls in the right column of the dialog should reflect the values from the logical device Dam ss x Request RF Scanner Settings Cancel Min Freq Max Freq in MHz 80000000 teen 22000000 Set RF Sweep Range iei AS Set RF Sweep Rate RF Sweep Buffer in ms 50000 Figure 11 10 Sweep settings section In the sweep settings section the following settings can be changed e The sweep range i e the interval for which derived results can be requested That influences the measurement speed so this has to be set carefully when speed is a critical factor e The sweep rate which can be set to a slower value than the th
70. center 62 resource elements including co channel serving and non serving cells adjacent channel interference thermal noise etc pfSSyncRssilnDBm timestamp dwPcTimeS tampinMs pdwTimeFromStartOf BlockInNs ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SSignals SPower Value SSYNC signal quality Calculated as the ratio of SSYNC Power and SSYNC RSSI pfSSyncQualitylnDB timestamp dwPcTimeS tampinMs pdwTimeFromStartOf BlockInNs ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SSignals SPower Value Channel Impulse Response Channel impulse response calculated from the SSYNC signals This contains a list of all peaks including peak power peak delay peak Doppler and SSYNC total inband power SSYNC RSSI flnbandPowerlnDBm fPeakPowerlnDBm sDopplerlnHz fDelayInSec ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SSig nals SCir Speak R amp S ViCom R amp S ViCom LTE Technology Measurement Description ViCom Name Part of ViCom struc ture Delay Spread Maximum time differ ence between the first and the last peak of the channel impulse response MAX of fDelayInSec of the peak included in the CIR ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SSig nals SCir Speak Frame time of arrival offset to PPS Time difference between PPS and the start of a LTE frame received by the scanner pfFrameToaOffsetT oP psinSec ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult Ssignals Antenna Port detection Detected transmit ante
71. constant sampling rate power values from the F PICH and performs a peak analysis on the result Such a measurement result is depicted in the figure shown below For one channel and basestation the first thing to know is that the samples are all measured at con stant intervals This sampling rate is chosen to be very small about 0 152 ns Since the time plays an important role in a CDMA2000 network the exact arrival time of the first signal is also contained in the result The time is specified as offset to the R amp S TSM Instruments measurement result time in the number of samples For exam ple in the picture below the delay in number of CIR samples would be 2 since the second sample after the arrival time is the first valid one Measuring of CDMA 2000 Signals Peak Value CIR Code Power p t contributing short term reflection dwCirResolutionInFemtoSeconds pu64TsmxTimeln40ns dwTimeDelayInCirSamples dwCirSamplingRatelnHz pu64TsmxTimeln40ns Figure 8 2 CIR samples and peaks After that point in time the code power values are measured every dwCirResolutionInFemtoSeconds femto seconds The data recorded in that way can be used to search for peaks that signalize impulse data sent on the F PICH This raw data is drawn in light blue circles The R amp S TSM Instruments software also performs peak detection and automatically includes minor reflection peaks into one that is identified as real impulse that has
72. control for Rx amp Tx path R amp S TSME Connectivity Default IP address 192 168 0 2 Even if you change the R amp S TSME IP address the default address will still be active as a fallback option You can change the R amp S TSME IP address using the R amp S TSME Device Manager tool which is a part of the R amp S ViCom package To install the tool run the C RuS ViCom_ lt version gt tools TSME setup RS TsmeTools lt version gt exe file If the R amp S TSME does not answer to ICMP echo requests PING use the TsmeP ing tool contained in C RuS ViCom_ lt version gt tools TSME to check the connectivity R amp S TSME does not provide a web interface like the R amp S TSMW instead use the R amp S TSME Device Manager tool If you encounter problems while connecting to the device with the R amp S TSME Device Manager tool check the firewall settings refer to troubleshooting section Guide to Solving instrument Connection Problems of the R amp S TSME User Man ual You can find the manual in the R amp S ViCom package in C RuS ViCom_ lt version gt doc TSME User Manual pdf R amp S TSME Setup for MIMO Operation Mode For MIMO 2x2 operation two R amp S TSME units need to be connected to the host com puter The following constraints have to be met Every R amp S TSME is connected with its own network interface card to the host com puter Usage of a network switch is not yet supported 4 4 4 3 Getting Started with R amp S TS
73. de que tengan preguntas referentes a estas informaciones de seguridad Adem s queda en la responsabilidad del usuario utilizar el producto en la forma debida Este producto est destinado exclusivamente al uso en la industria y el laboratorio o si ha sido expresamente autorizado para aplicaciones de campo y de ninguna manera deber ser utilizado de modo que alguna persona cosa pueda sufrir da o El uso del producto fuera de sus fines definidos o sin tener en cuenta las instrucciones del fabricante queda en la responsabilidad del usuario El fabricante no se hace en ninguna forma responsable de consecuencias a causa del mal uso del producto 1171 0000 42 08 Page 7 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Se parte del uso correcto del producto para los fines definidos si el producto es utilizado conforme a las indicaciones de la correspondiente documentaci n del producto y dentro del margen de rendimiento definido ver hoja de datos documentaci n informaciones de seguridad que siguen El uso del producto hace necesarios conocimientos t cnicos y ciertos conocimientos del idioma ingl s Por eso se debe tener en cuenta que el producto solo pueda ser operado por personal especializado o personas instruidas en profundidad con las capacidades correspondientes Si fuera necesaria indumentaria de seguridad para el uso de productos de Rohde amp Schwarz encontrar a la informaci n debida en la documentaci n del producto en el cap tulo correspo
74. different scrambling code as well as with a different delay to the code broadcasts because the Node Bs are not synchronised A channel impulse response is a measurement of the effect on an impulse or sequence of impulses of transmitting it along a particular channel The R amp S TSM Instruments measure the effect on a sequence of impulses when a Node B transmits them along the CPICH transmitted by a NodeB at the requested frequency From each impulse the R amp S TSM Instruments measure a power delay profile by sam pling the power at regular time intervals along the pulse see the figure Peak level Discrimination interval Noise level Maximum delay Time The R amp S TSM Instruments estimate a lower level for the code power that is high enough above the noise floor to be sure that noise measurements are not included in the CIR measurement Then they get an array of code power measurements sampled from the signal over the discrimination interval see below The maximum delay is the interval between the first code measurement of the CIR and the last one The signal is likely to have reached the receiver via several different reflected paths multipath The resulting peaks may overlap leading to a broader peak possibly with several sub peaks Alternatively there may be adjacent peaks close together from the same NodeB CPICH transmission The signal quality can be estimated by measuring the width of the peak maxim
75. dwAvailableFrontends I pReceiverTable gt Receivers i dwAvailableFrontEndMask Device Details 9 Programming with the R amp S ViCom Interface 5 1 This chapter introduces to the R amp S ViCom application programming interface In the later part of this chapter the basic structure that is common to all different technologies is explained Beforehand the basic principle of how measurement tasks are handled on the R amp S TSM Instruments is described to create a basic understanding for some technically enforced decisions ve Deco Delalle onte re erronee dea 38 e Start ee TE Lu EE 40 e Differences between the R amp S TSMx Family and R amp S TSMW TSME 46 e Using the Demodulators rrt rettet teet t cet etta 47 e Setting up a Custom Project vincia ta 50 e Debugging and Error Handling incidido aio 55 Device Details Measurement scheduling on the R amp S TSM Instruments The R amp S TSM Instruments have one or two built in receivers that can be used to per form different measurement tasks The measurement tasks cover a variety of technolo gies and have different requirements on what shall be measured so the access on the receiver unit has to be managed properly to use it efficiently In principle there are three different groups of tasks the R amp S TSM Instruments have to coordinate e Periodic measurements for the technology specific scanning e g GSM or WCDMA technology scanning e De
76. en tenait aee nain s ANANS E Irun RR iins 40 UNE 41 BEE AAA e O 42 Connecting to the R amp S TSMx Family 42 Connecting to the R amp S TSMW R amp S TGME cn nnnnnnnannnnnin 43 Accessing the R amp S ViCom Interface 43 R amp S TSM Instruments Management Funchons conan ees 44 Reading and Changing Settings sss enne 44 Getting Measuremenmts mener enne nre nennen nnne nnns 44 Connect Disconnect Scanner 46 Differences between the R amp S TSMx Family and R amp S TSMW TSME 46 ee ale RRE e 46 Frontend AllOCAtION Rm 46 Using the Demodulators eene nenne rre eir nerui nnne 47 General Concept 47 Demodulation Modes nn nono n eene rn nana nn 48 Setting Up a Custom PrOjeCt siciiccscccccceccccessscececevestecccesvcceececeasetencceseattececceseneeseceasteeerss 50 ege ee EE 51 Create the Project Environment 51 5 5 3 5 5 4 5 5 5 5 5 6 5 6 5 6 1 5 6 2 5 6 2 1 5 6 2 2 6 1 6 1 1 6 1 2 6 2 6 2 1 6 2 2 6 2 3 6 2 4 6 2 5 6 3 6 3 1 6 3 1 1 6 3 1 2 6 3 2 6 3 2 1 6 3 3 7 1 7 1 1 7 1 1 1 7 1 1 2 7 1 1 3 7 1 2 Il reel e EE EN Working with the Code ridere EA 53 Installation ISSUES ii 54 Updating the Projects dae e co 54 Debugging and Error Handling eene nnne 55 Debugging TECHNIQUES coi a E a ST ANEAN Oe AE 55 Message Hand EE 55 Error Handling Mechanism cinia teet ea nte cera tee sida td cea E rea ve da 56
77. exe 08 06 2015 14 31 Application PhylisKernelRouting ll SampleForViComCW exe 08 06 2015 14 31 Application M FPR SampleForViComGPS exe 08 06 2015 14 31 Application lli inc an SampleForViComGSM exe 08 06 2015 14 31 Application c tte SampleForViComLTE exe 08 06 2015 14 31 Application 1 BB SompleApplications WU SampleForViComRFPowerScan exe 08 06 2015 14 31 Application 1 A com rohdeschwarz android sample lla SampleForViComRFScan exe 08 06 2015 14 31 Application Project 9 SampleForViComRS232 exe 08 06 2015 14 31 Application 3 SampleForErrorHandler 45 SampleForViComWCDMA exe 08 06 2015 14 31 Application SampleForViComACD_cmd L4 SampleForViComWIMAX exe 08 06 2015 14 31 Application SampleForViComCDMA ScannerTools dll 18 12 2014 18 53 Application extens 6 B SampleForViComCDMA_cmd 2 ServiceExtension TSME dll 25 02 2015 17 03 Application extens 1 Jl SampleForvicomcw 2 SpectrumWorker dll 08 05 2015 13 09 Application extens 2 J SampleForViComGPS 3 TDSCdmaDemodulator dll 26 05 2015 10 10 Application extens 3 A SampleForViComGSM a TDSCdmaScanner dil 26 05 2015 10 10 Application extens 2 M SampleForViComLTE IS tsme_02020108 bin 02 06 2015 10 27 PowerArchiver IS 3 2 n SampleForViComLTE cmd IS tsme_02020308 bin 02 06 2015 10 27 PowerArchiver IS 3 2 SampleForViComRFPOWERSCAN IS tsme_02020508 bin 02 06 2015 10 27 PowerArchiver IS 32 SampleForViComRFSCAN a tsme_02020608 bin 02 06 2015 10 27 PowerArchiver IS 3
78. from the raw data does not fit to the number of results required there are two possible approaches Either there are less measure ments then results in which case the data has to be interpolated Or the reduction in the previous modules on the data set was not restrictive enough so the data has to be compressed once more In the API the number of result samples is called dwCountOfDisplayLines and is set in the SSpecificParameter structure Data Interpolation If more display lines are requested than available the data has to be interpolated To calculate power values for frequencies that don t directly match the native resolution the power value is the result of a linear interpolation If the nearest lower frequency is fmin and the nearest higher frequency is fmax the power for the requested frequency f is calculated like PUD PL QU Pe Architecture and Functionality of the RF Scan Technology The power values are converted to Watt internally before the interpolation can be per formed since the input values must be linearized This might result in small numerical errors when transforming the power values from one representation into another and back p f Figure 11 4 Linear Interpolation Data Compression This is used to reduce the amount of data from the previous units Most of time this will be necessary The input data set is divided in the number of classes configured with the dwCountOfDisplayLines mem
79. gt Caution when handling heavy equipment Ch Standby indication Danger of electric shock Direct current DC gt 1171 0000 42 08 Page 1 Basic Safety Instructions To identify any terminal which is intended for connection to an external conductor for protection against electric shock in case of a fault or the terminal of a protective earth Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning d Caution Hot surface Paw Alternating current AC Protective conductor terminal Direct alternating current DC AC Earth Ground Class Il Equipment to identify equipment meeting the safety requirements specified for Class Il equipment device protected by double or reinforced insulation Frame or chassis Ground terminal EU labeling for batteries and accumulators For additional information see section Waste disposal Environmental protection item 1 Be careful when handling electrostatic sensitive devices EU labeling for separate collection of electrical and electronic devices For additional information see section Waste disposal Environmental protection item 2 Warning Laser radiation For additional information see section Operation item 7 Signal words and their meaning The following signal words are used in the product documentation in order to warn the reader about risks and dangers serious injury serious injury moderate injury Indi
80. in the following chapter about power value aggregation In multi channel mode the raw measurement chunks are processed by a FFT and the spectrum lines belonging to one channel of the channel group are used to calculate the single power values mum measurement time is used in this case to record the raw measurement data and o Different measurement times in a frequency cannot be used in this mode The maxi for all channels the data of all resulting FFTs is used Measurement Time MeasTime Measurement Time Measurement Time Channel 1 Channel 2 enannel 3 Channel 4 crara e h3 D Single Channel Mode Multi Channel Mode Figure 13 4 Free run mode 13 1 2 2 Time and Distance Triggering To reduce the amount of data used to calculate channel power results external trigger devices can be connected to the R amp S TSM Instrument Each time a trigger is fired the event is logged with its timestamp As soon as a raw measurement chunk is available the R amp S TSM Instruments software checks if the chunk belongs to a certain trigger User Manual 1505 1329 42 26 210 R amp S ViCom R amp S ViCom CW Technology EH and if so the chunk and possible the following ones as well will be used to calculate the channel power When triggering is active the trigger signal from the external device can be filtered to generate internal triggers that result in the creation of a measurement result F
81. is controlled by an individual window The user should select between the R amp S TSMW and R amp S TSME and has to define the IP address for the R amp S TSMW in the IP Address box For the R amp S TSME the IP address is taken from the list of available IP addresses based on the instrument s index m SampleForViComRFPowerScan rsmw y IP Address Quit 192 168 0 4 The control window provides access to all interface functions settings and results RF Power Scan instance 0 Settings Frequency Settings Spectrum Settings Freq Detector Settings p Time Detector Settings Frontend Fe 1 si Start frequency MHZ Max meas rate Hz 5 000 Y Auto bandwidth Bandwidth Hz 20000000 Countoflines 1024 Detector type Start meas ok M Max reporting rate Hz 5 000 V Auto attenuation Attenuation dB 0 Type Peak es zi Set settings ok Nese tme Irak Too Interval type Een Stop frequency MHz ns 1 Level threshold Threshold dBm 130 0 Special Settings fmen El 360 000000 Meas detector type RMS v V Preamplifier Window Fattop Res buf depth 1024 FFT size 1024 Request raw data Parameter ms 200 Interface Control Result display Channel Filter Sequence Load interface Setup Enable sequence Set sweep settings 4 90 Marker settings Get sweep settings Use marker Retu
82. is not connected via FireWire but uses a Gigabit LAN connection to the host PC The R amp S TSMW is loaded using its unique IP address unique at least in the local net work Therefore there is no receiver index in that case but a single IP address that the device has see Chapter 18 2 R amp S TSMW Configuration on page 250 This IP address must be specified when creating the CViComLoader ViComInterfaceName CViComLoader TSMW instance used to create the actual technology specific R amp S ViCom Interface The R amp S TSME is identified similar to the R amp S TSMx Family i e by using the receiver index to get an IP address from the list of available IP addresses 5 3 2 Frontend Allocation The R amp S TSMW enhances some of the interface functions to be able to select the frontend used for the configured measurement since the device itself has two fron tends built into it This mechanism is also reflected in the different sample applications that come with the R amp S ViCom interfaces Each sample application that can load the R amp S TSM Instru ment offers a receiver selection as shown in the following figure When selecting the R amp S TSMW the IP address has to be entered in the Address field and the measure ment and demodulator frontend usage can be set This field is not active when select User Manual 1505 1329 42 26 46 Using the Demodulators ing the R amp S TSME receiver because the receiver index is u
83. list box contains demod ulation settings for one channel PDU pair The numbers in the columns have the meanings defined below The first number is the channel number that can be seen in the frequency list box It is used a short cut to avoid handling with frequencies all the time which is much more error prone The second number is the internal PDU name Refer to the viCom WCDMA Pdu enumeration in the reference to find the mapping from SIB to PDU The third number is the demodulation mode A description of the different modes can be found in Chapter 6 3 1 1 Demodulation Modes on page 68 The fourth and the final column contains a timeout if the demodulation mode is set to 2 which means repetition mode The value here is entered in 100 milli seconds For example a value of 10 defines 10 100 ms 1 second as time out To decode all SIB 3 for all four channels enter the values shown in the screenshot below Note that the SIB 1 of the third channel channel index 2 PDU 15 will not WCDMA BCH Demodulation be decoded from the start but only after a request see description in Chap ter 6 3 2 1 Issuing a Request during Measurement on page 74 All channels have configured SIB 3 decoding at least one time This is necessary to get any result Start Measurement Channel PDU Mode t 100ms new line Ctrl Enter Figure 6 5 Channel PDU demodulation settings e Start the measurement with the equal
84. lithium cells can cause explosions Replace cells or batteries only with the matching Rohde amp Schwarz type see parts list in order to ensure the safety of the product Cells and batteries must be recycled and kept separate from residual waste Rechargeable batteries and normal batteries that contain lead mercury or cadmium are hazardous waste Observe the national regulations regarding waste disposal and recycling Transport 1 The product may be very heavy Therefore the product must be handled with care In some cases the user may require a suitable means of lifting or moving the product e g with a lift truck to avoid back or other physical injuries Handles on the products are designed exclusively to enable personnel to transport the product It is therefore not permissible to use handles to fasten the product to or on transport equipment such as cranes fork lifts wagons etc The user is responsible for securely fastening the products to or on the means of transport or lifting Observe the safety regulations of the manufacturer of the means of transport or lifting Noncompliance can result in personal injury or material damage If you use the product in a vehicle it is the sole responsibility of the driver to drive the vehicle safely and properly The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for accidents or collisions Never use the product in a moving vehicle if doing so could distract the driver of the vehicle Adequately se
85. of the R amp S ViCom library The applica tion shows one big dialog that contains three columns of functionality The left column holds the buttons that correspond to the functions the interface provides The struc tures given to these functions are filled with the content of the controls shown in the central column and partially with some of the right one Sample Application 1 Freq MHz BW Hz MinAtt Meastime us Enter new line Ctrl Enter i E CNN Request Power Receiver Settings Set Frequencies Attenuation Switch Mode fo Set Attenuation Switch Mode Set Receiver Index mmpaerg Set Detector TSMx Time Base fo Set TSMx Time Base Result Buffer Depth 150 Trigger Factor 1 Set Result Buffer Set Trigger Start Measurement Store Mode C Throw Results Away Get Result Counters Result Count To Read 100 Get Results Result Viewer Stop Measurement write exe Figure 13 9 R amp S ViCom CW technology sample application In this demo application the usage is straightforward The most important settings are made in the central column that is the measured channels configuration Important settings are also made in the right column in the text boxes Measurement Type and Detector In this central column the list of frequencies that shall be measured can be specified Each line in the edit field must contain one channel specification consisting of the
86. or test it is necessary to make sure that a connection can be established 17 3 1 1 17 3 1 2 17 3 2 17 3 2 1 17 3 2 2 Example of R amp S Remote ViCom Application with R amp S TSMA Requirement for Bluetooth Connection In order to use a Bluetooth connection turn on the Bluetooth adapter and establish the connection with the device the server is running on Requirement for WLAN Connection In order to use a WLAN connection establish the connection to the WLAN network with the device the server is running on Connection Establishment Connection Type Selection In order to connect to R amp S TSMA it is either possible to use a WLAN connection or a Bluetooth connection The selection of the connection type depends on the measurement task The WLAN connection allows a throughput which is about 10 times higher compared to Bluetooth On the other hand the Bluetooth connection is less influenced by interfer ence e For normal LTE UMTS or GSM measurements the connection via Bluetooth is sufficient e Incase of higher data traffic due to more detailed measurements a connection via WLAN is recommended 8 TEE Q ROHDESSCHWARZ Choose connectiontype O O O_ Sepis WLAN Wireless LAN connection to rViCom server Bluetooth Bluetooth connection to rViCom server Figure 17 2 Connection Type Selection Server Discovery In order to connect with an existing server the following steps must be performed 1 Choos
87. some sort of best effort estima tion see below for a description Measuring of CDMA 2000 Signals In the result a basestation is identified by the channel index i e the frequency mea sured and a so called indicator The indicator is simply a counter that is incremented when a possibly new basestation is found on a channel If this indicator in combination with the channel index is equal between two measure ments the same BTS has been detected with a high certainty Under rare circumstan ces it might be the case that two different basestations are assigned the same indica tor If the channel is the same but the indicator is different it could be the same sta tion but it can also be another one The PN Offset returned besides the channel index and the indicator must not necessa rily be the same for two results that belong to the same BTS It might be the case that in a first step a wrong PN offset was derived from the time estimation and the correct PN offset has been demodulated later The table below summarizes the description above using some example values There are two columns one for a possible first and one for the second result The third col umn contains the conclusion what can be said about the two results First Result Second Result Result Channel Indicator PNOffset Channel Indicator PNOffset 0 0 65535 0 0 64 For the first result no PN Offset esti mation or demodulation has been available so
88. time estimation is used to correct the time base that is used in a CDMA 2000 system and is specified by single value that defines the currently measured difference between signal and pulse The time estimation is based on two different sources One is the pulse signal from an attached GPS device the other the demodulation results Depending what kind of Source is currently used to derive the delay value on of the following three states is active No source available The transmission time is estimated by setting the received pilots into relation and trying to find a best match The delay value cannot be speci fied 8 1 2 8 1 2 1 8 1 2 2 8 1 2 3 Measuring of CDMA 2000 Signals e Only Demodulation In this case the delay is estimated by the received pilots where the transmission time is still estimated from the different offsets measured The delay is calculated e Demodulation and PPS Both offsets and transmission time can now be deter mined so both values are correct Configuration Before measurements can be done concerning the CDMA 2000 technology the instru ment has to be configured in order to prepare the measurement process for the desired task Most of the configuration issues discussed below take influence on all measurement modes until otherwise noted Channels and PN Offsets Before any other type of measurement can be started it must be defined what channel and what PN Offsets in that channel shall be
89. to recall instrument data to verify the installed options and to install new options if required When you are satisfied that the IEEE1394 connection is working disconnect the OptionKeyInstaller from the R amp S TSMx Family model and close the utility POE UI 243 o EE erer A vr tu ee 244 e Display Contents of the R amp S TSMx Family Info Tab 244 e Display Contents of the R amp S TSMx Family Options Tab 245 e Installing the R amp S TSMx Family Windows Driver Manually 246 e R amp S TSMx Family Firmware Upgrade geg td AE 248 Prerequisites e PC and an R amp S TSMx Family instrument connected via IEEE 1394 e PC and an R amp S TSMx Family instrument connected via a serial null modem cable e R amp S proprietary IEEE1394 driver installed on the PC e Terminal program started e No other instrument interfacing the R amp S TSMx Family instrument R amp S TSMx Family Option Handling 18 1 2 Program Start To use this program reset the R amp S TSMx Family instrument and wait for the terminal output Waiting for elf file from IEEE1394 Start the TsmxOptionKeyInstaller utility by executing the TsmxOptionKeyInstaller exe in the program s directory C RuS ViCom_ lt ver sion gt tools TSMx OptionKeylnstaller After establishing the connection a dialog similar to the one shown in the following figure comes up Select TSMx bag 100167 y TSMx Options TSMx Info Install Option Files Get Device ID
90. use of the power the device offers to you This chapter explains that functionality In order to make you familiar with the different measurement modes the network scanner provides the basic principles of how the network scanner actually finds the data are explained in the first section The next sec tion explains the usage of the sample application provided with the API A step by step example helps you to do the first measurements Ee eege TEE 77 e GSM Measurements Demo Applcatton cnn ncnnnno 91 e GSMBGH Demodlilditoli ecco A ree Re xke a RA 96 7 1 Measuring of GSM Signals The API of the R amp S ViCom GSM technology called GSM measurements in the rest of the chapter provides a very flexible way to specify what kind of measurements shall be done and in what way To use this flexibility efficiently and to understand what the different tasks are really doing this section gives some detailed insights into the algo rithms of the network scanner It is important to know that the API of the R amp S ViCom for GSM technology is capable D of modifying the measurement tasks while the measurement is active This allows to adapt the measurement specification to new environmental settings etc For most of the other R amp S ViCom APIs this is not the case The single exception for this capability is that the list of channels that shall be scanned must be known upfront and cannot be changed during the measurement 7 1 4 Measurement Specials
91. v Share with v gt Jy ROMES EI Name Date modified gt p RS int 3 p Jee Le PhylisKernelRouting 11 02 2014 10 07 2 de m 23 k1394api dll 16 05 2013 11 30 Do Dee 8 log4cxedll 16 05 2013 11 30 gt D B log cocproperties 05 12 2013 10 43 gt D T Se 23 MFCTL dll 16 05 2013 11 30 Se ModulePool dll 16 05 2013 11 30 gt q e 8 msvep7Ldll 16 05 2013 11 30 4 D Zeie 23 msvcr 1 dll 16 05 2013 11 30 TSME 3 i TSMW E PhylisEnvironmentInfoProvider dll 16 05 2013 11 31 Select a file gt H D lt amp j PhylisKernel dll 16 05 2013 11 30 to preview 4 TSMx v c 3 PhylisTimer dll 16 05 2013 11 31 gt D id TSMUFrames pec 16 05 2013 11 30 Firrnuvarelnstaller r s TsmuOptionInstaller ico 16 05 2013 11 29 leee1394Driver z ON T TsmuWorker dll 16 05 2013 11 30 z e es mg Geng 7 TSMx Application elf 16 05 2013 11 30 im dietum ge C TSMx Bootware elf 16 05 2013 11 30 b tl ai s KE TsmxOptionKeyInstaller exe 16 05 2013 11 30 y ogs Y d TsmxOptionKeyInstaller ini 16 05 2013 11 30 bd temp tmp D Instructions for using TsmxOptionKeyInstaller are given in R amp S TSMx Family Option Handling If the log messages of the OptionKeylInstaller show that a connected R amp S TSMx Family instrument has been found this means that the IEEE1394 connection is working and that the test application can be run The OptionKeylnstaller utility can also be used to recall instrument data to verify the installe
92. written to the file ViComMeasurements in the sub directory Application LogFiles The following figure shows the two central text boxes in the GUI The frequency or fre quencies which the PN scanner should search together with a number that is the local channel frequency identifier for the measurements can be entered in the left column Note that although a default value appears in the GUI this is not entered in the scan ner until the Set Frequencies button has been checked redit greed Bars eemper Dn E Mode t 100ms ure POU Mode t 100ms ur diese rel Goes 2112 800000 0 In the right column of the GUI you can enter the PDU values corresponding to the SIBs that the R amp S TSM Instruments should demodulate if this option is present Each PDU value must have a corresponding channel identifier which must refer to one of the fre quencies entered in the left column For UMTS SIBs and the corresponding PDU val ues refer to UMTS SIB numbers and corresponding PDUs Also refer to Chapter 6 3 WCDMA BCH Demodulation on page 66 6 2 3 Save and Load Stored results can be browsed and viewed using the dialogue in the Result Viewer box 1 Type the name of your preferred text editor for example notepad exe in the text field The Browse button can be used to find the program if needed 2 Click the View button The sample application will open the result file using the preferred text editor Sample Application
93. you want to measure signals from different networks Sample Application for CDMA 2000 EVDO To perform the calibration it is important to know the PN offset and the distance to a specific basestation Such a basestation signal is measured with the R amp S TSM Instru ments and based on the timing found during that initial measurement the PPS delay can be calculated From the distance dpy m and the PN offset offsetpy the expected time delay Texp can be calculated as follows Texp Offsetpy 64 1228800 sec dpy 300 m sec This expected time offset can then be compared with the measured time offset T meas The difference of both values it the time delay that must be subtracted from measure ments and the GPS pulse signal To let the R amp S TSM automatically adjust the GPS pulse you have to set the time delay in the ibelayOfPPSFallingEdgeInSec con figuration setting 8 2 Sample Application for CDMA 2000 EVDO As in the previous chapters the CDMA 2000 functionality and handling of the R amp S ViCom Interface can be tested in the distributed sample application The goal of the user interface design of the sample application is not to have maximum comfort or to make it available to end users but to provide all possible configurations and operations to a developer who wants to find out how the API is used A configuration dialog shown in the following figure is displayed when double clik the C RuS ViCom_ lt version gt bi
94. 0 dBm and 105 dBm The maximum power integer was set to 4 So all values greater than 100 dBm will be put into the row containing the maximum power integer For frequency 935 8 MHz the histogram shows that there was a power value less than 115 dBm measured three times 11 2 2 5 Marker Tool The marker tool helps when it comes to select the frequency that provided the maxi mum power value in a set of frequencies With this it is an easy task to report the stron gest power value and frequency If the marker tool is enabled it reports the result of the marker evaluation as part of result The measurement values are also changed so that they can t be interpreted as men tioned above After the marker has been applied they reflect the values of the marker frequency in each different raw sweep after the frequency detector or the channel filter processing has been done For example if there were three sweeps made by the R amp S TSM Instrument the input data might look similar to 1 Sweep 61 9 77 1 65 4 71 4 64 2 62 2 2 Sweep 62 3 79 1 69 3 71 3 61 9 62 1 3 Sweep 63 8 78 8 69 2 71 9 62 4 61 5 RMS 62 6 78 3 67 9 71 5 62 8 61 9 The maximum is calculated based on the result of the previous processing steps In this case we assume that the Time Detector is configured to calculate the root mean square of all input samples The highest frequency would result in the maximum power here
95. 0256 39 380513 50 41 346872 39 687131 79 374263 75 62 176950 59 684006 119 368013 100 83 007028 79 680881 159 361763 The actual bandwidth obtained by a UE will be limited based on the UE category Comparison with R amp S ROMES4 Legacy Throughput Estimation Algorithm The R amp S ROMES legacy throughput estimation algorithm uses a SINR to bit rate lookup table of seven values representing a subset of the total number of modulation scheme and code rate combinations The lookup table of the algorithm has the following number of modulation scheme and code rate combinations e Three QPSK bit rates e Two 16QAM bit rates e Two 64QAM bit rates The throughput value is doubled for MIMO throughput estimates The new throughput estimation algorithm added to R amp S ViCom attempts to use an algorithm similar to that a UE might use to determine an appropriate modulation and coding scheme It works in a similar manner as the legacy algorithm to determine the modulation and coding scheme in the SISO case but with a table of 15 lookup values instead of 7 This algorithm uses a capacity equation which allows for a continuous throughput value from 0 bps to the theoretical maximum for the channel configuration rather than seven discrete results for the same channel configuration using the legacy algorithm The amount of unavailable resource elements is also estimated and removed from the estimated bit rate assuming the minimum PDCCH siz
96. 1 6 4 11 6 4 1 11 6 4 2 11 6 4 3 11 7 12 12 1 12 1 1 12 1 2 12 2 12 3 13 13 1 13 1 1 13 1 1 1 13 1 1 2 13 1 2 13 1 2 1 Step 3 Set parameters imita dai qa a Ba 188 Step 4 Start Meaeurement cece eee arinean eanais aa 188 Step 5 Define Specific Values nro nn nnnnnnnnn 188 Step 6 Fetch and View Measurement Results 189 Step 7 Stop Measurement cee ee ee eee cece anniina inani iniaa aE EE 191 Step 8 Unload Receivers iia a ee 191 RF Power Scan Technology ooiioicmicanic cra 191 Measurement and Post Processing Concept 191 Interface ele E 192 Sample Application tr te aro i n ved Y rate aere Lin reden 193 RF Power Scan Technology Specific Trouble Shooting 195 Using R amp S TSMW RF Power Scan in a Typical Drive Test Use Case 196 Frequency Resol tlOn oiii a oera E en ard e sa oa 196 Measurement Settings iret deti d dba 196 Measurement Ratio E 197 Data ele Te ation E HQ 199 Aggregation Mm Un EL 199 Aggregation in Frequengcy isse ete c d 199 Other Settings iii deci te ei edd iE HE dd edv eed ed 200 Spectrum Clearance Use Case with RF Power Scan sceeeseeeee 200 R amp S ViCom TD SCDMA Technology eese 201 General M 201 FANNIE SITUCIUNS E 201 IOUS e E 202 Measurement Configuration eeeee
97. 1 R amp S ViCom RF Scan and RF Power Scan Technology This chapter describes how the RF Scan technology scan API is used to control one or more R amp S TSMx Family instrument to measure the spectrum of multiple frequency ranges in a high speed fashion The first section gives insight into how the RF Scan Technology library and its firmware perform measurements with an R amp S TSM Instrument It is crucial for understanding the remaining sections to know how the results are created from the raw measurement data that the R amp S TSMx Family instrument provides In the second section a rough overview of how the power frequency measurement API is designed and how the scan values are calculated is given This explains the configu ration details and the logic behind the post processing units used to prepare a fre quency spectrum Section Sample Application demonstrates the usage of the packaged sample applica tion The design of the demo application is tightly coupled to the API so once one can use this demo application programming the API becomes easy The chapter concludes with a small FAQ section in that some common pitfalls are dis cussed The R amp S ViCom RF Scan technology only supports the R amp S TSMx Family instru ments It is not avaliable for R amp S TSMW and R amp S TSME The R amp S ViCom RF Power Scan technology only supports R amp S TSMW and R amp S TSME It is not avaliable for R amp S TSMx Family instruments Measurin
98. 10 between SIB decoding and not decoding Is there a way to adjust R amp S TSM Instruments Sync Rate in ViCom as it is possible in R amp S ROMES If yes how does this affect scheduling If the R amp S TSM Instruments are used with the R amp S ViCom new Node Bs are searched on each mea surement As this procedure WCDMA synchronisation is done with the same RF signal section as all the other measurements RSCP CIR etc the synchronisation does not affect the load of the R amp S TSM Instruments or causes additional receiver usage It affects only the processor load at the connec ted PC The difference in processing one RF section with and without synchronisation was up to 30 in the phase At present with more CPU cache this difference is less than 10 So we decided to syn chronise on each RF sample with R amp S ViCom and simplify R amp S ViCom usage by elimination of another parameter By the way we are able to synchronise to a Node B in the high speed mode when it is visible for at least 1 ms Measuring of GSM Signals 7 R amp S ViCom GSM Technology The R amp S ViCom GSM technology measurements offer a whole bunch of measurement methods to monitor and analyze GSM networks Therefore high sophisticated algo rithms have been integrated in the R amp S TSM Instruments software Nevertheless the API was designed to be as simple as possible A basic understanding of the things happening behind the scene is still necessary to make full
99. 10 MHz In such cases a divider is necessary to be connected between the reference output of the signal generator and the PULSE IN input connector of the R amp S TSM Instrument A divider is available from Rohde amp Schwarz TS PNSYNC Synchronization Unit for PN Scanner part number 1114 4817 02 Software Requirements The complete R amp S ViCom interface dataset can be download from the Rohde amp Schwarz homepage Store the R amp S ViCom interface package in a local directory ViCom The R amp S ViCom folder contains a setup executable setup RS ViCom lt version gt exe for the current version it is setup RS ViCom 15 51 0 0 exe which installs the R amp S ViCom interface devel opment kit on a PC After running the setup RS ViCom lt version gt exe the following components have been installed on the PC in the default directory C RuS ViCom_ lt version gt e R amp S ViCom interface header files inc folder e R amp S ViCom interface binary files bin folder e R amp S ViCom Sample Applications src folder e R amp S ViCom Manual and another referencing manual and HTLM API Reference doc folder e R amp S ViCom Tools tools folder The tools folder contains the following subfolders e TSME including ping setup RS TsmeTools 1 3 3 6 exe file e TSMW Firmware utility e TSMx R amp S TSMx Firmwareinstaller utility TSMx Driverlnstall What you need R amp S TSMx IEEE1394 FireWire device driver i
100. 2 Jl SampleForViComRS232 TSME_1514652001 definition nux 13 05 2015 09 30 NUX File 1 SampleForViComTDSCDMA_cmd Bl TsmeAdmin dll 02 06 2015 14 26 Application extens 6 H A SampleForViComWCDMA IT i Tee HD Ee ht AINE ME 10 96 Tes Neves oe ness D e BE SampleForviComWCDMA exe Date modified 08 06 2015 14 31 Date created 08 06 2015 14 31 va Application Size 60 5 KB Double click the executable file SampleForViComWcdma exe to get the WCDMA demo application page There is only one screen in the test application as shown here 6 2 1 6 2 2 Sample Application Frequencies MHz Start Measurement During Measurement Load PN Scanner newline Ctrl Enter Channel PDU Mode t 100ms Channel SC SCID new line Ctrl Enter new line Ctrl Enter Twe tmx 2112800000 0 0 17 0 0 Address 192 168 0 4 Receiver Index r Scanner Settings Scanner Frontend FE 1 TSMx Time Base Demodulator Settings Demod Frontend FE 1 v Result Buffer Depth SE m Measurement Mode E an O Store Mode SetReceiver Index C Throw Results Away Set TSMx Time Base C Store Results Store Results without P Sync CIR Set Result Buffer IV Add SIB Text Set Frequencies Set Mode and Rate Layer 3 Decoder Set BCH Demodulator Decode last PDU Start Measurement Get Result Counters DS mee Get 100 Results Stop Measurement mer Em View Terminate PN Scanner
101. 20 in the fields men tioned above Again press the Request Specific Derived Result button 11 3 1 6 Step 6 Fetch and View Measurement Results Once you send a request to the R amp S TSM Instrument using the Request Specific Derived Result button an internal timer is configured to issue the number of requests in the specified time interval This is done until the number of results has been pro cessed or the measurement is stopped you start at one time To check how much space is already occupied use the Get Result Counter button The upcoming message box shows you how many results have been stored and how many have been thrown away already if any E You have enough space left in the result buffer to store all results from the requests You can change the size of the result buffer only if the logical device is in idle state i e has not been started yet or stooped again As described in the architecture section before the results from the post processes are stored in a result buffer inside the memory The sample application provides a way to retrieve values from that buffer in FIFO order and store them in a file The output file ViComMeasurements txt is stored in the C RuS ViCom_ lt version gt bin LogFiles directory Make sure to mark the radio button Store Results Then put 10 in the text field next to Result Count To Read and press Get Results The system then fetches ten results from the result buffer and writ
102. 3 3 SYNC Signal Power amp CINR Values Another result lists the power measured for the S Sync channels in the 100ms signal in ViCom LTE SMeasResult SSignals SPowerValue The SYNC signal can be measured in two ways Servercase If the cell is strong it will measure every instance of the SYNC signal which is repea ted every 5 ms So it delivers up to 20 SYNC signal measurements per 100ms signal block or up to 200 values per second 200 Hz The time delay between the start of the block and the symbol that has been used to derive the measurement value is listed in the result as pdwTimeFromStartOfBlockInNs Teestame ofthe startet me block cimas PC local tme when the signal was measured oF was started 1o beng measured co the device T The tme when the signal was startedto T measured on he device win a higher resolution than Pe teng defaut PC cock Sms 5ms 5ms One block length 100 ms One Sync signal result per 5ms For each Sync Signal Measurement timestamp n ns from startof Figure 9 5 Power Mmeasurement for S Sync Channel Interferercase In this case the observed signal is weak and in order to increase the dynamic range the scanner is now using the full 100 ms of the signal to calculate one SYNC signal measurement value This operating mode of the scanner can be seen from the results as the pdwTimeFromStartOfBlockInNs is not set Nullpointer The following results are provided e fPowerlnD
103. 30 9 1 6 1 CQI Measurement Results 130 9 1 6 2 Throughput Measurement Results n 130 9 1 Eror Handing DE 132 9 2 LTE BCH Demodulatioiicisc cccccccscccsteccccsecsstecnsscssteecasecnceececsensctececeascteccassssieecesessectess 132 9 3 GUI Sample Applicat Mm css siccccisccccccccscsctacecsssenansedeeeetsccedsstanssotueseneceeceevesancesauetersnccs 132 9 3 1 Using the Sample Appltcaton ono nnnnnnnnnnnannnannnnnns 132 9 3 1 1 Connecting to R amp S TSMW R amp S TOME eene 133 9 3 1 2 Configure the R amp S ViCom Interface 134 9 3 1 3 Start Measures 139 9 3 1 4 Stop Measurement oocooccccnnnooccccccnnonccncconnnnnncnnnnnn nn rcnn nan n rr rr naar rn cnn ran nn rr cnn nennen eren nennen 140 9 4 Building a LTE TopN View s2cccccccccccteccccccssstecescccsisccesccaceecessescctecaseasceeccasascteeeesesseeeess 140 10 R amp S ViCom WiMAX Technology eene 159 10 1 Measuring of WIMAX Signals eese nnne nnne nnn nnns 159 10 1 1 COMMUTATION EE 160 10 1 14 Result Buffer Depth cocti eet erae cer tin id btt 160 du fa De E EE EE 160 10 1 1 3 Demodulation Settings E 160 10 1 2 Measurement Result endete tra enr eere rende dada cada 161 10 1 2 1 WIMAX Scan Ress oreet edet coa iaa 161 10 1 2 2 WiMAX Demodulation Results 164 10 1 3 Error Andi tt Gist tees iioc tt ever ee 164 10 2 GUI Sample Application oooommionnonnonnccccnnccnncnanacanocnnonnnnc cnn cana non accn cnn rre nenas 164 10 2 1
104. 4MimoInDB100 The complex coefficients of the channel matrix are available in pComplexCoefficient R amp S ViCom R amp S ViCom LTE Technology 9 1 6 Throughput Estimation Results 9 1 6 1 CQI Measurement Results The Channel Quality Indicator CQI references a table of 16 0 15 Modulation and Coding Schemes MCS that the UE can suggest the eNodeB to use based on the measured channel conditions The CQI index increases as the channel conditions improve where a CQI of 1 represents poor channel conditions and a CQI of 15 repre sents excellent channel conditions A CQI of zero is out of range and as a result has no associated MCS In SISO transmission mode the CQI can be determined by a mapping of SINR to CQI Multiple antenna transmission schemes SFBC MIMO need to take into account the dependency between the transmission paths when computing the CQI SISO SIMO and SFBC transmission schemes provide a single CQI result for the channel MIMO transmission schemes provide a number of CQI results equal to the number of spatial layers A CQI of 0 reported for a spatial layer indicates that the rank of the channel has been reduced resulting in O throughput on one of the spatial layers Cur rently 2x2 MIMO is supported with one CQI for each spatial layer i e a total of 2 CQI values CQI results are wideband and sub band The wideband CQI represents the CQI for the entire bandwidth and the sub band CQI results are computed indiv
105. 701473899089 0 Ko 5 8 de Page OG Tools Optionkey 136969178412034997631573236926 O 356866547527413676630206567647 0 205947346541342637510377498559 O 016053306928060559851401349648 0 226826789119888685561107045374 0 258331664939731883060795245924 0 015430682406919203092337151146 0 311757375413324347150953894928 0 245543933616086293802786216943 0 159963900903968861720640471947 0 254181590639533920572822368360 0 295036083233863879230626211017 0 397169887811946762342241135434 0 084823431638520694222366864086 0 053019402304397846903845663196 0 Optionkey Format Privilege Timestamp Order 06 30 Customer 2009 07 29 Order 06 18 Customer 2009 07 29 Order 06 18 Customer 2009 07 29 Order 06 18 Customer 2009 10 20 Order 09 26 Customer 2008 07 17 Order 07 52 Customer 2009 03 18 Order 06 42 Customer 2009 07 29 Order 06 18 Customer 2009 07 29 Order 06 18 Customer 2009 07 29 Order 06 18 Customer 2009 10 20 Order 09 26 Customer 2008 07 17 Order 07 52 Customer 2009 03 18 Order 06 42 Customer 2009 07 29 Order 06 18 Customer 2009 07 29 Order 06 18 Count Demo 2010 02 24 1 14 12 License Activation Valid Count Customer 2008 07 03 1 Type Permanent Permanent Permanent Permanent Permanent Permanent Permanent Permanent Permanent Permanent Permanent Permanent Permanent Permanent Permanent Format Privilege Timestamp License Activation Valid Valid Invalidity F
106. 8 Performing Measurements sse eene nennen nennen nnns 108 Sample Application sorsra rossen tineia aa aa paa aai aniria irren iia 109 Measuring of EVDO Signals niente tenenti nerd iiie nui 110 The SEvdoControlSettings Gtructure es 110 8 4 EVDO BCH Demodulation esses nennen nennen nnn nnne nnn nennen 111 8 5 Measurement Rates ecciesie eren enc niii ans hausta nue nk ausi ance RR spa nra air 111 9 R amp S ViCom LTE Technology cessere 112 941 Measuring of LTE Signals inerenti tnn einen eran e enana 112 9 1 1 Narrowband Measurements Configuration 113 9 1 1 1 temerktoptengd cicatrices earn 113 9 1 1 2 S Sync to P Sync hang 113 9 1 1 3 Reference Signal Measurements nene enne 115 9 1 2 Wideband Measurements Confiouraton em 117 9 1 2 1 Wideband Reference Signal Measurements 118 9 1 2 2 Wideband RSSI Module 120 9 1 2 3 MIMO Scanner Configuration Measurements nn 120 9 1 3 Narrowband Measurement Result 121 Otal E p lt EE 122 9 1 3 2 Channel lmpulsebRespnonses ene em nnne nennen nnne 123 9 1 3 3 SYNC Signal Power amp CINR Values sss eene 124 9 1 3 4 Reference Signal Measurement nennen nens 125 9 1 4 Wideband Measurement Results 126 9 1 4 1 Wideband Reference Signal Measurement Results 126 9 1 4 2 Wideband RSSI Measurement HResuhte sees 128 9 1 5 MIMO Measurement Resuhte enm 129 9 1 6 Throughput Estimation Results 1
107. 8 Power aggregation modes The aggregation mode can be chosen from one of the following three options e PEAK Select the maximum power value from the single measurement results Sample Application e AVERAGE Calculate the linearized average of all the power values calculated for the different raw measurements where p is the power value of the raw measure ment i and N is the number of measurements contributing to the overall result 1 N Poe LPs SM e ROOT MEAN SQUARE The root mean square of all intermediate results is calcu lated based on the equation shown below As for the average the power values are converted to Watt to have a linear scale for calculating the final result The last two modes do not use the calculated power values directly but first linearize the power values Otherwise the aggregation would lead to incorrect results 13 2 Sample Application In the same way as shown in the other R amp S ViCom APIs a sample application is pack aged with the RF Channel Power measurements module R amp S ViCom CW It has a similar look and feel as the other sample applications and shares the same purpose The usage of the API shall be shown as a GUI in the same way as it looks in the code to reduce the time to get familiar with the API and to make trial and error possible with out coding Basically the user interface looks familiar if you have used one of the other sample applications deployed with the other modules
108. 96 3 4 338 336 99 4 96 4 5 766 758 99 0 5 6 832 812 97 6 6 7 815 779 95 6 7 8 780 727 93 2 8 9 727 652 89 7 9 10 750 654 87 2 96 10 11 704 582 82 7 96 11 12 834 658 78 9 96 12 13 748 545 72 9 96 13 14 907 607 66 9 14 15 1050 579 55 1 96 15 16 914 476 52 1 96 16 17 876 312 35 6 96 17 18 966 271 28 1 96 18 19 1029 220 21 4 96 19 20 1180 256 21 7 96 20 21 1070 96 9 0 96 21 22 958 70 7 3 96 22 23 767 61 8 0 23 24 617 25 4 1 96 24 25 496 27 5 4 96 25 26 305 15 4 9 26 27 150 7 4 7 27 28 76 6 7 9 28 29 44 1 2 3 96 WCDMA BCH Demodulation 6 3 2 Sample Application In the SampleForViComWcdma exe application it is possible to experiment with the usage of the WCDMA R amp S ViCom API to demodulate the BCCH BCH channel and decode the demodulated PDUs A screenshot is shown below In this section a complete walk through is shown to help you getting a first demodula tion result So if you follow the steps shown below you should get the BCH demodula tion up and running very fast and also gain an impression of how to use the API Frequencies MHz tart Measure During Measurement newline Ctrl Enter Ch Channel SC SCID PDU Mode t 100ms E Save ok Enter mrs tri new line Ctrl Enter ES z Type Trau 2112800000 Request PN Scanner Settings Cancel Address 192 168 0 4 Receiver Index om Scanner Settings
109. A Data Active or V void iD the checksum data always begins with A complete list can be obtained from many sources on the internet 15 2 5 Ending the Session After making your measurements you can unload the GPS receiver using the Release interface button If you encounter a problem during the release procedure try using the Terminate interface button The R amp S ViCom API then forces a deletion of the ViComGPSInterface object 15 2 6 Viewing the Results To view the results use the controls in the lower right corner Measurements Clicking Browse lets you find the result file you want to open and View opens the file in the viewer Sample Application 16 R amp S ViCom RS232 Tunneling The R amp S TSMx Family has different connection ports at the back Two FireWire con nections several antenna connectors a power connector and one RS232 interface The latter can be used to connect an additional device to the R amp S TSMx Family model making it controllable by the PC that the R amp S TSMx Family model is connected too RS232 communication supports two way communication as long as it is not done par allel For example some older mobiles can be connected by a serial connector to the pc In general any device that supports a serial communication interface RS232 can be connected and controlled using the R amp S ViCom API x p ROMDEASCHWARZ mm nena oboo m im san CONG ROCESS Figu
110. B 3 E g if you request SIB 3 PDU 17 you will receive MIB SIB3 and if applicable SB1 and SB2 after SIB 3 has been decoded by the BCH Demodulator Once a SIB has been decoded for a Node B is it ever decoded again at a later point in time As long as the system is sure that the same signal is received the first decoding result is considered valid and returned If there is an uncertainty about the signal source for the same SC on the same channel different frame timing or a longer pause between the measurement points occurred the decoding process is repeated To notify about this event the scrambling code indicator is incremented To be sure to have the same Node B in the case that two results have been found with two different indicator values the CelllD must be decoded This behaviour can be changed when configuring the measurement For each Node B it is possible to define another strategy how often the PDUs shall be decoded It is also possible to reset the stored results cache Is there any effect in changing load for BCH demodulation in R amp S ROMES with the R amp S TSM Instru ments in HiSpeed or HiDynamic mode No the load is fixed to 10 This was a quite reasonable value that was found out with the R amp S ROMES With the NRE for the BCH demodulator the demodulations with much higher priority may be requested The scheduling is influenced in a way that the R amp S TSMx gets a maximum penalty in mea surement rates on
111. Bm S Sync power dB both servercase and interferercase The related power values of the P Sync channel can be derived using the reported S Sync to P Sync ratio p SSyncToPSyncRatioInDB by simply adding that value to the S Sync power e pfCinrPSyncInDB P Sync CINR dB in servercase only e pfCinrSSyncInDB S Sync CINR dB in servercase only f CinrInDB Servercase average of P Sync CINR and S Sync CINR dB ointerferercase S Sync CINR dB pfSSyncRssiInDBm Comprises the linear average of the total received power observed only in OFDM symbols containing Secondary Synchronization Signals over the center 62 resource elements including co channel serving and non serv ing cells adjacent channel interference thermal noise etc Valid in server and interferercase Measuring of LTE Signals e pfSSyncQualityInDB Calculated as the ratio of SSYNC Power and SSYNC RSSI Additionally an amplitude CINR is calculated for each of the two channels where the phase CINR component is removed from the overall CINR If the difference between the CINR and the amplitude CINR is high this indicates a phase noise problem in the basestation itself i e there is no a real interferer that causes the situation 9 1 3 4 Reference Signal Measurement From each 100ms block of signal the narrowband scanner provides one Reference Signal measurement The following measurements are available RSRP sCenterRSRPinDBm100 Gives the
112. Channel Detection i 219 ADC measurements 222 Configuration 221 Device options 220 General Operation 24 219 Performance requirements ssssssssss 220 Sample ACD 219 Smart ACD hende nns 220 R amp S ViCom CDMA EVDO Technology 99 R amp S ViCom GSM Technology eese 77 Measurements demo application 91 Measuring of GSM signals TT R amp S ViCom Interface Files 26 R amp S ViCom Interface Functions essssse 20 R amp S ViCom LTE Technology eene 112 R amp S ViCom RF Scan and RF Power Scan Technology 171 R amp S ViCom WCDMA Technology eects 58 R amp S ViCom WiMAX Technology eeees 159 GUI Sample Application esses 164 RF Power Scan Technology we 191 Interface concept eene 192 Measurement and post processing concept 191 Sample application rne 193 RF Scanner Technology Sample Application 184 S Sample AppliCatiOD coeunt ir tet ee s koe tec 60 Sample Application for CDMA 2000 EVDO 106 Setting up a Gustom ProJ8GL secca indie oec 50 Create the project environment ocnccccnnnncicnnccicincnco 51 Installation iSSU68 rmn ti eet ere i 54 Project settilgs mision rra ette d ser S
113. D for LTE channel detection with the R amp S TSME you need the R amp S options K40 K27 and K29 e If you want to use Simple ACD for CDMA channel detection with the R amp S TSMW you need the R amp S options K40 and K22 14 2 Configuration 14 2 1 General Settings Usually frequency ranges are defined via frequency band numbers These numbers are standardized for each mobile radio technology e g LTE UMTS CDMA and EVDO per geographic region Therefore a list of technology settings STechnolgySettings containing an identi fier for the mobile radio technology and a set of related frequency bands u64BandIdMask is used to set which frequency range shall be scanned for which technology up It is strongly recommend to specify only those bands which are defined for the mea surement region This list is implemented as an array of STechnolgySettings with dwCount ele ments as a part of the ACD settings structure SAcdSettings Further parameters of this structure are enMeasuremetnMode to select simple or smart ACD operation e enSensitivity only used for smart mode Three different levels of sensitivity are available Depending on the requirements of the measurement the user may select a faster or more sensitive ACD e dwNumberOfTrialsPerChannel to specify the maximum number of attempts to evaluate one channel Increasing this number helps to find weaker cells and increases the detection prob ability but reduces the dete
114. Demodulation One central feature of the R amp S TSM Instruments is the possibility to decode the mes sages sent on the BCCH BCH for each cell that is encountered during the scan proc ess These messages contain information about the cell and various radio parameters available besides information on specific capabilities a cell offers to the UE How this demodulation process is controlled is the subject of this chapter R amp S ViCom R amp S ViCom WCDMA Technology 6 3 1 This section refers to the general description of the demodulation process in chapter Using the Demodulators Please be sure to read that chapter first before starting with this section In the following you can find a description of the way how the messages are obtained It is a technically detailed description of the demodulation process The second part shows how to use the ViCom API to get BCCH BCH messages Therefore the sample application delivered with the API is shown and as the code of demo program is ana lyzed and explained Common pitfalls are shown in the last section to help you to avoid those Measurement Delalls tetro et n eee he eet i d edet a d n beta dns 67 Sample ee e DE 71 Frequently Asked ele EE 75 Measurement Details The BCH demodulator is part of the WCDMA PN Scanner interface in the R amp S ViCom It has to be configured before a scan measurement is started The configuration defines which information shall be demod
115. EN 51 Project te 51 Updating the Projects AAA 54 Working with the code sississississ saisine inaani 53 Setup an R amp S TSM Instrument Connection 18 Software Requirements Start Programming ocooccnccciocccionicacccnncnno System Layer for RF Scan Technology T Technology Specific Features ooooococnnccconocccccnocnconnncncnnnnno 21 CDMA EVDO U Using R amp S TSMW RF Power Scan in a Typical Drive Test e 196 Using th Bemodulators nnnm 47 Ww WCDMA BCH Demodulation eeseessses 66 Measurement details Sample Application 3 et rem een
116. File Device Key The Device Key is installed TEMI LSN Mili Tarhnalan Log Messages Click right mouse button for Copy to Clipboard Trying TSMx connection Firmware 11 02 or higher required R amp S Device Driver for TSMx loaded 1394 driver version 12 0 0 0 1394 DLL version 12 0 0 0 One connected TSMx found TSMQ Number 100167 100167 selected Figure 18 1 TSMx Option Key Installer Dialog 18 1 3 Display Contents of the R amp S TSMx Family Info Tab The following information can be read out from the TSMx Info tab Hardware e Instrument type R amp S TSMU VAR 02 R amp S TSMU H VAR 03 R amp S TSML x x has to be identical with the label at the rear panel 18 1 4 R amp S TSMx Family Option Handling e Input Power type of input stage Normal standard input power R amp S TSMU R amp S TSML x High extended input power R amp S TSMU H e JTAG Devices ACE V2Pro 1st Controller Board version ACE V2Pro Counter 2nd Controller Board version with CPLD e EEE1394 Chip Rev Revision of the OHCI1394 chip version has to be gt 0x61 Serial Numbers Programmed serial numbers in the EEPROM and in the flash card The following two serial numbers should be identical e TSMx Flash R amp S TSMU serial number that is stored on the flash card e TSMx EPROM R amp S TSMU serial number that is programmed in the EEPROM The following two serial numbers should be identical but not necessarily the same
117. GetErrorString string myErrorString myViComError GetErrorString Reading and Changing Settings The current settings of the selected R amp S TSM Instruments can be read before or dur ing measuring using the following function GetSettings The current settings of the selected R amp S TSM Instruments can be changed using the following functions e SetFrequencyTable e SetDemodulationSettings e SetResultBufferDepth e SetTimebaseSynchronisationMode only for the R amp S TSMx Family and R amp S TSME More details of these functions can be found in the R amp S ViCom Reference manual Getting Measurements Note that SetFrequencyTable should be called before measurement is started An application must specify which frequencies an R amp S TSM Instrument should scan before starting to measure The R amp S Instrument has no default frequency values Start taking measurements by calling the StartMeasurement method on the basic interface for example myViComIF GetBasicInterface StartMeasurement myViComError Start Programming As the StartMeasurement is amember of the Basic part of the R amp S ViCom inter face it must be called via the GetBasicInterface function It is useful to get information from the R amp S TSM Instrument while it is preparing to take measurements Do this by calling the function Get TSMxMessagesDuringStartMeasurement soon after calling StartMeasurement The Ge
118. ING cDemodSettings DemodulationRequestST3 eRequestType CViComGSMNWSInterfaceData SDemodulationSettings SDemodRequest DEMODREQUEST START REQUEST cDemodSettings DemodulationRequestST3 dwDemodulationTimeoutInMs 10000 cDemodSettings DemodulationRequestST3 dwRequestIdent 1 pcGsmScanner gt RequestDemodulationOfST1To4 cError cDemodSettings The sample shown above demonstrates how to specifically request a System Informa tion Type 3 message for a channel with a timeout of 10 seconds When a requested message cannot be decoded attempts are stopped after that time If a result can be demodulated a structure is filled with the desired information The most important information is stored in the hex dump field in the structure It can be used to analyse it with a GSM Layer 3 compatible parser As a special case some content of the System Information Type 3 message is deco ded by the scanner itself to gain the current network infrastructure IDs namely e CI e LAC e MCC e MNC These will be reported in the structure SCellIdentResult Refer to GSM BCH Demodulation to learn more about the new demodulation capabili ties The automatic demodulation described here is complex and less flexible than the new method Spectrum Measurement The GSM technology measurements also provide a way to create a spectrum of the GSM channels defined for the measurement The spectrum is calculated from a set of raw measurements
119. INR sub band values can be measured with the LTE module as well lt measures those values on the six innermost resource blocks the scanner finds in a 100ms LTE measurement sample According to the 3GPP spec TS 36 214 it utilizes only antenna 0 and 1 for the RSRP and RSRQ measurements The six inner most resource blocks will be located in the 1MHz bandwidth around the center fre quency RSRQ value is calculated based on the measured RSRP value This is done by putting the aforementioned RSRP in relation to the total in band power of all the PBCH resource blocks within the 100 ms signal sample To get those results it is required to turn the RSRP measurement mode on in the mea surement configuration This is achieved by setting ViCom LTE SFrequencySetting wNarrowbandRefSignalMeasMode The measurement can provide only one RS CINR value for the bandwidth of the PBCH but also sub band values 2 3 or 6 depending on wNarrowbandRefSignalMeasMode to identify frequency selective interference The R amp S ViCom is capable of doing the NB RS CINR measurements in eMBMS enabled areas On top of the narrowband measurement a wideband measurement using the full chan nel bandwidth is available This measurement allows extended reference signal mea surements and supports RSRP RSRQ RS CINR RSSI as well as spectrum values There are two types of wideband WB measurements available that can be used sep arately or combined 1 sub band
120. In that directory the following registry setting files are also available e phylisKernelTraceSettings reg Used to enable the internal message trac ing facility of the dispatching mechanism the so called Phylis Kernel Normally you don t want to use this but when a technically complicated problem occurs you might be requested by the Rohde amp Schwarz support to enable the tracing and transfer the output to our technical experts e TsmuWorkerDebugSettings reg When the content of this file is inserted into the registry the debugging capabilities of the R amp S ViCom applications are improved Normally the R amp S TSM Instrument looses connection to the driver very quickly when no processing can be done on the PC side That is the case when you try to debug your application that utilizes the R amp S ViCom API and stop at a specific location with a breakpoint To leverage the problems that occur in that sit uation load this file into the registry and you won t get bothered with the Connec tion lost message any longer e SetPhylisLogPath reg Used to adjust the location of the LogFiles folder of the R amp S ViCom installation Per default this registry file changes the location to C Temp ViCom Phylis Logs In order to manually specify another path one has to open the SetPhylisLogPath reg file in a text editor e g notepad and change the RuSPhy1lModDir C Temp ViCom Phylis Logs VN entry appropriately e RemoveAllViComRegistrySetting
121. Install exe will be found in the following location R amp S TSMx Family Option Handling QGU Ul ViCom 1551 tools TSMx TSMxDriver y 4 Search TSMuDriver p Organize v Include in library e Share with v Burn New folder m e ia Links be Name 3 Date modified Musi d eus 15 TSMxDriverInstall exe 21 03 2014 13 31 i Pictures B Videos E FRANETA MUT20515 H amp cy 0 G 1 CAP QARSINT NETADATA Ga Mj view gt pl eee Double click the executable TSMxDriverInstall exe file After a short pause the following splash screen appears TSMx Device Driver Installer Welcome to the TSMx Device Driver Installer This wizard will guide you through installing or updating the drivers for TSMx Devices Follow the instructions in the dialogue box make sure that no application is using an R amp S TSMx Family instrument and that the Device Manager is not displaying R amp S TSMx Family instrument s property pages Click Next to start installing the device driver and follow the instructions in the install wizard When the driver is installed the FireWire connection to the R amp S TSMx Family instru ment may be checked with the OptionKeylnstaller utility supplied by the exe installer The OptionKeylnstaller may be found in the following location C RuS ViCom_ lt version gt tools TSMx R amp S TSMx Family Option Handling File Edit View Tools Help Organize v Include in library
122. MD e fthe MIB was configured to be reported on request only it will be reported as soon as another SIB is reported or requested R amp S ViCom R amp S ViCom WCDMA Technology Since this handling is sometimes difficult to understand we recommend not to change the default settings unless you definitely know what the modifications mean Due to internal architectural reasons it is required to request the SIB 3 for a channel before other results might be returned So make sure that for every configured chan nel at least the SIB 3 is in mode ONCE or REPETITION If the mode is set to ON_CMD other results will be returned after the first demodulation request for that SIB 3 has been performed successfully This also applies to the MIB 6 3 1 2 Performance Measurements The measurement rate at which decoding takes place is a crucial aspect in the BCH demodulation module It was designed to be highly efficient and producing best results under various conditions The actual demodulation probabilities are shown in this sec tion Laboratory Measurements One important aspect of the decoder quality is its block error rate This block error rate tells one how many packets could not be decoded compared to how many packets were received in total To do a real world performance measurement the following test scenario was used A R amp S TSMU received two signals one from a R amp S CMU that acted as the data sender and a R amp S SMIQ device u
123. ME Host computer TSME 1 lt gt NIC 1 IP 192 168 0 2 IP 192 168 0 20 SubnetMask 255 255 255 0 TSME 2 lt NIC 2 IP 192 168 1 2 IP 192 168 1 20 SubnetMask 255 255 255 0 Figure 4 5 R amp S TSME setup for MIMO e Both receivers need to be connected via sync cable e Currently the maximum number of supported R amp S TSME units for MIMO operation is two e While changing the IP address of the R amp S TSME 2 the other R amp S TSME unit should be switched off e MIMO operation requires both the R amp S TSME K29 and R amp S TSME K30 option installed on at least one device additionally both receivers need R amp S TSME Kxb band options can be different number of bands R amp S ViCom Setup for MIMO Operation Mode R amp S ViCom supports currently only LTE technology MIMO operation mode With several R amp S TSME units connected to the host computer the list of connected receivers queried by the CViComBasicInterface GetConnectedReceivers command has multiple entries one per receiver CViComLteInterface contains the definitions for further configurations The following code sequence shows how to evaluate the available frontend mask for MIMO operation const SConnectedReceiverTable pReceiverTable rInterface GetBasicInterface GetConnectedReceivers if pReceiverTable NULL DWORD dwAvailableFrontends 0 for DWORD i 0 i lt pReceiverTable gt dwCountofReceivers i
124. N Offsets shall be used for time estimation during scans a big switch matrix is used in the sample application Each rectangle in the matrix that is shown in the upper center of the dialog stands for one PN Offset Green signalizes an enabled scan where a light gray filling stands for disabled reporting The upper left box is used to control estimation of PN offset 0 the other offsets are first set from left to right offsets 0 31 in the first line then from top to bottom You can simply enable disable single points by clicking on them To modify all entries at once use the two buttons below the matrix on the left set On the right side there is a function to enable a certain pattern of PN offsets The value stored in Bias is the starting offset and Setup is the distance between two different offsets that shall be enabled For example if you choose Bias to be 13 and Step to be 7 the PN offsets 13 20 27 34 and so on will be enabled after you click Setup R amp S ViCom 0 R amp S ViCom CDMA EVDO Technology Pressing the Set button before the Bias Setup erases the whole content of the manipulations made previously 8 2 2 Sync Channel Demodulation Mode 8 2 3 In this field you can specify how often an attempt is started to demodulate a probably new incoming signal The values that can be put in there can either be 1 2 or 4 The meaning of the numeric value is the same as described above in the F SYNC Dem
125. R amp SSViCom Interface for R amp S TSM Instruments User Manual ANIA AA 1505 1329 42 26 5 o L 3 D o Y o m Test amp M This manual describes the R amp S ViCom version 15 55 The software contained in this product makes use of several valuable open source software packages For information see the Open Source Acknowledgment on the user documentation CD ROM included in delivery Rohde amp Schwarz would like to thank the open source community for their valuable contribution to embedded computing 2015 Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG M hldorfstr 15 81671 M nchen Germany Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89 41 29 12 164 Email info rohde schwarz com Internet www rohde schwarz com Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding R amp S is a registered trademark of Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual R amp S ViCom is abbreviated as R amp S ViCom R amp S TSMx is abbreviated as R amp S TSMx R amp S TSMW is abbreviated as R amp S TSMW R amp S TSME is abbriviated as R amp S TSME R amp S9TSMA is abbriviated as R amp S TSMA Basic Safety Instructions Always read through and comply with the following safety instructions All plants and locations of the Rohde amp Schwarz group of companies make every effort to keep the safety standards of our products up to
126. RPinDBm100 ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SSignals SReferen ceSignal Narrowband RSRP TX0 Gives the RSRP based only on RO based on the reference signal power measurement of the 6 innermost resource blocks 1MHz BW around center frequency where PBCH is broad cast The scanner can be configured to provide up to 6 RSRP sub band values pNarrowbandRSR PinDBm100 bRsCinrMeasResultCon fig ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SSignals SReferen ceSignal Narrowband RSRP TX1 Gives the RSRP based only on R1 based on the reference signal power measurement of the 6 innermost resource blocks 1 MHz BW around center frequency where PBCH is broad cast The scanner can be configured to provide up to 6 RSRP sub band values pNarrowbandRSR PinDBm100 bRsCinrMeasResultCon fig ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SSignals SReferen ceSignal Narrowband RSRP TX2 Gives the RSRP based only on R2 based on the reference signal power measurement of the 6 innermost resource blocks 1MHz BW around center frequency where PBCH is broad cast The scanner can be configured to provide up to 6 RSRP sub band values pNarrowbandRSR PinDBm100 bRsCinrMeasResultCon fig ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SSignals SReferen ceSignal Building a LTE TopN View Measurement Description ViCom Name Part of ViCom struc ture Narrowband RSRP TX3 Gives the RSRP based only on R3 based on t
127. Routing txt PhylisEnvironmentinfoProvider dll Processldent txt PhylisFilterDesigner dll PhylisKernelMessageModule dll PhylisLowLevelErrorMessage Handler dll PhylisTimer dll RSToolbox dll SampleForErrorHandler dll ServiceExtension_TSME dll SpectrumWorker dll TsmeAdmin dll TsmeParameters dll TsmeResultProcessor dll TsmeRfBoardinternals dll TsmeTools dll TsmeWorker dll TsmuWorker dll TsmwAdmin dll TSMWSpectrum dll TSMWWorker dll UmtsL3DeclfcMod dll ViComResourceManager dll ViComLoaderManager dll To run the R amp S ViCom specific technology API and or the BCCH demodulator the list of common files is completed with the following entries Table 4 2 R amp S ViCom WCDMA Technology related Interface Files What you need Dynamic Libraries Header Files UmtsDemodulator dll UmstPnsOption2 dll ViComWCDMA dll ViComWCDMAe dll ViComWCDMAw dll ViComWcdmaErrors h ViComWcdmalnterface h ViComWcdmalnterfaceData h Table 4 3 R amp S ViCom GSM Technology related Interface Files Dynamic Libraries Header Files GS3Worker dll GsmDemodulator dll ViComGSM dll ViComGSMe dll ViComGSMw dll ViComGSMErrors h ViComGSMInterface h ViComGSMInterfaceData h Table 4 4 R amp S ViCom CDMA EVDO Technology related Interface Files Dynamic Libraries Header Files Cdma2000Pns dll C2kDemodulator dll EvdoPns dll EvdoDemodulator dll ViComCdma dll ViComCDMAe dll ViComCDMAw dll
128. S ViCom R amp S ViCom CW Technology EH External External Trigger Trigger Internal Trigger iid Measurement Time MeasTime psc H parc 2 li ii i j Je i il ik Kl Single Channel Mode iii TER D D Total Sweep Time Figure 13 6 Triggering in single channel mode The Multi Channel mode basically works in the same way The raw measurement data is only processed with the FFT and the spectrum is analysed after the internal trigger is raised In comparison to the single channel mode the raw data is not split to only use parts of a chunk or to combine to chunks for a FFT Chunks are always used com pletely or ignored in this mode In the sample shown below the tuning to the channel group containing the channel 4 5 and 6 occurs after all channels in the first group have been measured once External External Trigger Trigger Internal Trigger MeasTime Channel 2 Measurement Time Channel 1 a h AN oe i HA ili Multi Channel Mode il Total Sweep Time Figure 13 7 Triggering in multi channel mode WEEN 213 User Manual 1505 1329 42 26 13 1 3 Channel Power Measurements One important difference between the Single and Multi Channel Measurement mode is illustrated in the figure above as well In case of the Multi Channel Mode the measure ment time of one set of frequency that is measured in a row is cho
129. S ViCom GPS related Interface Files Dynamic Libraries Header Files UbloxAdmin dll ViComGPSe dll ViComGPSw dll ViComGpsErrors h ViComGpslnterface h ViComGpsInterfaceData h Table 4 11 R amp S ViCom RS232 related Interface Files Dynamic Libraries ViComRS232 dll Header Files ViComRS232Errors h ViComRS232Interface h ViComRS232InterfaceData h 4 2 Prerequisites If you want to access an R amp S TSMx Family receiver it will be necessary to install the Windows instrument driver for your R amp S TSM Instrument manually if such an instru ment is used The IEEE1394 install utility has been installed along with the R amp S ViCom interface dataset Refer to R amp S TSMx Fami details ly Option Handling of this manual for 4 3 4 3 1 Diagnostics Information The R amp S TSMW and R amp S TSME do not need any special driver to be installed How ever the PC must have a LAN interface to connect the instruments or the R amp S TSMW R amp S TSME is connected using some kind of additional LAN hardware like a switch or a hub It is important that the R amp S TSMW R amp S TSME can be reached from the PC where R amp S ViCom is actually installed For the proper operation you have to install all the Microsoft Visual Studio redistribution packages which can be found in the tools directory for example veredist_x86 2013 0 exe see Chapter 4 1 2 Software Requirements on page 25 a
130. SM RSSI Scan In order to start a GSM RSSI scan the following steps must be performed 1 Choose a frequency bandThe channels will be set automatically to the maximum range available for the selected band ROHDEASCHWARZ Set scan preferences 94424 soi Frequency band GSM900 4 Channels 1 124 Start scan Figure 17 5 Setting the GSM Preferences If necessary change the channels manually according to your needs The input in the Channels field can be done like following a Adda single number for one specific channel for example 7 b Add a range of channels for example 1 124 c Add more than one single number separated by semicolon for example 2 4 7 76 Click Start scan to start the scan In order to stop the scan use Stop scan in the menu inflator in the top right cor ner The GSM scan result graph displays one column for each channel selected The height of a column represents the RSSI value in dBm Task Configuration LH Q ROHDERSCHWARZ Set scan preferences Bluetooth ViComServerApplication unknown 80 86 F2 BA 70 38 RSSI dem ASS weak w iss Channeki strong Parameters Status Gsm Scan GSM900 15 1 meas second Figure 17 6 GSM Scan Result View Following additional information is displayed Parameters Displays the configured preferences for the GSM RSSI scan Status Displays the measurement duration and the measurement rate The status button dis plays the
131. SMimoRe f reference signals RO sult SChannelMatrix one value per RB a per RB R1 R2 and R3 where available on frontend RF1 and RF2 one value is provided per resource block Condition Number condition number for the pwConditionNum ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SMimoRe sult SChannelMatrix Condition Number MIMO 2x4 one value per RB condition number for the channel matrix H matrix for MIMO 2x4 pwConditionNum ber2x4MimolnDB100 ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SMimoRe sult SChannelMatrix To get these values from the scanner the sample application from the previous section can be used for an FDD 2x2 MIMO network using both R amp S TSMW frontends and the R amp S TSMW K30 MIMO option The following changes can be used to simplify the results Narrowband measurement To get only one RS CINR result for the complete bandwidth and no sub band results use the following settings s wNarrowbandRefSignalMeasMode SFrequencySetting wNARROWBAND RSRP RSRQ SFrequencySetting wCENTER RSCINR 1x1080KHZ SFrequencySetting wlMHZ FILTER NOISE FOR 15RB MIMO measurement The sample application provides the complex channel matrix which is not needed in a TopN view Therefore the MIMO measurement should be configured in this way Building a LTE TopN View s MimoSettings dwMimoResultMaskFor2x2 ViCom LTE SFrequencySetting SMimoSettings dwMIMO_ RES COND NUMBER ViCom LTE SFreque
132. Scan Technology This chapter describes the special features of R amp S RF Power Scan technology There are similarities with the RF Scan on R amp S TSMx Family therefore the understanding of the measurement concept and the post processing chain of the previous chapter is required The first section describes the principal conceptual differences when using RF Power Scan compared to the RF Scan The second section contains a description of the inter face structure for the RF Power Scan This section is important for the successful integration of the interface functionalities into a control application The sample application in the third section demonstrates the features of the interface and provides a reference for own developments e Measurement and Post Processing Concept 191 e l teraece ONCE 192 e Sample ee e DEE 193 Measurement and Post Processing Concept Similar to the R amp S RF Scan the basic measurement result of a RF Power Scan is a sweep over a defined frequency range With the RF Power Scan the sweep is done by acquiring data in time domain and calculating the spectrum using an FFT Therefore additional parameters like the FFT size frequency resolution or window type selectiv R amp S ViCom R amp S ViCom RF Scan and RF Power Scan Technology ity are available to define the measurement If the desired sweep range exceeds the maximum real time bandwidth of the R amp S TSMW or the R amp S TSME the frequency band is se
133. Spec structure when enabling the spectrum creation in the measurement details structure The code fragment below shows how to enable the spectrum creation during an active measurement ViCom GSM SMeasurementDetails cDetailSettings cDetailSettings dwCount 1 cDetailSettings pTableOfChannelMeasSpec new CViComGSMNWSInterfaceData SChannelMeasSpec 1 cDetailSettings pTableOfChannelMeasSpec 0 wFrequencyIndex 0 cDetailSettings pTableOfChannelMeasSpec 0 bMEAS SPECTRUM TRUE cDetailSettings SpectrumSpec wCountOfPowerValuesPerChannel 5 cDetailSettings SpectrumSpec wCollectionTimeIn100us 300 30 msec Measuring of GSM Signals cDetailSettings SpectrumSpec eFreqDetector CViComGSMNWSInterfaceData SSpectrumSpec FREQ DETECTOR PEAK cDetailSettings SpectrumSpec eTimeDetector CViComGSMNWSInterfaceData SSpectrumSpec TIME DETECTOR PEAK EXEC VICOM Requesting detailed measurements pcGsmScanner RedefineMeasurementDetails cError cDetailSettings delete cDetailSettings pTableOfChannelMeasSpec The spectrum configuration can be changed during the measurement Each time the o spectrum configuration is changed the new configuration is used for all spectrum mea surements from then on It is not possible to create different kinds of spectrum mea surements for different frequencies in the same measurement at one time The results of such a request will be returned as part of the GSM technology m
134. TSMW R amp S TSME This can be done by clicking on Load Scan ner button If this command was successful the list box is filled with some details of the device e Click the buttons Set Result Buffer to set the Result Buffer Depth in the R amp S TSMW R amp S TSME e Define the frequency table and set the table using the Set Frequencies button The space delimited pairs of a frequency and a channel index can be defined in the table For a simpler editing it is also possible to add the frequencies only one per line a new line is started with Ctrl Enter The channel indices will be added automatically when Set Frequencies is pressed e Specify the demodulation settings Each line in the central list box contains demod ulation settings for one channel PDU pair The numbers in the columns have the following meanings The first number is the channel number that can be seen in the frequency list box It is simply used as a label to represent a particular frequency this avoids having to work with the actual frequency numbers which is inefficient and error prone User Manual 1505 1329 42 26 169 10 2 6 1 GUI Sample Application The second number is the internal PDU name The third number is the demodulation mode The fourth and final number is a timeout if the demodulation mode is set to 2 which means repetition mode The value here is entered in 100 milliseconds For example a value of 10 defin
135. The TD SCDMA scanner allows parallel measurements in different networks The net work is identified by the exact frequency Two types of measurements can be defined for every channel In standard mode the measurement is performed over several subframes thus gaining sensitivity and accuracy at the cost of measurement speed In fast mode the calcula tions are performed over a single subframe for maximized measurement speed In addition to the standard network analysis three further measurement results can be obtained With BCH decoding the signaling information of every detected BTS is deco ded The spectrum measurement provides a narrowband view of the spectrum includ ing the neighbor channels The power profile shows the distribution of the received sig nal strength over time 12 3 Measurement Results The measurement results can be divided in BTS related data and general RF channel information For every detected BTS the delivered parameters are shown in the following table Parameter Description Comment Sync code Sync code of the BTS One of 32 codes Scrambling code Scrambling and midamble code of the One of 128 codes Sync and scrambling BTS code are connected IESSE User Manual 1505 1329 42 26 202 Measurement Results Parameter Time offset Description Time offset of the subframe with respect to the beginning of the acquisition Comment An absolute time is obtained in combina tio
136. Viewing the RESUNS 222 c cescceeeeeset naneededecnaseessecenseasedt naseessecetateavectdageeeectes 226 15 2 1 R amp S TSMW R amp S TSME Address Enter the IP address of the R amp S TSMW in the given box top left This generally has the form 192 168 0 x where x is usually set to 2 After entering the address press the Load Interface button to establish a connection with the R amp S TSMW To establish a connection with the R amp S TSME if selected just press the Load Inter face button as the IP address is already assigned from the list of IP addresses 15 2 2 Message Format Messages can have the NMEA format Ublox format or both 15 2 3 15 2 4 Measurements Select the format in the Message format box The dialog box Send message allows you to send command messages to the GPS module Obviously messages should be sent in the given format Messages resulting from commands or from measurements will appear in the mes sage window The messages begin with the command and are followed by the response see Commands for examples Measurement Pressing Start measurement starts the measurement process but does not generate any results The application takes the messages in the buffer of the GPS module automatically The result is displayed in Message list in the Received data area Pressing Stop measurement ends the measurement process but does not release the interface Comman
137. Wideband RSRQ mea sured from R2 on Fron tend RF1 over the com plete system bandwidth sRSRQinDB100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result WB RSRQ TX3 RX0 dB Wideband RSRQ mea sured from R3 on Fron tend RF1 over the com plete system bandwidth sRSRQinDB100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result WB RSRQ TX2 RX1 dB Wideband RSRQ mea sured from R2 on Fron tend RF2 over the com plete system bandwidth sRSRQinDB100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result WB RSRQ TX3 RX1 dB Wideband RSRQ mea sured from R3 on Fron tend RF2 over the com plete system bandwidth sRSRQinDB100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result WB RSRQ noise clip ped dBm Noise clipped RSRP value based on the wide band reference signal power measurement in 0 01 dB For this value the measured RS CINR was taken into account to correct the RSRP result regarding noise and interference Com bined from RO and R1 over the complete sys tem bandwidth sNoiseClippedRSR QinDB100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result WB RSRQ noise clip ped TX0 RX0 dBm
138. a text field in which data can be entered Using the button Send Data below the text field the data can be transmitted via the R amp S TSMx Family model to the connected device The right side contains the configuration elements In this case two settings can be modified e The baud rate This determines the through put of the connection Normally one value of the following list fits for most devices 4800 9600 14400 19200 38400 57600 or 115200 e Silent mode marked in the screenshot with a green ellipsis This specifies whether the silent mode is switched on 4 or off 2 A value of 0 means that the current configuration is not changed Refer to the section below for more details Sample Application for ViCom RS232 Lew zl sl Request RS232 Settings Cancel Baud Rate 115200 Set Baud Rate Stent Mode o Set Silent Mode Result Buffer 1so Set Resuk Buffer Start Measurement Get Result Counters Store Mode Throw Results Away JW Resuk Loopback to RS232 C Store Results Get Results Beat Viewer NEL LLLI L Terminate R5232 Interface Send Data mes Figure 16 2 R amp S ViCom RS232 sample application Sample Application Walk Bro NEXT ur A dE 230 Result LOOPBACK to RS232 cocinada 231 SNS MUM ONS ein oe 231 16 1 1 Walk Through Example The general procedure to set up a measurement with the RS232 API is as follows 1 2 3 Press button Load RS232 Inter
139. aced e The redistributable installer packages for Microsoft Libraries vcredist which can also be found in the directory VICOM_HOMEltools must be installed Updating the Projects Once a project has been created with the procedure described above the files are dif ferent than the ones in the main R amp S ViCom directory To keep them up to date when new releases are installed anew sample script is added to the R amp S ViCom delivery It is used similar to the createProject script and takes the project name as the only input argument So the command C RuS ViCom Project gt updateProject new R amp S ViCom Programming with the R amp S ViCom Interface 5 6 5 6 1 5 6 2 would copy the most recent files from the top level installation directory into the project path This includes the interface headers binaries and the other stuffs Debugging and Error Handling Debugging Techniques When debugging an application that utilizes the R amp S ViCom API to access one or more devices from an R amp S TSM Instrument some registry keys control the way the underlying framework behaves in terms of logging error handling etc These registry settings can be controlled by some registry files that are stored in the ViCom LogFiles folder of your R amp S ViCom installation This section describes those registry settings in detail The LogFiles directory is also used to store the output files of the sample applica tions
140. again the TSM will boot with the installed Firmware Please choose a Firmware Please choose a Firmware To perform the installation 1 Click the button Choose Firmware to choose the firmware that shall be installed A drop down menu opens and lists all the available firmware versions These are extracted from the Firmware subfolder that can be found in the application path 2 Select the appropriate version marked with a pale blue rectangular The dimmed Please choose a Firmware button turns into the active button show ing the selected firmware version 3 Close all other applications that might use R amp S TSMx Family instrument These are the sample applications the option installer tool and your own R amp S TSMx Family related applications 4 Checkif only one R amp S TSMx Family instrument is connected to the PC The tool does not check how many instances of R amp S TSMx Family instrument are connec ted with each other and the PC Since the data is transferred on the FireWire con nection without a specific destination the behavior is undefined if multiple devices are connected to the PC during installation 5 Switch R amp S TSMx Family instrument off and on 6 Wait about 30 seconds until the R amp S TSMx Family instrument s LEDs stopped blinking After that time the LEDs should not blink at all or show a constant behav ior for at least 5 seconds If the Process State LED keeps blinking the silent m
141. age Wander 2 2 cnr aes Diagnostics Information comisaria a Differences between the R amp S TSMx Family and R amp S ET KEE 46 E EVDO BCH Demodulation sss 111 F Frontend AMO CATON issc nnna 46 G General Descriptions iet tee etie rtp d 17 Get Started Diagnostics information eese 30 Getting started with R amp S TSME 32 Getting started with R amp S TSME MIMOmeasurements X 35 R amp S ViCom for MIMO operation mode 37 Getting Started s Hardware requirements sssseeeees 24 Prerequisites ici retreat 29 Software requirements a GSM BCH Demodulation A Sample application ee 5 rte GSM Measurements Demo Application As Basic channel configuration sesssse REQUESTING Sl type ueterem retten Specifying measurement details H Hardware Requirements oocococcccccocccccconcccnoncconanancnnnnncnnnnno 24 l Installing the R amp S ViCom Interface Dataset and Demo aigle e E 26 K Key to Technical Terms nct tete 14 L ETE BCH Demodulation usos 132 LTE GUI Sample Application sess 132 Using the sample application 132 LTE Throughput Estimation Results CQI measurement results siiri 130 Throughput measurement results
142. al 1505 1329 42 26 19 R amp S TSM Instruments Product Family 3 1 2 R amp S ViCom Interface Functions The R amp S ViCom interface includes C functions and data structures to control and manage the R amp S TSM Instruments The exact content of the R amp S ViCom interface depends upon which model of the R amp S TSM Instrument is going to be used by the application A group of basic R amp S ViCom functions that are common to all R amp S TSM Instruments is present in every R amp S ViCom interface Other R amp S ViCom functions depend on the R amp S TSM Instruments model and may not be present in every R amp S ViCom interface R amp S TSM Instruments control software includes libraries that are required by the R amp S ViCom interface 3 2 R amp S TSM Instruments Product Family The R amp S TSM Instruments product family contains several different devices each hav ing some significant features making them suitable for different measurement situa tions All instruments supported by the R amp S ViCom API and the differences are listed in the table shown below Table 3 1 R amp S TSM Instruments Capabilities Matrix Device type R amp S TSMU R amp STSMQ R amp S R amp S TSML R amp S TSMW R amp S TSME o sme tsuic CW eo in E E TSML W acd Connection Firewire Firewire Firewire Firewire LAN LAN Min Fre 80 MHz 80 MHz 80 MHz 80 MHz 30 MHz 350 MHz quency Max Fre 3 GHz 3
143. ame Part of ViCom struc ture RS CINR TX3 RX0 dB RS CINR over the com plete system bandwidth measured from refer ence signal R3 on fron tend RF1 sAverageRsCin rinDB100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result RS CINR TXO RX1 dB RS CINR over the com plete system bandwidth measured from refer ence signal RO on fron tend RF2 sAverageRsCin rinDB100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result RS CINR TX1 RX1 dB RS CINR over the com plete system bandwidth measured from refer ence signal R1 on fron tend RF2 sAverageRsCin rinDB100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result RS CINR TX2 RX1 dB RS CINR TX3 RX1 dB RS CINR over the com plete system bandwidth measured from refer ence signal R2 on fron tend RF2 RS CINR over the com plete system bandwidth measured from refer ence signal R3 on fron tend RF2 sAverageRsCin rinDB100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort sAverageRsCin rinDB100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result RS sub band CINR TXO RXO dB one value per RB RS sub ba
144. amming interface You can use the CW interface of the R amp S ViCom on one instance only No other R amp S ViCom interfaces must be loaded on that receiver The system will behave in unexpec ted ways measurements will fail for example if this is done e Channel Power MeasurementS coonccccnnncccnnccnnnnancnnnacononananonnnncnnnncnnnnancnnnnanna canon 206 e Sample Application enirdi osna EE E a a aR EES 215 Channel Power Measurements Up to a certain degree all the measurements provided by the R amp S TSM Instruments are performed in the same way The measured frequency is set in the receiver unit together with the bandwidth and the measurement is started after some pause time Incoming data is converted to digital signals demodulated and finally reduced to a downsampled set of IQ data Depending on the measurement mode 512 IQ data pairs so called raw measurement data are written into an internal memory buffer and an interrupt is raised after some time elapsed Additionally an externally connected trigger device generates pulses that are also recorded and counted The interrupt handling routine then transfers some of the raw data chunks to an internal ring buffer Depending on the trigger mode all chunks or only a subset of them are stored in that ring buffer Channel Power Measurements 1Q E Demodulator Down Converter Converter External Internal Trigger Trigger Figure 13 1 Channel power measurement From t
145. ancel ion Freq MHz Duplex NB CINR WB CINR RSSI MIMO Channel d SE r Receiver Configuation te ed Address TS er y Scanner Settings 34 Narrow Band FE re m esandre ex r Demodulator Settings 4 Demod Frontend FE i y PDU Settings while Starting Measurement Channel PDU Mode Repetition ms 0 10 0 0 PDU Settings during Measurement Channel PDU Mode Repetition ms Bts ID Get 100 Results Stop Measurement Release LTE Scanner Results lt Issue PDU Request Figure 9 6 R amp S ViCom LTE technology sample application 9 3 1 1 Connecting to R amp S TSMW R amp S TSME 1 Select the receiver type 2 Define the receiver IP address in the Address box if the selected instrument is the R amp S TSMW When selecting the R amp S TSME the box is disabled because the receiver is associated an IP address from the list of available IP addresses Receiver Configuation nos z Address 192 1588 0 4 3 Select the frontends for narrowband and wideband measurements and for demod ulation GUI Sample Application Scanner Settings Narrow Band FE FE y Wide Band FE FEL sg ee Settings Demod Frontend rei D 4 Press the Load LTE Scanner button at the upper left corner of the sample appli cation The application will try to connect to the R amp S TSMW R amp S TSME a
146. as the R amp S TSMU serial number above e Receiver Flash Front End serial number that is stored on the flash card e Receiver EPROM Front End serial number programmed in the Front End EEPROM Firmware e Virtex2Pro version of the FPGA configuration data and boot code e g HO1V10B0 H01 2nd Hardware version Controller Board H00 1st Hardware Version Controller Board V10 Firmware version 10 BO Beta state 0 e Application version and file data of the TxmsOptionKeylnstaller utility application file elf Firewire Loader version and file length of the Firewire Loader program Flash Loader version and file length of the Flash Loader program file Calibration Level Level calibration file over the full input frequency range of the R amp S TSMx e F Filter IF Filter calibration file over the full input frequency range of the R amp S TSMx e WCDMA 3GPP Derived calibration data set of the IF Filter only for WCDMA 3GPP measurements Level and IF Filter files are created during calibration process The WCDMA 3GPP IF Filter correction file is stored when the UMTS PN Scanner Application is started for the first time after calibration Display Contents of the R amp S TSMx Family Options Tab The Available Options list box in the R amp S TSMx Options tab gives an overview of all the enabled options for a particular instrument 18 1 5 R amp S TSMx Family Option Handling The Installed Option Keys list box displays a
147. ast one for dMaxFrequencyInMHz In between this interval frequency values are placed in equidistant steps The maximum power can be calculated from the value 581 by multiplying the value with PowerResolutionInDB and adding the result to the value of fMinPowerValueInDBm In this sample the power of the first value would therefore be 581 0 1 120 61 9 dBm 11 3 1 7 11 3 1 8 11 4 11 4 1 RF Power Scan Technology e The overflow indicator tells whether an overflow occurred during calculation of this result or not If so the values might not be the real measurement values according to what was specified in the common settings of the power scanner before Step 7 Stop Measurement To stop the logical device from recording raw measurement data press the Stop Mea surement button After the receiver has been stopped it is possible to change the common settings again You can now configure the logical devices again to perform some different measure ments or you can exit the application Before the application is quit the receivers should be unloaded to properly clean up acquired resources Step 8 Unload Receivers Make sure to unload all logical receivers that were used using the Release RF Power Scanner button If you encounter a problem during the release procedure try to use the Terminate RF Power Scanner button The R amp S ViCom API then forces a deletion of the viComRFPowerScanInterface object RF Power
148. at all Be aware when using the API that after a call to GetResult succeeded the returned result might not necessarily contain valid information Sample Application If there is data in the result buffer its content is written to the output file ViComMeasurements txt when the Get Results button is pressed and the Store Results mode is set Additionally the received raw data is written into another text file called ViComMeasurements RS232Received txt of the LogFiles directory 16 1 2 Result Loopback to RS232 The sample application supports a special test mode in which incoming data is imme diately sent back to the transmitter For example this is useful when a terminal is con nected to the COM port of the R amp S TSMx Famaily model like the HyperTerminal appli cation shipped with Microsoft Windows Data sent by the terminal is then bounced back to have some kind of debug facility To enable that special mode just check the Result Loopback to RS232 check box in the application This only works in the measurement mode So be sure to check that box before you click on the GetResults button During the receiving of the results this will force them back 16 1 3 Silent Mode Normally the R amp S TSMx Family model uses the integrated COM Port to show trace messages that can be used to check about the current state of the device In the RS232 measurement mode this is automatically switched off If you also want to tur
149. at is investigated Since some of the signal power is therefore lost the power is divided by 85 because it has been shown that about 85 of the signal power of a GSM chan nel is within a 156 kHz bandwidth Measuring of GSM Signals 156 kHz 1 p f 200 kHz Figure 7 5 Reduction of used Signal Bandwidth From the remaining input data the FFT results are grouped to form one power value One group consists of FFTs falling in a time interval which is a multiple of 40 nsec The set of power values calculated from the FTTs is then averaged by a root mean square algorithm to get the single power value of a sub group slot to find the real timeslot borders in the channel power measurement mode The term time slot is used in this description and the interface documentation to clarify the calculation algorithm and the concept of dividing a time period of that length into sub groups D GSM network scanners the R amp S TSM Instruments do not synchroniise on the time Since the calculation of results is a continuous process and can be compared to a slid ing window calculation time slot synchronisation is not necessary For the requested number of result values per timeslot this calculation is repeated The algorithm is illustrated in the following figure Measuring of GSM Signals 1 Timeslot 577 msec p t 1 n 5 x 40 nsec pt 1 Figure 7 6 Channel Power Calculation S
150. ating bands and c hannel numbers Do wnlink Operating Band DL Frequency Band Frequency offset FOffset Assigned Chan nels Assigned Center Frequencies 2110 MHz to 2170 MHz 10562 to 10838 2112 4 MHz to 2167 6 MHz in steps of 0 2 MHz MHz ll 1930 MHz to 1990 0 9662 to 9938 1932 4 MHz to MHz 1987 6 MHz in steps of 0 2 MHz Extra downlink as for Band Il 1850 1 412 437 462 487 1932 5 1937 5 channels of Band Il 512 537 1942 5 1947 5 562 587 612 637 1952 5 1957 5 662 687 1962 5 1967 5 1972 5 1977 5 1982 5 1987 5 Ill 1805 MHz to 1880 1575 1162 to 1513 1807 4 MHz to 1877 6 MHz in steps of 0 2 MHz UMTS System Information Blocks UMTS System Information Blocks SIBs are emitted on the Broadcast Channel BCH They contain information that is likely to be relevant to any phone in the cell SIBs and their contents are defined in References 6 the 3GPP RRC protocol specification The table below shows a summary The corresponding PDU column refers to the ViCom interface parameter used to spec ify which SIB s are to be demodulated by the BCH demodulator of the R amp S TSML W See also Section 6 SChannelPDUPair above Table 18 3 UMTS SIB numbers and corresponding PDUs Technical Notes SIB Number Contents NAS system information UE timers and counters Reference in 3GPP TS 25 133v5 x x 10 2 48 8 4 Corresponding PDU 15
151. be clicked after starting a measurement and will display the settings in the appropriate R amp S ViCom 10 2 5 10 2 6 R amp S ViCom WiMAX Technology dialogue fields The settings can also be stored in an R amp S TSMW R amp S TSME set tings file tsm and later reloaded using the Save Load buttons respectively Load Save OK Request PN Scanner Settings Cancel Figure 10 8 Scanner settings Miscellaneous Both the Cancel and OK buttons terminate the application OK stores the settings in a bin directory before terminating If available this file is used to initialise the appli cation not the scanner after reloading Demodulation In the sample application it is possible to experiment with the usage of the WiMAX R amp S ViCom API to demodulate the BCH channel and decode the demodulated PDUs In this section a complete walk through is shown to help you getting a first demodula tion result So if you follow the steps shown below you should get the BCH demodula tion up and running very fast and also gain an impression of how to use the API The important parts of the demo application concerning the BCH demodulator are the center and right handed columns If dynamic requests are to be issued during mea surement the Issue Request button can be used Once the application has been started the following operation sequence should be performed to do a first sample measurement e Load the R amp S
152. be done automatically until the attempt was successful e Or during the measurement Some more setup details have to be fixed in that Case time out values for example Since the first option is relatively self explanatory to use we concentrate on the second option here The configuration for a request is done using the structure SDemodulationSettings Besides the information retrieved from the SSCHInfoResult these settings must be defined for each message types 1 to 4 e Shall a new request be started an existing request be cancelled or shall the cur rent settings be kept as it is e How long shall the network scanner try to satisfy the demodulation if mode is set to DEMODREQUEST START REQUEST e An optional user defined request id can be given to identify the request later in the result This value is not used by the R amp S ViCom API and can therefore be used freely by you 7 1 2 5 Measuring of GSM Signals ViCom GSM SDemodulationSettings cDemodSettings cDemodSettings wFrequencyIndex pcSCHInfoResult wFrequencyIndex cDemodSettings wBSIC pcSCHInfoResult gt wBSIC cDemodSettings dwIndicatorOfSCHInfo pcSCHInfoResult gt dwIndicatorOfSCHInfo cDemodSettings DemodulationRequestSTl eRequestType cDemodSettings DemodulationRequestST2 eRequestType cDemodSettings DemodulationRequestST4 eRequestType CViComGSMNWSInterfaceData SDemodulationSettings SDemodRequest DEMODREQUEST DO NOTH
153. ber For each class one result value will be calculated In order to perform a meaningful compression you have the choice between three types of how to find the representing value for one data class e Max Peak This uses the maximum value in the class e Auto Peak Returns both the minimum and maximum value of a class so you get twice the number of results requested e RMS The Root Mean Square of all values To calculate this value the power val ues stored in dBm are converted to Watt temporarily see comment above The figure below shows that mechanism The small dots represent a single power value for one of the native frequencies The twelve native measurements from the sweep data have to be compressed to three frequencies classes The Max Peak selector would then choose the native measurement marked in red whereas the Auto Peak would additionally add the measurement samples marked in a light yellow The 11 2 2 3 Architecture and Functionality of the RF Scan Technology RMS would calculate the average of the native measurements which are shown as bigger circles in the figure p f f f fs Figure 11 5 Power value compression The spectrum filter itself decides which algorithm to apply The only thing to configure is the number of result lines which are desired and the frequency interval borders Channel Filter The channel filter can be used to calculate power values for a set of frequency chan nels T
154. buci n de baja tensi n que suministra corriente a edificios residenciales Nota Los aparatos de clase A est n destinados al uso en entornos industriales Estos aparatos pueden causar perturbaciones radioel ctricas en entornos residenciales debido a posibles perturbaciones guiadas o radiadas En este caso se le podr solicitar al operador que tome las medidas adecuadas para eliminar estas perturbaciones Aparato de clase B Aparato adecuado para su uso en entornos residenciales as como en aquellos conectados directamente a una red de distribuci n de baja tensi n que suministra corriente a edificios residenciales 1171 0000 42 08 Page 12 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Reparacion y mantenimiento 1 El producto solamente debe ser abierto por personal especializado con autorizaci n para ello Antes de manipular el producto o abrirlo es obligatorio desconectarlo de la tensi n de alimentaci n para evitar toda posibilidad de choque el ctrico El ajuste el cambio de partes el mantenimiento y la reparaci n deber n ser efectuadas solamente por electricistas autorizados por Rohde amp Schwarz Si se reponen partes con importancia para los aspectos de seguridad p ej el enchufe los transformadores o los fusibles solamente podr n ser sustituidos por partes originales Despu s de cada cambio de partes relevantes para la seguridad deber realizarse un control de seguridad control a primera vista control del cond
155. cal Cell ID which can take one from the values defined by 0 503 wPhysicalCellld ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SSignals ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SMimoResult Values provided by the Narrowband Scanner Cyclic Prefix 7 means normal 6 bNumberOfSymbolsPer ViCom LTE SMeasRe means extended Slot sult SSignals Frame structure FDD or TDD enFrameStructureType ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SSignals TD LTE UL DL configu Optional Up Downlink pbUpDownLinkConfig ViCom LTE SMeasRe ration configuration used for sult SSignals SReferen the TD LTE RSRP mea ceSignal surement Configuration 0 to 6 are supported for TDD TD LTE Special sub The configuration of the pwSpecialSub ViCom LTE SMeasRe frame configuration special subframe in TD frame1Config sult SSignals SReferen LTE is provided for sub frame 1 ceSignal Building a LTE TopN View Measurement Description ViCom Name Part of ViCom struc ture TD LTE Special sub frame configuration The configuration of the special subframe in TD LTE is provided for sub frame 6 pwSpecialSub frame6Config ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SSignals SReferen ceSignal Narrowband RSRP Gives the RSRP value based on the reference signal power measure ment of the 6 innermost resource blocks 1 MHz BW around center fre quency where PBCH is broadcast sCenterRS
156. cates a hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or Indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or Indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in minor or Indicates information considered important but not hazard related e g messages relating to property damage In the product documentation the word ATTENTION is used synonymously These signal words are in accordance with the standard definition for civil applications in the European Economic Area Definitions that deviate from the standard definition may also exist in other economic areas or military applications It is therefore essential to make sure that the signal words described here are always used only in connection with the related product documentation and the related product The use of signal words in connection with unrelated products or documentation can result in misinterpretation and in personal injury or material damage 1171 0000 42 08 Page 2 Basic Safety Instructions Operating states and operating positions The product may be operated only under the operating conditions and in the positions specified by the manufacturer without the product s ventilation being obstructed If the manufacturer s specifications are not observed this can result in electric shock fire and or serious personal injury or death Applicable local or national safety regulations and rules for the prevention
157. cheme The upper part of the figure shows a power sample of one time slot divided into 5 sub groups One interesting aspect shown is that it is not necessary always to use the same amount of data in the average process This can be seen in the first two groups where four resp five values contribute to the overall result Data shown in the sample is nowhere near the amount of data used in real world mea surements This is just another simplification It is also possible to create overlapping sub groups For example if you use 500 times 40 nsec blocks for a subgroup and you divide the time slot in 30 sub groups there will be an intersection of about 760 nsec between the groups An example for this is shown in the lower part of the figure ViCom GSM SMeasurementDetails cDetailSettings cDetailSettings ChannelPowerSpec wCountOfResultsPerGSMTimeSlot 30 cDetailSettings ChannelPowerSpec wRMSLengthIn40ns 500 ES The channel power measurement mode can be configured easily There are only two attributes that must be specified e Amount of time in which FFTs contribute to a power value this must be specified in multiples of 40 nsec Fl 2d Measuring of GSM Signals e Number of sub groups within a time slot In this way you can directly control the number of results since for each measured channel exactly this number of results will be created In the API the SChannelPowerSpec structure is used for that purpose and it is a part
158. cify the power value in integer val ues Each row covers a certain range of power values The range for a column is defined as follows For row index 0 all power values smaller than MinPowerValueInDBm are counted For row index i 1 to wMaxPowerInteger 1 the power value is in the range fMinPowerValueInDBm i fPowerResolutionInDB fMinPowerValuelnDBm i 1 fPowerResolutionInDB For the row index wMaxPowerInteger all power values that are greater than or equal to MinPowerValueInDBm wMaxPowerInteger fPowerResolutionInDB are considered The example below shows a potential result of this function As input four chan nels were defined the minimum level set to 120 dBm and resolution to 5 dB The maximum power integer was set to 4 Table 11 1 Sample Histogram Power dBm 935 2 MHz 935 4 MHz 935 6 MHz 935 8 MHz 0 p lt 115 8 6 0 3 1 115 p lt 110 2 6 1 3 2 110 p lt 105 l1 0 4 2 User Manual 1505 1329 42 26 182 R amp S ViCom R amp S ViCom RF Scan and RF Power Scan Technology Power dBm 935 2 MHz 935 4 MHz 935 6 MHz 935 8 MHz T o N A 3 105 p 100 4 p 100 0 0 1 0 Twelve sweeps per each frequency were used to generate the resulting histogram In these twelve sweeps a value between 115 dBm and 110 dBm was measured 6 times for frequency 935 4 MHz Similar the frequency 935 6 MHz was 4 times in the range 11
159. ction speed e dwMinimumDetectedBwInMhz to specify the minimum of blocked bandwidth Whenever a channel has been detected it is assumed that it will block at least this bandwidth The gaps in the spectrum must have at least this bandwidth for evaluat ing e dwFrontEndSelectionMask to specify which radio front end shall be used by the ACD Measurements 14 2 2 LTE Constraints The Smart ACD for LTE will search for bandwidths starting with the minimum band width as specified in the ACD s configuration It supports bandwidths of 1 4MHz 3MHz 5MHz 10MHz 15MHz and 20MHz To improve the detection rate it is highly recommended to set the minimum bandwidth correctly if known especially in bands which are used for several technologies The given minimal bandwidth only takes effect if the specified minimal LTE bandwidth for the band processed is less than this bandwidth value The specified minimal LTE bandwidth for the band processed will be used if it is larger than the setup value 14 3 Measurements 14 3 1 Measurement Results R amp S ViCom ACD provides a list of SChannel and SMeasResult structures as mea surement result The SChannel structure describes a detected channel and the state of location via the following fields e u64FrequencyInHz Channel frequency in Hz e enState State of the channel location PENDING SCANNING DETECTED LOST e penTechnology Technology type of the channel LTE UMTS CDMA EVDO e pwBa
160. cure the product in the vehicle to prevent injuries or other damage in the event of an accident 1171 0000 42 08 Page 6 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Waste disposal Environmental protection 1 Specially marked equipment has a battery or accumulator that must not be disposed of with unsorted municipal waste but must be collected separately It may only be disposed of at a suitable collection point or via a Rohde amp Schwarz customer service center 2 Waste electrical and electronic equipment must not be disposed of with unsorted municipal waste but must be collected separately Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG has developed a disposal concept and takes full responsibility for take back obligations and disposal obligations for manufacturers within the EU Contact your Rohde amp Schwarz customer service center for environmentally responsible disposal of the product 3 If products or their components are mechanically and or thermally processed in a manner that goes beyond their intended use hazardous substances heavy metal dust such as lead beryllium nickel may be released For this reason the product may only be disassembled by specially trained personnel Improper disassembly may be hazardous to your health National waste disposal regulations must be observed 4 If handling the product releases hazardous substances or fuels that must be disposed of in a special way e g coolants or engine oils that must be replen
161. d GSM NWS and set the initial values for Time Base Result Buffer and Measurement Rate by pressing the rela ted buttons This is not really necessary when the application is started for the first time or the value has not been changed but once a setting has been modified it is required to update the parameters in the R amp S TSM instrument R amp S ViCom R amp S ViCom GSM Technology PE e Put the list of frequencies into the list in the middle column You don t have to enter the auto demodulation settings and frequency index they are added automatically with default values A line in the edit control contains up to three elements each separated by a white space Channel center frequency in MHz decimals follow a period Auto Demodulation settings for System Information messages You must spec ify which shall be enabled by entering the numbers in one block For example if the SI Type 1 and 4 shall be decoded enter 14 Frequency index to be used later in the result This is not mandatory and will be filled automatically when you enter the frequencies D You can enter new lines by pressing Ctrl Enter when the focus is in the list control e Press the Set Frequencies button to transfer the settings to the R amp S TSM Instru ment e Optionally a more detailed setup of the measurement can be made Therefore press the Setup measurement details for start of measurement button below the frequency list See the secti
162. d again This is the fastest solution but can lead into troubles in rare cases when using on long drive tests and the same basestation indices are assigned to different basestations Demodulate ON_CMD 1 The message is not decoded automatically A special decoding command has to be sent during the measurement to start decoding which must then specify for which BTS the demodulation shall be done REPETITION 2 Decode a message as fast as possible and then again after N ms The delay specifies the time the demodulator waits after a complete demodulation of the SIB has been finished before a new one is started As a consequence the new result will be available after the delay plus the time needed to perform a new demodula tion For an example refer to the figure below A repetitive demodulation of SIB 7 in the case of WCDMA is demonstrated After the SIB7 has been demodulated completely the R amp S TSM Instrument does not attempt to do another demodulation until the delay time has elapsed Afterwards the next demodulation attempt is star ted The same applies to other technologies as well Using the Demodulators New demodulation Command SIB7 SIB7 SIB7 elay SIB7 SIB7 aer Total Time Delay Demodulation Time Figure 5 3 Automatic Repetitive Demodulation For each channel and message type combination that has to be decoded at some time during the measurement one of those three settings has to be specified
163. d as a flag indicating whether the value has been the result of some overflow if set to true or if not An overflow might arise in the A D converter for example The R amp S TSM Instrument can be configured to react in different ways in such a situation Refer to the reference for more details on overflow handling 11 3 Sample Application The R amp S ViCom API delivery provides for RF Scan Technology a dialog based sample application This helps to get a first feeling of how to use the R amp S ViCom Interface for RF Power Scan Technology since the applications user interface directly reflects the entities available in the API See the figure below for a sample Sample Application Sample Appiestion Tor RES VICO RF Scan Technology Load RF Poner scanner o Request Identifier o fo Load Save OK Count of Requests E Request RF Scanner Settings Cancel Time Between in ms 1000 Min Freq Max Fr Fie ree niinc fo inHz 80000000 ge z 22000000 Min Freq in Hz 800000000 ET Max Freq in Hz 2200000000 E Rate i Collection CHS 100 1 onsec 3000 Count s Ms E Set RF Sweep Rate Filter Tag Io Count First Center Freq Hz Channel Spacing Hz RF Sweep Buffer in ms 60000 ru on SetRF Sweep Buffer Min Att 1 Max Att 5 Receiver Index fo Set RF Sweep Attenuation Limits tector 2 Set Receiver Index inate I Repeat on ADC Overflow Max Power Integer 1000 5 Result Buffer 150 Count Of Insensitiv
164. d on that frequency If that information is not available the LTE scanner is able to automatically detect the number of symbols Receiver Frontend The R amp S TSMW contains two frontends that can be used to perform measurements on different channels in parallel These frontends are simply identified by their index which is either 1 or 2 Each frequency can be measured on a specific frontend which has to be specified during measurement setup see Frontend Allocation S Sync to P Sync Ratio Furthermore the power ratio between P SYNC and S SYNC can be specified either as range or as a set of up to six single ratios This information is used to provide fast synchronization i e while the LTE module is searching for signals it first uses the infor mation provided in the power ratios to detect valid LTE data in the air Even more important a correct information places here increases the measurement accuracy sig nificantly and reduced the probability of ghost code detection So it is recommended that once the power ratios are known for the set of configured frequencies that these values are in the measurement configuration In the case that a range is specified the L TE module has of course more possibilities to correlate to the detected signal and must therefore spend more time in the signal processing algorithms Providing up to six single ratios can boost the measurement performance and accuracy as described Valid values for these ratios a
165. d options and to install new options if required When you are satisfied that the IEEE1394 connection is working disconnect the OptionKeyInstaller from the R amp S TSMx Family instrument and close the utility 18 1 6 R amp S TSMx Family Firmware Upgrade For some special functions a new firmware must be installed on the R amp S TSMx Family instrument A special tool called TsmxFirmwareInstall exe can be used location C NRuSNViCom version NtoolsNTSMxNMFirmwareInstaller If you do a firmware installation make sure to follow ALL listed steps in this manual CAREFULLY If you miss any single detail this might cause the firmware installation to fail and leave an unusable device up to you After you started the tool a window appears as shown in the following figure R amp S TSMx Family Option Handling FT TSMx Firmware Installation TSMx Firmware Installation 1 Choose a Firmware to be installed 2 Close all other applications that can use the TSMx 3 Be sure only one TSMx is connected to your PC 4 Switch OFF your TSMx 5 Switch ON your TSMx D Wait half a minute The TSMx will appear in Windows Device Manager 7 Verify again that the state of the whole upper TSMx LED line is stable for 5 seconds 8 Clickthe appearing Install button You must NOT interrupt the Installation after having clicked the Install button 9 After update close this Installer and manually switch OFF your TSMx 10 When switching it on
166. data is coming from the R amp S TSMx and stored in the data cache The measurement data is processed to derive a result for a request then Both requests and sweep measurement data have a timestamp assigned to them in the figure Timestamps are marked as t where a measurement at t occurred at a later time than one done att Measuring with the RF Scan Figure 11 1 Request processing scheme over time The situation depicted in the previous figure is handled like explained in following When the processing of the first request is started a single sweep is available in the R amp S TSM Instrument cache The measurement data is used directly as result This is always the case for the first request If there is any data in the cache all the data is used to satisfy the need of the first request If there is no such data the processing of the request is delayed until data arrives or a new request is issued The second request is issued after two sweeps have been stored in the result cache These two measurements are combined into a result which is made available to the caller For some reason no measurement data arrives after the third request has been issued and no data can be found in the cache Since no data arrives in the internal result cache until the fourth request is activated by the timer no result is created for the third request The measurement at t7 is used as an input for the final request If a request can
167. date and to offer our customers the highest possible degree of safety Our products and the auxiliary equipment they require are designed built and tested in accordance with the safety standards that apply in each case Compliance with these standards is continuously monitored by our quality assurance system The product described here has been designed built and tested in accordance with the EC Certificate of Conformity and has left the manufacturer s plant in a condition fully complying with safety standards To maintain this condition and to ensure safe operation you must observe all instructions and warnings provided in this manual If you have any questions regarding these safety instructions the Rohde amp Schwarz group of companies will be happy to answer them Furthermore it is your responsibility to use the product in an appropriate manner This product is designed for use solely in industrial and laboratory environments or if expressly permitted also in the field and must not be used in any way that may cause personal injury or property damage You are responsible if the product is used for any purpose other than its designated purpose or in disregard of the manufacturer s instructions The manufacturer shall assume no responsibility for such use of the product The product is used for its designated purpose if it is used in accordance with its product documentation and within its performance limits see data sheet documentation the fol
168. dd 1 121000 0 121000 0 0 500 Edit 2 122000 0 122000 0 0 100 Delete 3 123000 0 123000 0 0 050 4 124000 0 124000 0 0 010 5 125000 0 125000 0 0 001 Cancel meom A right mouse button click on a list opens a menu to edit or delete existing entries or to add a new line The measured spectrum is displayed in a simple graph with auto scaling There is no listing of individual spectral levels If the Auto update box is checked the results will be collected and displayed automatically else a new result will be shown when the Get Result button is clicked R amp S ViCom R amp S ViCom RF Scan and RF Power Scan Technology A _ lt ae Result display Ifthe marker is enabled there is no spectrum data to display Instead the frequency and the maximum power level of the marker is shown In this case the individual results are collected in the log file which can be viewed by clicking the View button Marker result Frequency MHz Level dBm Meas rates Recent 4 999 Hz Subtotal 4 999 Hz Total 4 999 Hz Result viewer Write exe Browse View 11 5 RF Power Scan Technology Specific Trouble Shoot ing This section lists some of the most common pitfalls when using the RF Power Scan Technology try to get results from RF Power Scan but no matter how many lines request only get a small set of results What is wro
169. dered The R amp S ViCom Basic interface function SelectReceiver allows an application to select an R amp S TSM Instruments scanner to communicate with For example bool success pViComIf GetBasicInterface SelectReceiver m ViComError 2 would select the third scanner from the computer that is the instance 3 of the R amp S TSM Instruments connected R amp S TSMx Family receivers in the previous figure R amp S TSMW and R amp S TSME Receivers The following figure shows connection of more than one R amp S TSMW or R amp S TSME to the control computer These instruments support Gigabit LAN connection Gigabit LAN Switch R amp S TSMW R amp S TSMW R amp S TSME R amp S TSME receiver receiver Figure 4 2 Two R amp S TSMW or R amp S TSME receivers connected to one control PC 0 4 4 4 4 1 Getting Started with R amp S TSME All instruments included in such connection must have different IP addresses Getting Started with R amp S TSME The chapter describes the first steps to do with the R amp S TSME and R amp S ViCom 15 For more detailed information on the various sections and the referenced tools see the R amp S TSME User Manual Connectivity The R amp S TSME receiver and the host computer are connected via 802 3 Gigabit Ethernet network Make sure the following requirements on your network configuration are met Host Computer Connectivity Gigabit network interface card with 9k Jumbo Frame
170. ds Commands can be entered as ASCII characters or hex codes depending on the mes sage format The interface does not check the validity of the commands you enter Error messages resulting from incorrect or unsupported commands will be displayed in the message window In R amp S ViCom GPS sample application the message window contains several com mands and their results Many such commands are available and some examples are explained in the following tables GPZDA Date amp Time Format GPZDA hhmmss ss dd mm yyyy xx yy CC GPZDA 201530 00 04 07 2002 00 00 60 hhmmss HrMinSec UTC dd mm yyy Day Month Year XX local zone hours 13 13 yy local Zone minutes 0 59 CC the checksum data always begins with Measurements GPGSV Satellites in View Format GPGSV 2 1 08 01 40 083 46 02 17 308 41 12 07 344 39 14 22 228 45 7 2 Number of sentences for full data 1 sentence 1 of 2 08 Number of satellites in view 01 Satellite PRN number 40 Elevation degrees 083 Azimuth degrees 46 SNR higher is better As above For upto 4 satellites per sequence 75 the checksum data always begins with GPGLL Geographic position Latitude and Longitude Format GPGLL 4916 45 N 12311 12 W 225444 A 1D 4916 46 N Latitude 49 deg 16 45 min North 12311 12 W Longitude 123 deg 11 12 min West 225444 Fix taken at 22 54 44 UTC
171. e eittMode elttMode elttMode eAttMode e ttMode eittMode eAttMode edttMode edttMode ei ttMode e ttMode elttMode elttMode eAdttMode eittMode eAttMode eittMode eittMode edttMode e ttMode 000000000 2000000000000000000000 Figure 13 10 Screenshot of measurement result Each result contains a number of sweeps where the frequencies are given in ascend ing order The sweeps are not necessarily delivered completely parts of sweeps maybe deliv ered with the next result as shown in the previous figure 14 14 1 14 1 1 14 1 2 General Operation R amp S ViCom Automatic Channel Detection e General TL DEE 219 e eene ON EE 221 Measurements e menie dana 222 General Operation The R amp S ViCom Automatic Channel Detection R amp S ViCom ACD allows to detect and locate all channels in use on specified frequency bands for several scanner technolo gies The frequency bands are typically known from the spectrum allocation plan provi ded by the local regulator The main use case for the Automatic Channel Detection further in the text ACD is to enable the user to start measuring anywhere without any knowledge of the currently used channels within the known bands Typically the user will initiate a measurement with the ACD and for the best measurement rates will use detected channels as a starting point for scanner measurements Two different modes of operation are
172. e here is that it is possible to define different demodulation load on a frontend for differ ent channels whereas the other interfaces only offer the possibility to define a global demodulation load This minimum load limit that is spent on demodulation is combined with the general load indicator A detailed description how to use the BCH demodulation capabilities is given in Chapter 5 4 Using the Demodulators on page 47 9 3 GUI Sample Application The R amp S ViCom installer comes with a GUI sample application to demonstrate how to make LTE measurements through the R amp S ViCom Interface The complete source code of the sample application is in the C RuS ViCom_ lt version gt src SampleApplications SampleForViComLTE of the ViCom installation directory It is possible to build both the debug and release sample applications by opening the SampleForViComLte vcproj file with Visual C 2008 and then performing a batch build The binaries will be generated inside the bin directory with the name SampleForViComLTE exe for the release build and SampleForViComLTEDebug exe for the debug one The release binary also comes directly with the ViCom installation and is used as the reference of discussion in this document 9 3 1 Using the Sample Application The interface of the sample application looks like in following figure GUI Sample Application Load LTE Scanner Channel Frequency amp Mode Settings OK C
173. e DWORD datatype The very basic code structure in the main procedure is similar for all R amp S ViCom appli cation as well In any case you need a CViComError object that you can pass in any call to a R amp S ViCom method as first input parameter The next step normally is to load the R amp S TSM Instrument and get a pointer to the interface object which is used to con trol the device Further information can be found in the chapters that cover the special technologies and in the Start Programming Installation Issues Once you finished your application and you want to deploy it to your customers the application result must be packaged into some installation format The R amp S ViCom does not require any special operating system settings to be made the content of the bin directory can directly be used for deployment Make sure that you don t forget to remove the debug version of your program from the bin folder before shipping the content of the bin folder Nevertheless some additional steps must be made to properly setup a customer s computer to run R amp S ViCom applications on it e The FireWire driver must be installed on the target machine to connect to a R amp S TSMx Family lt must be performed before the R amp S ViCom application is used e The ViCom redistributable package ViComRedistSetup exe shall be used to copy the R amp S ViCom libraries dlls in your customer application directory where your exe program is pl
174. e Sweeps after OV Mn Power Value dam E Set RF Sweep ADC Overflow Action Set Result Buffer j 0 1 Power Resolution dB PR KI SS ih Start Measurement Power With Overflow fo Set RF Sweep Section Relation Use Request for Marker Get Result Counters Request Specific Derived Result r Store Mode Result Count To Read 5 Filter Tag fo Throw Results Away Get Results Frequency Spacing In Hz mo C Store Results Linear Power Fr Stop Scaling Result Viewer Release RF Power Scanner Terminate RF Power Scanner i Set Channel Filter View Write exe Figure 11 8 ViCom RF Scan technology sample application As the figure shows the dialog is divided in three major columns The left most column manages the different logical receivers Each receiver stands for one of the connected R amp S TSM Instruments Multiple logical receivers can be connec ted to one physical R amp S TSM Instrument You can configure up to 32 logical receivers The column in the middle contains controls for managing the actual result configura tion Here you can specify how a concrete measurement shall be made For one receiver there can be up to 32 different request configurations The settings here have to fulfill the constraints made in the right column The right most column controls general settings of the receiver and the application Once you have set up a configuration you can save and restore it h
175. e a connection type as described in chapter Connection Type Selection 2 The server discovery starts and the following dialog appears Task Configuration ROHDERSCHWARZ D H Choose server Looking for servers Please wait Figure 17 3 Active Server Discovery 3 Ifa server is found the server will be connected and the name of the server is dis played ROHDESSCHWARZ Choose server 9 40 Se 1 TSMA 900001 Figure 17 4 Successful Server Discovery D In order to stop the server discovery the application has to be closed If no server was found it is possible to start a new scan by selecting Rescan in the menu inflator in the top right corner 17 4 Task Configuration After choosing the server by tapping on it five example tasks will appear There are four scan tasks and one throughput task available For further introductions on every task see the following chapters GSM RSSI scan provides a GSM scan by selecting a band and radio channels WCDMA scan provides an UMTS scan by selecting a frequency band and the UARFCN S LTE scan provides an LTE scan by selecting the frequency band and the EARFCN 17 4 1 Task Configuration Throughput test provides a throughput test for the connection using configurable buffer size S RF Power Scan provides a spectrum analysis by selecting the frequency range GSM RSS DEE 236 WCDMA E 237 ITESM EE 239 MPO 4p c a EA A 240 RF Power SCAM E 241 G
176. e and reference signals for only 1 Tx on SISO SIMO The new algorithm factors in the dependence between the two spatial layers in MIMO and Transmit Diversity MIMO has a result for each spatial layer while Transmit Diversity has one result which effectively has a gain in SINR rela tive to a SISO channel For example if the two spatial layers are highly dependent high condition number the MIMO throughput estimate will be similar to an equivalent SISO channel for one spatial layer and will be O bps on the second spatial layer The Transmit Diversity result for two highly dependent spatial layers will not benefit from any SINR gain from the spatial layers resulting again in an estimate similar to an equivalent SISO channel User Manual 1505 1329 42 26 131 GUI Sample Application 9 1 7 Error Handling The LTE R amp S ViCom interface is the first that supports C exceptions natively For every method in the interface and also in the basic interface taking a CViComError reference to be filled with potential error messages there is a counterpart method that will throw a CViComError object in case that a problem arises All the remaining behavior is consistent between both methods so you can choose which version fits your needs best 9 2 LTE BCH Demodulation In the same way as offered by the other R amp S ViCom interfaces it is possible to per form BCH demodulation in the LTE R amp S ViCom interface as well The main differenc
177. e configured to pro vide up to 6 sub band RS CINR values pNarrowbandRsCinrVal ues bRsCinrMeasResultCon fig ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SSignals SReferen ceSignal NB RS CINR TX3 dB Narrowband RS CINR measurements taken for antenna port 3 1MHz BW around center fre quency where PBCH is broadcast The scanner can be configured to pro vide up to 6 sub band RS CINR values pNarrowbandRsCinrVal ues bRsCinrMeasResultCon fig ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SSignals SReferen ceSignal R amp S ViCom R amp S ViCom LTE Technology Measurement Description ViCom Name Part of ViCom struc ture Number of eNodeB antenna ports the 1MHz BW around center frequency where PBCH is broadcast Detect the number of ref erence signals transmit ted by the eNodeB up to 2 reference signals bAntennaMaskUsed ForRSRP NB sub band RS CINR Narrowband sub band pNarrowbandRsCinrVal ViCom LTE SMeasRe TX0 dB RS CINR measurements ues sult SSignals SReferen 2 3 or 6 values are taken for antenna port 0 bRsCinrMeasResultCon ceSignal provided in 2 3 or 6 sub bands of fig the 1MHz BW around center frequency where PBCH is broadcast NB sub band RS CINR Narrowband sub band pNarrowbandRsCinrVal ViCom LTE SMeasRe TX1 dB RS CINR measurements ues sult SSignals SReferen 2 3 or 6 values are oe scd m 1 bRsCinrMeasResultCon ceSignal provided in
178. e considera importante pero no en relaci n con situaciones de peligro p ej avisos sobre posibles da os materiales En la documentaci n del producto se emplea de forma sin nima el t rmino CUIDADO A ATENCI N Indica una situaci n de peligro que si no se evita puede causar Las palabras de se al corresponden a la definici n habitual para aplicaciones civiles en el rea econ mica europea Pueden existir definiciones diferentes a esta definici n en otras reas econ micas o en aplicaciones militares Por eso se deber tener en cuenta que las palabras de se al aqu descritas sean utilizadas siempre solamente en combinaci n con la correspondiente documentaci n del producto y solamente en combinaci n con el producto correspondiente La utilizaci n de las palabras de se al en combinaci n con productos o documentaciones que no les correspondan puede llevar a interpretaciones equivocadas y tener por consecuencia da os en personas u objetos Estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento El producto solamente debe ser utilizado seg n lo indicado por el fabricante respecto a los estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento sin que se obstruya la ventilaci n Si no se siguen las indicaciones del fabricante pueden producirse choques el ctricos incendios y o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte En todos los trabajos deber n ser tenidas en cuenta las normas nacionales y locales de seguridad del trabajo y d
179. e important aspect is that the configuration can be applied to a different scope of channels It s possible to modify the details for a single channel for all channels or to modify the spectrum and channel power measurement modes without changing other User Manual 1505 1329 42 26 93 GSM Measurements Demo Application settings The behaviour can be defined in the lower part using the different radio but tons 5 Setup of measurement details m Spectrum Measurements details valid For all channels Channel power Measurements details valid for all channels Count of power values per 200kHz channel 1 100 50 RMS length in 40ns 900 Collection time in 100 us 50 Count of results per GSM time slot 16 Detector mode in the frequency domain valid 1 1 Detector mode in the time domain valid 0 1 0 m Selection deselection of measurements For defined frequency indexes For UL and DL GSM channels eneral remark all frequency indexes which are not specified in the Following individual setup will automatically get their previous setup he initial default is SCH power measurement only C No channel specific selection just redefine the params for spectrum and channel power measurements The Following setup of measurements is valid For all measured frequencies The following setup For measurements is only valid for the given frequency index D Setup of measurements If a measurement is not ch
180. e interface is created and used with the following steps for example for the R amp S TSMW e Create a pointer to an instance of the interface by using the CViComLoader TSMW function connect and identifying the R amp S TSMW by his IP address Prepare the sweep settings by filling the structure SSettings e Transfer the settings to the power scan module with the interface function SetSettings e Start the measurement with the interface function StartMeasurement e Check the availability of measurement results with the interface function GetResultCounters e Retrieve the measurement results with the interface function GetResult The structure SResult holds all measured data e Stop the measurement with the interface function StopMeasurement e Release the interface using the CViComLoader TSMW function Disconnect There are additional interface functions like GetSettings to retrieve the current sweep settings from the interface or SetResultBufferDepth to define the number of results stored in the interface User Manual 1505 1329 42 26 192 R amp S ViCom R amp S ViCom RF Scan and RF Power Scan Technology 11 4 3 Sample Application The sample application is a simple program to demonstrate the capabilities of the RF Power Scan and to give examples for the interface integration The sample application itself is only a launcher of interface instances By clicking Cre ate new interface a new instance of the interface is created which
181. e prevenci n de accidentes 1171 0000 42 08 Page 9 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Si no se convino de otra manera es para los productos Rohde amp Schwarz valido lo que sigue como posici n de funcionamiento se define por principio la posici n con el suelo de la caja para abajo modo de protecci n IP 2X uso solamente en estancias interiores utilizaci n hasta 2000 m sobre el nivel del mar transporte hasta 4500 m sobre el nivel del mar Se aplicar una tolerancia de 10 sobre el voltaje nominal y de 5 sobre la frecuencia nominal Categor a de sobrecarga el ctrica 2 indice de suciedad 2 No sit e el producto encima de superficies veh culos estantes o mesas que por sus caracter sticas de peso o de estabilidad no sean aptos para l Siga siempre las instrucciones de instalaci n del fabricante cuando instale y asegure el producto en objetos o estructuras p ej paredes y estantes Si se realiza la instalaci n de modo distinto al indicado en la documentaci n del producto se pueden causar lesiones o en determinadas circunstancias incluso la muerte No ponga el producto sobre aparatos que generen calor p ej radiadores o calefactores La temperatura ambiente no debe superar la temperatura m xima especificada en la documentaci n del producto o en la hoja de datos En caso de sobrecalentamiento del producto pueden producirse choques el ctricos incendios y o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte
182. e scrambling code of the Node B that shall be demodulated The first value is the scrambling code 0 to 511 the second the iteration counter WCDMA BCH Demodulation The fourth column holds the PDU to decode which must be the same as one of the PDUs defined in the centered list box with demodulation type 1 ON_CMD The demodulation mode is entered in the fifth column A good value is 3 for a NodeB specific demodulation although any of the commands defined in the section Measurement Details can be put here Ifa time out shall be specified this can be done in the last column In the example below the time out is 2 seconds 20 100 ms 2000 ms 2 s During Measurement Channel SC SCID PDU Mode t 100ms new line Ctrl Enter 2 429 5 17 3 20 Figure 6 7 Specific Demodulation Request Configuration Click the Issue Request button to send the request to the demodulator e Click on Get 100 Results and check the result file as described above for the demodulated string that has been requested Be sure to close a previously started instance of your file viewer default write exe if the editor does not support automatic file updates write exe does NOT support that feature When you finished working with the demo application don t forget to stop the measure ment and release the resources of the R amp S TSM Instruments If you run another application that also accesses the same physical R amp S TSM Instru me
183. e that the nominal voltage setting on the product matches the nominal voltage of the mains supply network If a different voltage is to be set the power fuse of the product may have to be changed accordingly 2 Inthe case of products of safety class with movable power cord and connector operation is permitted only on sockets with a protective conductor contact and protective conductor 3 Intentionally breaking the protective conductor either in the feed line or in the product itself is not permitted Doing so can result in the danger of an electric shock from the product If extension cords or connector strips are implemented they must be checked on a regular basis to ensure that they are safe to use 4 If there is no power switch for disconnecting the product from the mains or if the power switch is not suitable for this purpose use the plug of the connecting cable to disconnect the product from the mains In such cases always ensure that the power plug is easily reachable and accessible at all times For example if the power plug is the disconnecting device the length of the connecting cable must not exceed 3 m Functional or electronic switches are not suitable for providing disconnection from the AC supply network If products without power switches are integrated into racks or systems the disconnecting device must be provided at the system level 5 Never use the product if the power cable is damaged Check the power cables on a regu
184. e with Doppler frequency estimates which are a result from the way the values are calculated internally Power Delay Profiles Based on that CIR Peaks which are not necessarily equally distributed on a time axis the power delay profile is derived The power delay profile consists of a list of power values which are actually sampled from the CIR Peak value resp some interpolated data between those peaks The sampling rate SCir SPowerDelayProfile fSamplingTimeInSec is constant for all the val ues but it can happen that invalid power values are a part of the result when there is no meaningful interpolation result available when peaks are missing for example One result may be a so called Power Delay Profile Power values are measured at a constant sampling rate which is returned in The single power value results measured at that rate are specified in the SCir SPowerDelayProfile SPowerDelayProfileValues psValuesInDBm100 array The original peaks are distributed in a much higher resolution than the power delay profile values In the figure below the connection between the CIR Peaks and the sam pled power delay profile values is depicted Please note however that this is a sche matic figure which shall clarify the idea behind the two different result types 6 Peak Value p t Power Delay Profile Interpolation Result Ab Sampling Rate Figure 9 4 CIR Peak and Power Delay Profile Measuring of LTE Signals 9 1
185. each channel when starting measurement Each line configures the parameters for one PDU demodulation mode and consists of four numbers The first one specifies the channel to config ure the demodulation parameters on it must be one of the channel number speci fied in the Frequency Channel Settings the first multi line text box The second one specifies which PDU to demodulate for example 10 for MIB 13 for SIB 3 and so on The third one specifies the demodulation mode as described in Table 7 LTE Demodulation Modes The last one specifies the time if the demodulation mode is REPETITION It should be zero for all other cases Press Ctrl Enter to create a new line in the text box and configure another demodulation request During Measurement Channel PDU Mode Repetition ms Bts ID This text box specifies the demodulation requests to be sent during the measurement Each line specifies one request and consists of five numbers The first four parameters are the same as described in the previous paragraph Start Measurement The fifth one specifies the BTS It shall be set to zero by default Press Ctrl Enter to create a new line in the text box and configure another demodulation request GUI Sample Application If all the demodulation requests are properly configured press the Issue Request but ton to issue these demodulation requests while measurement is running i e after the Start Measurement button is pressed Sav
186. easure ment result in the ViCom GSM SSpectrumResult structure The result contains a set of sub spectrums Such a sub spectrum is the result of the combined FFTs of all measured channels as described above Within the byte buffer the data is organized primarily in sub spectrums In each sub spectrum the power values from each measured frequency are given in an ascending order Data from one frequency is given in one block This is depicted in the figure below The term Af refers to the fraction of one channel that is determined by the num ber of power values per channel Sub Spectrum Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Power Power Power Power Power Power Power Power Power 42 17 31 14 53 48 27 23 35 AA PA AAA PERA m m A m mu Figure 7 3 Structure of Result Buffer A sample shown in the following figure describes that structure and the power value conversion In that picture the buffer is shown in the upper part of the figure Three sub spectrums were created in the sample for three frequencies this implies there is only one power value per frequency In the byte buffer of the result structure the list of spectrum power values is stored Every power value result is specified in a 0 5 dB unit relative to on a minimum value which is given in the field SSpectrumResult sMinPowerInDBm100 To getthe real power values from the bytes in the buffer the raw data has to be converted according to th
187. ecked then it will be stopped if already running I SCH power DL cm Dummy burst removal DL Dummy burst power DL TSC power UL DL Channel power UL DL Iw Spectrum UL DL Failed trials of SCH power measurement DL Individual setup for a list of Frequency indexes Define setup before start of measurement Cancel Figure 7 12 Measurement details dialog Even a subset of the measurement frequencies can be configured Click the Press button for individual setup button that appears if the radio button Individual setup for a list of frequencies is active In the upcoming dialog the active measurement tasks can easily be defined per each configured frequency The spectrum and channel power measurement settings cannot be defined on a per channel basis as the dialog illustrates Both configurations are valid for all channels that perform that measurement tasks Each modification always concerns all active measurements GSM Measurements Demo Application Edit List of Measurement Specs FregIdx 0 SCH PWR DB REMOVAL CHANNEL PWR SPECTRUM Add entry Delete entry Edit selected entry Frequency Index 1 Setup of measurements If a measurement is not checked then it will be stopped if already running Iw SCH power DL Dummy burst removal DL Iw Spectrum UL DL Dummy burst power DL Failed trials of SCH power measurement DL TSC po
188. ection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort pWidebandsub bandRSRPinDBm100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result WB sub band RSRP TX4 RX1 dBm RSRP per RB mea sured from R3 on Fron tend RF2 over the com plete system bandwidth pWidebandsub bandRSRPinDBm100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result RS CINR TX0 RX0 dB RS CINR over the com plete system bandwidth measured from refer ence signal RO on fron tend RF1 sAverageRsCin rinDB100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result RS CINR TX1 RX0 dB RS CINR over the com plete system bandwidth measured from refer ence signal R1 on fron tend RF1 sAverageRsCin rinDB100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result RS CINR TX2 RX0 dB RS CINR over the com plete system bandwidth measured from refer ence signal R2 on fron tend RF1 sAverageRsCin rinDB100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result E User Manual 1505 1329 42 26 153 R amp S ViCom R amp S ViCom LTE Technology Measurement Description ViCom N
189. ed these values come from the sub band measurements and are therefore not available for weak cells WB RSRP TXO RXO dBm WB RSRQ TXO RXO dB WB RSRP TX1 RXO dBm WB RSRQ TX1 RXO dB WB RSRP TXO RX1 dBm WB RSRQ TXO RX1 dB WB RSRP TX1 RX1 dBm WB RSRQ TX1 RX1 dB WB RSRP TX2 RXO dBm WB RSRQ TX2 RXO dB WB RSRP TX3 RXO dBm WB RSRQ TX3 RXO dB WB RSRP TX2 RX1 dBm WB RSRQ TX2 RX1 dB WB RSRP TX3 RX1 dBm WB RSRQ TX3 RX1 dB If sub band measurement have been activated in addition RSRP is available as sub band values e g one value per resource block in pWidebandsub bandRSRPinDBm100 WB RSRP TXO RXO dBm e g per resource block WB RSRP TX1 RXO dBm e g per resource block WB RSRP TX0 RX1 dBm e g per resource block WB RSRP TX1 RX1 dBm e g per resource block Measuring of LTE Signals e WB RSRP TX2 RXO dBm e g per resource block e WB RSRP TX3 RXO dBm e g per resource block e WB RSRP TX2 RX1 dBm e g per resource block e WB RSRP TX3 RX1 dBm e g per resource block In combination with the available RS CINR measurements per resource block and the spectrum measurement that is delivered by the LTE WB RSSI scanner module this allows most detailed interference hunting RS CINR RS CINR values are provided as one value over the complete system bandwidth in sAverageRsCinrInDB100 If High dynamic WB measurement have been activated
190. ed devices Connecting to the R amp S TSMW R amp S TSME The handling is somewhat different when using the R amp S TSMW R amp S TSME The aforementioned loader object has to be created with an additional template parameter This parameter is also used in the R amp S TSMx Family sample but there is an appropri ate default to keep existing code working Writing a line as shown below will create a R amp S ViCom loader object that can be used to connect interface with a specific R amp S TSMW R amp S TSME CViComLoader CViComLteInterface CViComLoader TSMW gt myTsmwViComLoader To actually start communication between the PC and the R amp S TSMW R amp S TSME use the Connect function made available in the new R amp S ViCom loader object bool bLoaded myTsmwViComLoader Connect 192 168 0 2 0 The IP address parameter for R amp S TSMW is deprecated and will not be necessary in a future ViCom versions 5 2 2 3 Accessing the R amp S ViCom Interface If at least one device has been loaded successfully then Get Interface can be called to get a pointer to the function interface for example CViComWcdmaInterface myIF myViComLoader GetInterface myViComError The chosen R amp S ViCom interface can now be used via its pointer Interface functions that are specific to the instantiated interface are accessed directly for example myViComIF gt SetFrequencyTable myViComError mySettings gt ChannelSetting
191. ed on the full bandwidth and can be applied to 4x2 and 2x2 MIMO systems The output is based on the channel H matrix with com plex values mean amplitude and phase From the channel matrix singular value decomposition is calculated The result the singular value is used to obtain the condi tion number which qualifies whether the channel is ill conditioned no MIMO applica ble or well conditioned MIMO usable As a requirement for MIMO one needs to activate the narrow and wideband RS CINR measurements Intentionally the MIMO measurements are only to be done for strong cells which means there are switches to restrict the calculations bMaxCountOfeNodeBs Maximum number of eNodeBs per channel index for which wideband RS CINR RSRP RSRQ measurements shall be performed Typical range 3 to 5 sMinCenterRsrpInDBm100 The minimum required sub band RSRP value in 0 01 dB obtained from the narrow band LTE scanner for the eNodeB to enable the measurements Typical range 110 dBm to 130 dBm wMaxRsrpDiffToBestCellInDB100 Measuring of LTE Signals The maximum difference distance allowed in sub band RSRP in 0 01 dB obtained from the narrowband LTE scanner from the best received eNodeB to enable the mea surements Typical 10dB sMinRsCinrInDB100 The minimum required RS CINR value in 0 01 dB obtained from the narrowband LTE scanner for the eNodeB to enable the measurements Typical range 1dB or lowe
192. ed only during the measurement Compared to the com mands mentioned in the previous section these will have an effect immediately since they don t depend on the availability of a signaling There is no Undo function for this so use the commands carefully if you work on a highly efficient R amp S TSM Instruments project Setting up a Custom Project This section describes how to set up your own project that enables you to work with the R amp S ViCom API and that helps you to create a distributable application Perform the tasks described below step by step and you should end up with a ready to start application frame In the subsequent chapters small demo applications are shown as code pieces These can simply be put into the main C file Pypolect SUCIA AA nu b AAA 51 e Create the Project Environment ccoo 51 e PiolecL e EE 51 e Working with the OCode licencia ridad nd dada ERES 53 E CET ccn ete ttt Petr ee ped ec p cte ig ertet 54 e Updating the Projects siria a 54 Setting up a Custom Project 5 5 1 Project Structure We recommend a standard project structure for your own developments that consists of three folders One folder holds the source data it is called src one the header file provided by the API in the inc folder and the last folder holds the application runtime environment bin The content of the latter folder can be used as a base for your own program installer once you fini
193. eeeeeeeeeeeee eene 202 Measurement Results enses siss sinceris snnt irrs rane Prr a eau e Rana Rs 202 R amp S ViCom CW Technology vicio 206 Channel Power Measurements seeeesesseeeeeee nan c nr nana rra cnn rn nenes 206 Measurement Modes eet ern e a 207 Single Channel Measurement ccoo ena 208 Multi Channel Measurement coin a A 209 Measurement Scheduling cecinere nennen annie 209 Ereegnes ee E 210 13 1 2 2 13 1 3 13 2 14 14 1 14 1 1 14 1 2 14 1 3 14 1 4 14 1 5 14 2 14 2 1 14 2 2 14 3 14 3 1 15 15 1 15 2 15 2 1 15 22 15 2 3 15 2 4 15 2 5 15 2 6 16 16 1 16 1 1 16 1 1 1 16 1 1 2 16 1 2 16 1 3 17 Time and Distance Triggering eese eene ener 210 Channel Power Aggregation trae rae tuto a nace ga 214 Sample Application erecti ttn rri aree Enna an ERR Rak RR IER DB IR RR RN RR RA A nEUR 215 R amp S ViCom Automatic Channel Detection 219 General OperatlOn renuit rre pietra iE ER ERR NR ea Kiori SEAME asrasa Naini aaa 219 FOG lun Un Io n RM 219 Simple ACD 219 iurc 220 Performance Heouiremente enne 220 Device OU OMS io e 220 e AAA 221 General Settings canon rr 221 el Ti CEET 222 L CERIICILII I 222 Measurement Hesuhte eene nennen nnne n
194. effective visualization to the user the raw spectrum measurement results are pro cessed to aggregate measurement values both in time and in frequency 11 6 4 1 Aggregation in time In time as explained above the reporting rate can be set lower than the measurement rate Several methods are available to aggregate several measured values into one reported value Those are described in the R amp S ViCom documentation The calculation is done by the Time Detector Following settings are recommended for drive test ViCom RFPOWERSCAN STimeDetector etTimeDetectorType RFPOWERSCANTSMW TIMEDET TYPE RMS 1 the set ting means that the reported value will be calculated by taking the quadratic mean root mean square over the measured values etTimeDetectorIntervalType RFPOWERSCANTSMW TIMEDET INTERVAL TIMERANGE 1 the setting means that all measurements values within the timesrange given in dwTimeParameterInMs Will be used to calcucate the reported value from the measured values dwTimeParameterInMs dwMaxAgeOfBufferedMeasInMs 200 the setting means use all measured values from the buffer As we have already calculated the buffer size above we can use the same value 11 6 4 2 Aggregation in Frequency With our recommended settings the measurements are performed with a frequency resolution of AF 22 46 kHz Even a rather narrow sweep of 20 MHz only will therefore lead to 890 measuremen
195. el 66 scheduling scheduling sib Pos repi6 1 H D I sibSb Type sysInfoType2 4 scheduling scheduling sib Pos rep8 0 H sibSb Type sysInfoType3 2 scheduling scheduling sib Pos rep32 2 D I H sibSb Type sysInfoType NULL scheduling scheduling sib Pos rep8 0 sibSb Type sysInfoTypei8 3 scheduling H scheduling 1 sib Pos repi6 1 H H A sibSb Type sysInfoType3B1 4 scheduling scheduling sib Pos rep64 31 H 3 MeasResult dwChannelIndex 3 iu Figure 6 6 Sample Result of BCH Demodulation 6 3 2 1 Issuing a Request during Measurement In the example described above the SIB 1 of the third channel is not included in the result file To demodulate that PDU it is now necessary to request that data explicitly Follow those steps to accomplish this task It is assumed that the configuration is used for the example above If you used different settings please adapt these accordingly Open the result viewer and search for the MIB of channel 2 If the is no MIB in the result file try to get another 100 results into the file until there is one in the file Using the Scrambling code of that cell the data for a specific demodulation request can be put together Enter the request details in the right most list box Six columns have to be speci fied which have the following meanings The first column defines the channel The second and third columns define th
196. em bandwidth sNoiseClippedRSR QinDB100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result WB RSRQ noise clip ped TX2 RX1 dBm Noise clipped RSRQ value based on the wide band reference signal power measurement in 0 01 dB For this value the measured RS CINR was taken into account to correct the RSRQ result regarding noise and interference Mea sured from R2 on Fron tend RF2 over the com plete system bandwidth sNoiseClippedRSR QinDB100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result WB RSRQ noise clip ped TX3 RX1 dBm Noise clipped RSRQ value based on the wide band reference signal power measurement in 0 01 dB For this value the measured RS CINR was taken into account to correct the RSRQ result regarding noise and interference Mea sured from R3 on Fron tend RF2 over the com plete system bandwidth sNoiseClippedRSR QinDB100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result WB sub band RSRP TX0 RX0 dBm WB sub band RSRP TX1 RX0 dBm RSRP per RB mea sured from RO on Fron tend RF1 over the com plete system bandwidth RSRP per RB mea sured from R1 on Fron tend RF1 over the com plete system bandwidth pWidebandsub bandRSRPinDBm100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAnte
197. ement The TSMW is a receiver with low phase noise contribution Therefore a high transmitter phase noise is indicated if the amplitude based CINR value is permanently sig nificantly higher gt 3dB than the regular CINR value and both values are lower than 40 dB pfAmpBasedCinrSSyn clnDB pdwTimeFromStartOf BlockInNs ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SSignals SPower Value Building a LTE TopN View Measurement Description ViCom Name Part of ViCom struc ture CINR of the P SYNC based on amplitude noise CINR of the PSS in dB based on amplitude noise The measurement performed for this result value reduces noise con tributions produced by transmitter or receiver phase noise If either receiver or transmitter phase noise contribu tions are not neglectable then the amplitude based CINR is higher than the CINR based on the regular CINR mea surement The TSMW is a receiver with low phase noise contribution Therefore a high transmitter phase noise is indicated if the amplitude based CINR value is permanently sig nificantly higher gt 3dB than the regular CINR value and both values are lower than 40dB pfAmpBasedCinrPSyn cInDB pdwTimeFromStartOf BlockInNs ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SSignals SPower Value SSYNC RSSI Comprises the linear average of the total received power observed only in OFDM symbols containing Sec ondary Synchronization Signals over the
198. ennen nnns 222 RES VICOM BP siii 223 Sample ApplicatiON icon 223 A EE 224 R amp S TSMW R amp S TSME Address 224 Message FOTTat enean a aenticietes pd Urs educ EE nies 224 Measurement anni inet aes 225 L Lull 225 Endinge S SSION EE 226 Viewingithe ResullS unico 226 R amp S ViCom RS232 Tunneling ccce 228 Sample Application coercere iran erroe n cree a dareesnvessavssanadscceedarecsnenseneee 228 Walk Through Example coerente rtc eie en rtc er retis 230 Saee pe E 230 Getting Dale EE 230 Result Loopback to RS232 ret rere ege a iaa 231 lusu arai aa a 231 R amp S Remote ViCom Interface ooooommmccccccnnnncncnccnnnonnnnnannnnnnnnnnanannnns 232 17 1 Overview of R amp S Remote ViCom Architecture eeeeeeeennenee 232 17 2 Usage of R amp S Remote ViCom Interface eese 233 17 3 Example of R amp S Remote ViCom Application with R amp S TSMA 233 R Eu We IT EIER 233 17 3 1 1 Requirement for Bluetooth Connection c cceceeceeceeeceeeeeeeeseeeeceneaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 234 17 3 1 2 Requirement for WLAN Connechon eene 234 17 3 2 Connection Establishment crisi ia anida 234 17 3 2 1 Connection Type Gelechon nennen 234 17 322 Server DISCOVOLy iiiui siccae a 234 17 4 Task Configuration cevssacce cavessdeee cxvstaeee ee 235 17 4 14 GSM RSSI SCahi iicet eei ta ed
199. ense keys Software license keys are installed using the R amp S TSME Device Manager in the Options tab Another tabs provide information on device network and band configu ration as well as the possibility to update the basic Field Programmable Gate Array FPGA or correction data on your R amp S TSME Getting Started with R amp S TSME R amp S TSME Device Manager STE S File Help Available Devices Device sera Number 0010 s Device Info_ Network Configuration Options Band Configuration Updates Install Option Key Bag TSME option order s are shipped as xml files on a data carrier For option installation press the Browse button select the corresponding option file on the data carrier and press Install Option File L sege Insta Alternatively to option file input the option key could be entered manually Key Install Active Options Option Type Option Material No Option Key Privilege Time Stamp License Count Activation Type Valid From 4 TSME K23 1510 0085 02 231295241941625343610382706894 Customer Order 2014 07 14 12 22 1 Permanent 5 TSME K22 1514 6836 02 339782068831781796870233046681 Customer Order 2014 07 14 12 22 1 Permanent F 6 TSME K26 1514 6920 02 221044803520505460720869823940 Customer Order 2014 07 14 12 22 1 Permanent 7 TSME K27 1514 6813 02 019212340038475399083060695355 Customer Order 2014 07 14 12
200. ent values In such a case the required values will be interpolated using the two nearest neighbours and a linear interpolation The sum of all the weighted values is then multiplied by a correction factor to reduce the power to a meaningful value This algorithm is visualized in the figure below In the figure raw measurement samples are shown as small dots Marked with a background is the channel for which the bandwidth power shall be calculated The power scale function is shown in light blue p f Channel 0 Channel 1 bandwidth spacing L 12 8 f KHz Figure 11 7 Calculation of channel power for a channel sequence The channel filter is applied to every defined channel to calculate its power The result ing number of values is therefore the number of channels requested Channels can be defined in so called sub sequences One sub sequence is defined by a center fre quency the number and the spacing between the remaining center frequencies Time Detector Since there might be multiple sweeps that have to be combined into one result the kind of aggregation in terms of time has to be specified as well The choice made here also influences the number and layout of the result R amp S ViCom R amp S ViCom RF Scan and RF Power Scan Technology As for the spectrum filter the central problem is how to find a representing value from a set of values for a frequency gathered over time Compared to the frequency detector the differe
201. eoretical maximum if different measurements shall be made in parallel e The time how long sweep data is kept in the sweep result buffer before samples get invalid e Attenuation settings e Error handling strategy in case that the A D converter detects an overflow Sample Application Note that these settings exactly match the values from the structures e SRfSweepRange e SRfSweepRate e SRfSweepBuffer e SRfSweepAttenuationLimits e SRfSweepAdcOverflowAction e SRfSweepSectionRelation stored in the ViCom REPOWERSCAN SSettings structure 11 3 1 3 Step 3 Set parameters Before a changed value is set in the logical device the related Set button below the input fields must be pressed to transfer the value into the related R amp S ViCom object For our example we set the Sweep Range of our first device from 100 to 1000 and for the second to 1800 to 2200 The minimum value for a frequency is 80 and the maxi mum 3000 If you have a R amp S TSML CW device the upper limit is 6000 11 3 1 4 Step 4 Start Measurement Once the common settings are set as desired you can put the logical power scanner object into measurement state Note that you have to do this for every instance Once you did this you cannot change common settings until you stop the measurement After you started a measurement the mapped R amp S TSM Instrument already scans all frequencies repeatedly Nevertheless you won t see any measurement results un
202. er for a sweep is raised the raw measurement data is ignored and not stored for later power value calculation The chunk that is associated with the time interval that contains the extrapolated timestamp for the internal trigger is the first used to calculate the power value for the channel Depending on the measure ment time specified for one channel the additional chunks have to be taken into account to calculate that value In single channel measurement mode this means that also parts of a chunk can be used to calculate the power value As depicted the figure below the internal trigger timestamp is in located in the mid of the time interval associated with the third raw measurement chunk Therefore the second half of that chunk and the first of the next are used to calculate a raw power value In total three raw power values are calcula ted from four chunks From these three raw power values the overall channel power is calculated Once all chunks required to fulfill the measurement time constraint for the channel are available the measurement unit is tuned to the next frequency and the raw measure ments are processed immediately in the same way as before Additional trigger is not required since once the internal trigger is located in a chunk all configured channels are measured As a consequence the internal trigger intervals must not be smaller to the total sweep time required to setup measure and process all channels R amp
203. erRequestData structure and uses that structure to call the RetrieveTextForPDU function to retrieve the demodulation results The results SL3DecoderResultData will be filled in with variables containing decoded contents and a descriptive string of all these contents pcStringPDU for the PDU requested which can be DL MAP UL MAP DCD UCD and so on 10 1 3 Error Handling The WiMAX ViCom interface supports C exceptions natively For every method in the interface and also in the basic interface taking a CViComError reference to be fil led with potential error messages there is a counterpart method that will throw a CVi ComError object in case that a problem arises All the remaining behavior is consistent between both methods so you can choose which version fits your needs best 10 2 GUI Sample Application The sample application is a simple implementation of the R amp S ViCom Interface to con trol one WiMAX scanner R amp S TSMW or R amp S TSME It may be used e to test the R amp S TSMW R amp S TSME e to understand the R amp S ViCom programming interface The application and its user interface was principally designed for testing the R amp S ViCom interface functions so it is possible to call interface functions at any time from the GUI and it is possible to set values out of range to check the responses and the behaviour of the PN Scanner in different situations This means the code is quite straightforward and provides a good exa
204. ere 11 3 1 11 3 1 1 Sample Application A Walk Through Example The general workflow when using the application is as follows e Load receiver s e Read device settings e Change them to your needs and update them in the device e Start the measurement e Define specific requests e Fetch results e Stop measurement e Unload receivers s Steps 3 to 7 can be repeated various times and with different settings Step 1 Load Receiver s In this walk through we assume that one R amp S TSM Instrument is connected to the computer We want to have two logical receivers one scanning below 1GHz the other in the UMTS frequencies Therefore we load two receivers using the Load RF Power Scanner button Click the button and select a receiver from the list of the available receivers in the SampleforVi ComRFScan Then change the number in the combo box to 1 and click the button for a second time Each time the button is clicked you should see the text field below the button getting filled with information on the available scanners after some time approx 20 30 sec onds Firmware Version 12 0 72 0 SW Version 2 115 113 0 Option Mask 0x00000DEF FrontEnd Mask 0x00000001 Figure 11 9 Load RF power scanner The previous figure shows only one R amp S TSM Instrument connected to the PC If you have more then one such device you can configure the application to use the second device Each of the loaded logical receivers
205. ert modes bLevelThreshold set this to 0 Other settings are expert modes ViCom REPOWERSCAN SSettings dStartFrequencyInHz and dStopFrequencyInHz this is input by the user of the drive test SW application ViCom REPOWERSCAN SSettings dwMeasTimeInNs set this to 1 Other settings are expert mode 11 6 3 Measurement Rate R amp S TSMW provides one measurement value for a signal of length FFT size 1 15 20 MHz For the recommended FFT size of 1024 this is 44 us for a sweep of 20 MHz one sweep of 100MHz span F stop 5 FFT size 1 15 20MHz the sweep is repeated with fMaxMeas RateTS MW InHz measurements are filled into a buffer with lenath dwMaxAgeOfBufferedMeas In Ms Figure 11 14 Sweep composed of several 20 MHz blocks The measurements are filled into a buffer Using R amp S TSMW RF Power Scan in a Typical Drive Test Use Case Figure 11 15 Processing steps of measurements data Further processing after the buffer allows aggregating several sweeps into a single measurement value This has the advantage to provide a more readable visualization update rate to the user while still looking at a larger amount of signal The rate that is made available to the user for reporting can be set with ViCom RFPOWERSCAN SSpectrumSettings fMaxReportingRateInHz This is the maximum result reporting rate Buffer size 1 sweep dwM axAgeOfBufferedM easInM s
206. es 10 100 ms 1 second as time out Start the measurement If you now click on Get Result Counters button regularly you will find that new data is collected after the measurement has started Fetch the results with Get 100 Results Display the output file using the View button The file is stored in the ViCom root dir in the file C RuS ViCom_ lt version gt bin LogFiles ViComMeasurements txt If the demodulation could be done within the 100 results there should be some deco ded Layer 3 messages in the text file You can search for L3 in the file to find demodulation results faster Issuing a Request during Measurement It is possible to explicitly request a demodulation of a certain cell during measurement To do this you need to In the During Measurement column enter the same four parameters described in the previous section along with the Cell Id Click the Issue Request button to send the request to the demodulator Click Get 100 Results and check the result file as described above for the demodulated string that has been requested Be sure to close any previously star ted instances of your file viewer default write exe if the editor does not support automatic file updates write exe does NOT support this feature When you finished working with the demo application don t forget to stop the measure ment and release the resources of the R amp S TSMW R amp S TSME Measuring with the RF Scan 1
207. es them into the file mentioned above Sample Application Result Count To Read 5 Get Results Figure 11 12 How to fetch results If there are not enough results in the buffer to satisfy the request the demo application waits for five seconds if other records arrive If not a message box is shown Any result that is available and requested will be written into the file Each single record looks similar to the one shown below MeasResult dwPcTimeStampInMs 12192898 SpecificParameters wRequestIdentifier 0 dwCountOfRequests 2 dwTimeBetweenRequestsInMs 1000 eFreqPostProcess 0 dMinFrequencyInMHz 100 000000 dMaxFrequencyInMHz 500 000000 dwCountOfDisplayLines 5 eFreqDetector 2 etTimeDetector 2 SPowerValueFormatSpec wMaxPowerInteger 1000 fMinPowerValueInDBm 120 000000 fPowerResolutionInDB 0 100000 ePowerWithOverflowFormat 0 bUseRequestForMarker 0 dwCountOfPowerWithOverflowValues 10 pwPowerResultValues 581 0 312 0 250 0 268 0 249 0 bOverflowIndicator 0 The result contains from top to bottom the following information e When did the response arrive in milliseconds after the start of the R amp S TSM Instrument e The configuration details that were used to create that result e The number of result values dwCountOfPowerWithOverflowValues e The result values In this case we have five maximum minimum pairs The first pair 581 0 is the one associated for dMinFrequencyInMHz the l
208. ets are therefore calculated by putting the arrival time into rela tion to the first identified pilot This can be done since all cells in a CDMA 2000 net work are time synchronized and send their information with different offsets e ALL 3 When the R amp S TSM Instruments detect a new pilot or assume to have found a new one a new demodulation attempt of the F SYNC is started again This is a time consuming task since the scanner must spend some time to perform the demodulation on a specific pilot signal e FAST 4 If a new pilot is found the demodulation is not performed completely but in a high speed fashion This yields very similar results to the type ALL but does not consume so much time since only a smaller part of the signal must be ana lyzed More details on the content of the demodulation result can be found in the 3GGP2 specification TIA 200 5 D C S0005 D When this document was written a copy could be found at http www 3gpp2 org Public html specs C S0005 D v2 0 051006 pdf section 3 7 2 3 2 26 The demodulation result parameter stored in the pSyncChannelDemodulationResult contains for example the following informa tion e Network identification The system time and other time information The PN offset of the pilot measured e Channel configuration details Time Estimation Besides the other results the R amp S TSM Instruments deliver a correction for the time line used for the current measurements This
209. eys menus options buttons etc are enclosed by quotation marks KEYS Key names are written in capital letters and enclosed by quotation marks Input Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics File names commands program code File names commands coding samples and screen out put are distinguished by their font Links Links that you can click are displayed in blue font References References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quotation marks Other conventions e Remote commands Remote commands may include abbreviations to simplify input In the description of such commands all parts that have to be entered are written in capital letters Additional text in lower case characters is for information only e Procedure descriptions When describing how to operate the device several alternative methods may be available to perform the same task In this case the procedure using the touch screen is described where available Any elements that can be activated by touching can also be clicked using an additionally connected mouse The alternative procedure using the keys on the device or the on screen keyboard is only described if it deviates from the standard operating procedures as described in the Quick Start Guide under Basic Operations The terms select and press may refer to any of the described methods i e using a finger on the touch screen a mouse poi
210. f a bitmask One mask holds all that alignments that have a relative probability to the maximum of at least 9596 The second mask holds all that possibilities that have a probability that is at least 5096 of the maximum peak That behavior is shown in the following figure User Manual 1505 1329 42 26 90 7 1 2 8 7 2 GSM Measurements Demo Application Equi Distant Before Slot 0 Before Slot 1 Before Slot 2 Before Slot 3 Alignment Figure 7 10 Slot Alignment Probabilities The picture shows the situation that it is most likely a fill bit is used and it is placed directly before the first scan The more different time slots measured and the more these time slots have different positions to each other the better the results will be and the more exactly can the mea surement report the probabilities Removing Dummy Burst Measurements Dummy Bursts can have a significant influence on the results of other measurement types It is possible to remove those dummy bursts after demodulation and before other measurement task perform their calculation which is especially useful for the channel power and the time slot measurements However the algorithm applied to remove those dummy bursts is a very time consum ing task and consumes some of the PCs computing time It might therefore be neces sary to selectively enable and disable that removal for specific channels during the measurement To achieve this it is only necessary to set the flag
211. f the time slot A time slot may contain data from a normal or a dummy burst Dummy bursts can be removed from the measurements by setting the bMEAS DB REMOVAL in the channel measurement specification The power values in the value list have to be set in relation to the interval specified in the cluster result The calculation is shown in the following figure and explained after wards STimeSlotPowerClusterResult ListTimeSlotPowerValuesResult 0 01dB n2 0 01 1248 0 255 94 39 dB Figure 7 8 Result Structures of Time Slot Measurement Mode User Manual 1505 1329 42 26 89 R amp S ViCom R amp S ViCom GSM Technology T From the STimeSlotPowerClusterResult we know the minimum power value and the range The time slot power values are given in the value list as a fraction of the power range This fraction is based on the maximum value of a byte 255 So the com plete calculation is as shown above e Multiply the power value bPower with the power range wPowerRangeInDBm100 and divide the result by 255 e When this intermediate result is multiplied with 0 01 the difference to the minimum value is available in dBm e Now the minimum value sMinPowerInDBm100 is transformed into dBm units multiply with 0 01 and the difference calculated before is added The total time slot power can be calculated in a similar way To the result calculated above the value from boffsetToTotalPowerInDBm10 can be added after multiply
212. face Check if an appropriate firmware version is loaded Firmware Version gt 12 x Press the Set Receiver Index button to specify which device shall be controlled in the FireWire chain Set the result buffer size with the according button Set Baud Rate and Silent Mode if desired with the buttons on the right side of the dialog Press the Start Measurement button Perform you work see sections below for details Press the Stop Measurement button You can now change some settings and restart the measurement see step 6 Press the Release Measurement button You can now close the application or load another device see step 1 16 1 1 1 Sending Data Now the communication with the serial port can be started Data can be sent by enter ing text into the central text field and send it to the connected device by pressing Send Data 16 1 1 2 Getting Data Data can be fetched by clicking on Get Results The sample reads data until no fur ther data can be found in the result buffer To fill the result buffer the R amp S ViCom implementation if the RS232 tunneling API starts a thread to repeatedly watch the data sent on the FireWire connection If it finds data from the serial port of an R amp S TSMx Family model it stores the data in the result buffer If there is no such data found in one second an empty result is stored Therefore the result counters constantly increases even if there is no communication
213. following colored statuses e Green The measurement is running and measurement data will be received e Yellow The measurement is running but no measurement data will be received e Red The measurement was stopped 17 4 2 WCDMA Scan In order to start a WCDMA scan the following steps must be performed 1 Choose a frequency band The minimum UARFON of this band will be set automatically 2 If necessary change the UARFCN according to your needs Task Configuration ROHDESSCHWARZ Set scan preferences Leed Frequency band Band 1 1900 UARFCN 9662 Start scan Figure 17 7 Setting the WCDMA Preferences 3 Click Start scan to start the scan 4 In order to stop the scan use Stop scan in the menu inflator in the top right cor er 2 D Due to processing issues it is not possible to select more than one UARFCN NOTE In the menu inflator on top of the right corner templates for existing preferen ces Munich and surrounding areas can be selected The WCDMA scan result graph displays one column for each SC found by the mea surement The height of a column represents the RSCP value in dBm H 4 ROHDESRSCHWARZ D H Set scan preferences Bluetooth ViComServerApplication unknown SR 3 Parameters Status RF Power Scan Start 350 MHz End 4400 MHz 00 12 2 meas second Figure 17 8 WCDMA Scan Result View Following additional information is displayed Parameters Dis
214. g sequence 11 2 2 1 Sweep Result Buffer The result buffer as the name implies is used to save the incoming R amp S TSM Instru ment s results The data structure where these results are stored in provides the sub d 11 2 2 2 Architecture and Functionality of the RF Scan Technology sequent filters to find appropriate values faster than searching in a complete list of val ues This result buffer stores the raw measurement data gathered from the R amp S TSM Instruments It is other then result buffer that stores the post processing results of the RF Power Scan The results are only stored for some amount of time After a measurement sample reached its lifetime it is purged when the next sample arrives Spectrum Filter The task of this module is to select only frequencies from the result buffer that fit into a given sub range and adapting the samples to a given number of result values The sub range must be contained within the RF Power Scan Technology sweep range interval The number of input values available in the raw sweep is AM Ja 0 0128 where the frequencies are given in MHZ For a sweep scan range of 100 MHz there will be approx 7812 values in the result buffer In many cases the output of the frequency selection does not directly map to the num ber of results you might need The spectrum filter unit helps you to get the number of samples you need in your application If the number of measurements selected
215. g with the RF SG iro co rtr te dne eden 171 e Architecture and Functionality of the RF Scan Technology 174 e Sample Application erento a ERR RR KERN RAS EES SEENEN 184 e RF Power Scan lechnology iau erre rtt rne ada NEES 191 e RF Power Scan Technology Specific Trouble Shooting ssss 195 e Using R amp S TSMW RF Power Scan in a Typical Drive Test Use Case 196 e Spectrum Clearance Use Case with RF Power Scan ooccococcccccccccnnnnconnoncnncnnnnnnnns 200 11 1 Measuring with the RF Scan The R amp S TSM instruments are not directly designed to be a radio frequency spectrum analyzer Such a functionality is implemented in the R amp S TSM Instruments in software and firmware Several software modules are available to perform typical tasks of a radio frequency spectrum analyzer Most of the time measurements within the R amp S TSM Instruments will be done asyn chronously to user requests which has certain impacts on the design of the API One Measuring with the RF Scan such measurement from a lower frequency to higher one is called sweep The R amp S TSM Instruments perform sweeps at a constant rate To generate a frequency spectrum from raw R amp S TSM Instrument measurements at least one sweep must be performed With one or more sweeps one user request for a frequency spectrum can be satisfied In the simplest case measurement data would directly trans
216. gFiles directory After making a measurement the R amp S TSMW R amp S TSME can be unloaded using the Release WiMAX Scanner button If problems are encountered during the release procedure the Terminate WiMAX Scanner button should be used The R amp S ViCom API then forces a deletion of the ViComWiMAXInterface object The figure below shows the columns in the central area of the GUI The frequency to be scanned can be entered in the left column along with the local channel identifier Default frequency Although a default value appears in the GUI this is not entered in the scanner until the Set Frequencies button has been pressed Frequencies MHz pod Measurement go new line Ctrl Enter PDU Mode t 100ms SC CD PDU Mode t 100ms new cokes Ctrl Enter new ics Ctrl Enter 2112 800000 0 Figure 10 5 Columns in the GUI The center column lists the PDU s which correspond to the management messages which the scanner should demodulate Each PDU value must have a corresponding channel identifier which refers to one of the frequencies entered in the left hand box 10 2 3 View Results Stored results can be browsed and viewed using the dialogue in the Result Viewer box Enter the file name of your preferred text editor in the text field for example notepad exe the Browse button can be used to find the program if need be Click the View button The sample application opens the result file using the preferred text edit
217. ge to the product If a product is to be permanently installed the connection between the protective conductor terminal on site and the product s protective conductor must be made first before any other connection is made The product may be installed and connected only by a licensed electrician For permanently installed equipment without built in fuses circuit breakers or similar protective devices the supply circuit must be fuse protected in such a way that anyone who has access to the product as well as the product itself is adequately protected from injury or damage Use suitable overvoltage protection to ensure that no overvoltage such as that caused by a bolt of lightning can reach the product Otherwise the person operating the product will be exposed to the danger of an electric shock Any object that is not designed to be placed in the openings of the housing must not be used for this purpose Doing so can cause short circuits inside the product and or electric shocks fire or injuries Unless specified otherwise products are not liquid proof see also section Operating states and operating positions item 1 Therefore the equipment must be protected against penetration by liquids If the necessary precautions are not taken the user may suffer electric shock or the product itself may be damaged which can also lead to personal injury Never use the product under conditions in which condensation has for
218. gmented Normally the width of the segment is selected for maximum mea surement speed but the user has the possibility to overrule the automatic settings and define her own segment width After gathering the information in spectral domain the postprocessing follows the same concept as the RF Scan Frequency detector to limit the number of spectral lines Time detector for averaging or peak detection in time domain e Channel filter to perform sweeps over several subbands with fixed frequency raster and defined filter characteristics Only one out of the three analysis modes in frequency domain frequency detector channel filter or raw data analysis can be selected With raw data analysis the mea surement data is delivered right after the FFT without any further postprocessing When the marker is enabled no spectrum information but the frequency with the maxi mum power is returned Depending on the settings of the time detector one or more power values are available The marker is active for all three analysis modes 11 4 2 Interface Concept The R amp S ViCom interface for RF Power Scan technology controls all parameters of a single sweep Multiple instances of interfaces can run independently in a single appli cation Therefore it is possible to perform spectrum analysis over different frequency bands within a single control program the same task can be done by using a channel filter in a single instance of the interface Th
219. gt Setup Connecti sssini aiani dada lia 165 10 2 2 Measurement Controls ooo de 166 10 23 View Cc 167 10 2 4 Update GUI with Current Scanner Geitnges esenee nere teerenssenssernses 168 10 25 MiscellateOUs i tereti ce teca rete Le reiecit red e nes EET 169 10 2 6 Demiod lation iiuieeii ie ee itg ee rated i eng dada 169 10 2 6 1 Issuing a Request during Measurement sse 170 11 R amp S ViCom RF Scan and RF Power Scan Technology 171 11 1 Measuring with the RF Scan nennen tren carrera 171 11 2 Architecture and Functionality of the RF Scan Technology 174 TEE Sue nEENTSIONIDMR m 174 11 2 2 The Post Processor Cham 175 11 2 2 1 Sweep Result Butter 176 11 2 2 2 Spectrum FIDE cinis lata a d Re ro ER ER TA da MAE FARO ERR UIT aN RAE 177 11 2 23 Chamel 179 JU BIB EE 181 112 25 Marker Tool em 183 11 2 26 Result Conditioner cece erent etree eene nnne rra nn nn rn cnn nennen 183 11 3 Sample Applicaton issiccs cic tecscccessctanancecettscecsasvene secenvecnecscevedensasssbsecnacceseaedeedessezacenstene 184 11 3 1 A Walk Through Example sese enm ene rennen rr rana 186 11 3 1 1 Step 1 Load Receivers ener enn nnne nnns 186 11 3 1 2 Step 2 Reading the Device Geitings cnn 187 11 3 1 3 11 3 1 4 11 3 1 5 11 3 1 6 11 3 1 7 11 3 1 8 11 4 11 4 1 11 4 2 11 4 3 11 5 11 6 11 6 1 11 6 2 11 6 3 1
220. h UL DL Mask IV Force No Gap Wo 71 213 Mi No of Ref Symbols Ma ws Ee so Time Resolution ms Signal Acquisition Time ms Max No of Accumulations 10 2 Result Mask for 2 x 2 Bandwidth Control Mode Max No of eNodeBs RO d a 1 Result Mask for 2 x 4 Number of Resource Blocks Min Center RSRP dBm 7 xo CIN Threshold for Rank dB S Sync to P Sync Ratios Max RSRP Difference dB oo Type y fio00 MexNo ofeNodeBs Min S SYNC CINR dB EM oon Min Center RSRP dBm FE Mask wa rej Transmit Antenna Mask Max RSRP Difference dB Mo vi M2 Mallo EN EN IN e Min S SYNC CINR dB Ion RS CINR Channel Model Delayed Spread ns 3000 Max Speed km h 100 Figure 9 8 Additional channel settings for all channels Select All Channels to configure all channels In this mode if a specific setting is dif ferent among the channels the value will be displayed as blank for text boxes or combo boxes or intermediate checked for checkboxes and if you leave these blanks or intermediate checks unchanged the dialog will not modify these settings if you click OK to save the changes 9 3 1 3 Start Measurement After all the parameters are properly configured you can press the Start Measure ment button to start measurement and the R amp S ViCom will retrieve and buffer mea surement demodulation results from the R amp S TSMW R amp S TSME To get these
221. h Dynamic and High Speed Mode available Therefore only one maximum measurement rate is available see the following table R amp S Instruments R amp S R amp S R amp S R amp S R amp S TSME TSMU TSMQ TSML C TSMW Max Number of Channels 32 32 6 32 32 Max Measurement Rate for CDMA 12 Hz 12 Hz 12 Hz 80 Hz 70 Hz Max Measurement Rate for EVDO 12 Hz 12 Hz 12 Hz 30 Hz 20 Hz Min Ec IO threshold for demodulation 20 dB 25 dB 10 dB 13 dB 13 dB LTE The LTE Technology R amp S ViCom API does ily There are three scanner algorithms e Narrowband NB e Wideband WB e MIMO not offer support for the R amp S TSMx Fam 3 2 1 5 3 2 1 6 Due to that there are three different measurement rates R amp S TSM Instruments Product Family R amp S Instruments R amp S TSMW R amp S TSME Max Number of Channels 32 32 Max Measurement Rate NB with BCH Demodulation 200 Hz 330 Hz Max Measurement Rate WB 6 Hz 100 Hz Max Measurement Rate MIMO 6 Hz R amp S ViCom specifies the measurement rate as blocks sec One block 100 ms contains up to 20 sync signals Therefore a setting of 16 5 means 330 sync signals per sec 330 Hz WiMAX The WiMAX Technology R amp S ViCom API does not offer support for the R amp S TSMx Family R amp S Instruments R amp S TSMW R amp S TSME Max Number of Channels 32 323 Max Measurement Rate 14 5 Hz 14 5 Hz TD SCDMA
222. hannels via the technology specific scanner Detected channels are automatically added to the result list of scanned channels The Smart ACD never stops by itself and continues evaluating the defined spectra and add ing detected channels until the measurement is stopped by the user The mode is use ful if ACD is used while driving in an inhomogeneous network where the channel allo cation changes during the driven route This may be the case where spectrum is shared between technologies If the detection of transmitters along a drive is the goal of the measurement running the ACD in smart mode is the best solution If Smart ACD is selected the RF Power Scan will be loaded automatically if not already loaded 14 1 4 14 1 5 Performance Requirements The performance of the R amp S ViCom ACD depends mainly on the amount of different technologies and the size of the observed frequency ranges It is highly recommended to keep both parameters as small as possible in order to achieve the maximum benefit of this feature Device Options To use the R amp S ViCom ACD the appropriate options for the R amp S TSMW or R amp S TSME have to be available on the device The options are e K40 ACD for general ACD operation e K27 RF Power Scan for Smart ACD operation e K21 GSM WCDMA for UMTS scanning e K22 CDMA EVDO for CDMA or EVDO scanning e K29 LTE for LTE scanning Configuration Example e If you want to use Smart AC
223. hat means that the sample values that fall into the bandwidth are used to calcu late the power value of the channel although it is not required that only values of the bandwidth are used Under some circumstances it might be useful to also consider the adjacent power values for the bandwidth calculation The channels can be defined in an arbitrary way even as a mixture of evenly spaced sub sequences and freely defined ones Each channel is specified by its centre fre quency and its span Optionally multiple equidistant channels can be defined by speci fying a repetition count For the rest of the section it is important to know that the R amp S TSM Instrument has a native frequency resolution of 12 8 KHz These sample values cannot be used directly for the calculation of a channels power value except for very specific configurations The central element of the algorithm to calculate the overall channel power is a power scale function for the measurement samples It is used to control how different raw measurements contribute to the overall channel bandwidth Architecture and Functionality of the RF Scan Technology The power scale function is always symmetrical and is defined in equidistant steps from the center frequency to some lower upper limit The limit is implicitly defined by the number of equidistant points and the spacing between those points The calcula tion of the channel bandwidth power p is done as follows p cy p Af s
224. he reference signal power measurement of the 6 innermost resource blocks 1MHz BW around center frequency where PBCH is broad cast The scanner can be configured to provide up to 6 RSRP sub band values pNarrowbandRSR PinDBm100 bRsCinrMeasResultCon fig ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SSignals SReferen ceSignal Narrowband RSRQ RSRQ value based on sCenterRSRPinDBm100 and the total inband power of the 6 innermost resource blocks 1MHz BW around center fre quency where PBCH is broadcast sPBCHbasedRSR QinDB100 ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SSignals SReferen ceSignal NB RS CINR TX0 dB Narrowband RS CINR measurements taken for antenna port 0 1MHz BW around center fre quency where PBCH is broadcast The scanner can be configured to pro vide up to 6 sub band RS CINR values pNarrowbandRsCinrVal ues bRsCinrMeasResultCon fig ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SSignals SReferen ceSignal NB RS CINR TX1 dB Narrowband RS CINR measurements taken for antenna port 1 1MHz BW around center fre quency where PBCH is broadcast The scanner can be configured to pro vide up to 6 sub band RS CINR values pNarrowbandRsCinrVal ues bRsCinrMeasResultCon fig ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SSignals SReferen ceSignal NB RS CINR TX2 dB Narrowband RS CINR measurements taken for antenna port 2 1MHz BW around center fre quency where PBCH is broadcast The scanner can b
225. he external triggers the number of times they have been recorded and the time intervals between those triggers internal triggers are generated These internal trig gers are the basic element to decide which raw measurement blocks are moved to the internal ring buffer which in turn is used as input for different calculation routines For more details on the triggering refer to the section about triggering below e Measurement MOGGS cierre ri tt retta ah ENEE 207 e Measurement Gebeess 209 e Channel Power Aggregalloh eite tret ire REI net etit SES 214 13 1 1 Measurement Modes These two different calculation routines in the R amp S TSM Instruments are called Single Channel and Multi Channel measurement modes Both differ in the accuracy sensitiv ity to noise and measurement speed they provide where the single channel measure ment is used to focus the measurement on one specific channel being as accurate as possible and reducing the influence from strong senders in the neighbourhood A faster way to do the measuring is provided by the multi channel measurement mode which in turn leads to stronger noise levels R amp S ViCom R amp S ViCom CW Technology 13 1 1 1 As input both modes require a list of channels to be defined Each channel consists of a center frequency a bandwidth and a measurement time specification The measure ment mode can be specified for each single channel the R amp S TSM Instruments soft ware w
226. he related GSM equivalent Fre EVDO Index PN Offset limitation Load PN Scanner peak EDO IKE m Load Save ok i 5 Selected Frequency index y ss Request PN Scanner Settings Cancel Receiver Index 0 Scanner Frontend FE 1 v TSMx Time Base E r Demodulator Settings Demod Frontend FE 1 v Result Buffer Depth 150 Measurement Rate per 1000 Seconds Demodulation for CDMA dear set All ses o Step 4 se gre bk EVDO Settings Adjust Facing channel imitation DIE e Base Measurement Rate mHz 10000 Max velocity km h 100 ear eshold in See Full Sync Rate mHz 1000 cai Heer Lim Short Sync Rate mHz 5000 fina Edge Delay aec ER Set Rate Short Sync Range Chips 160 Set PPS Synchr S Stop after CDMA 2000 Sync dulation Settings exc Special Sync Channel Demodulation Mode vali 1 2 4 2 ME Start Measurement new line Ctrl Enter Set EVDO Settings Ge SE Se D 1 Posti Set Demodulation Settings e Decode L3 Messages Start Measurement Get Result Counters cR During Measurement line Ctrl Enter Get 100 Results elle Ueda Gia Wite exe Stop Measurement Release PN Scanner Sanz Terminate PN Scanner Results Figure 8 4 Sample Application CDMA 2000 Demodulator The CDMA 2000 sample application GUI makes it possible to define the demodulation settings in two ways e Configure initial demodulati
227. hitecture and Functionality of the RF Scan Technology This design was chosen because post processing can be configured in many ways For example one use case is to aggregate data into channels Based on that result one might with to know what the strongest transmitter is in such a channel list In another step all the raw values shall be analyzed to also find adjacent interferers The channel calculation is the same in both cases so it is convenient to have that configu ration shared among both use cases To perform these things with one single device the approach described above was designed Refer to the following figure to get a feeling for how the post process calcu lation takes place Post Processor Figure 11 3 Post Processor Chain There are seven different processing modules available The one that starts process ing is the sweep result buffer the final result is returned from the result conditioner These results are stored in the RF Power Scan Technology result buffer To simplify handling the API supports multiple equally configured post processes to be performed in one row One important detail to notice is that the spectrum filter and channel filter unit are mutually exclusive Exactly one of both can be active If both are enabled using the API only the spectrum filter will perform its work the channel filter will not be used The units and the calculations they perform are now described in the order of process in
228. hoques el ctricos En las mediciones en circuitos de corriente con una tensi n Ug gt 30 V se deber n tomar las medidas apropiadas para impedir cualquier peligro p ej medios de medici n adecuados seguros limitaci n de tensi n corte protector aislamiento etc Para la conexi n con dispositivos inform ticos como un PC o un ordenador industrial debe comprobarse que stos cumplan los est ndares IEC60950 1 EN60950 1 o IEC61010 1 EN 61010 1 v lidos en cada caso A menos que est permitido expresamente no retire nunca la tapa ni componentes de la carcasa mientras el producto est en servicio Esto pone a descubierto los cables y componentes el ctricos y puede causar lesiones fuego o da os en el producto Si un producto se instala en un lugar fijo se deber primero conectar el conductor de protecci n fijo con el conductor de protecci n del producto antes de hacer cualquier otra conexi n La instalaci n y la conexi n deber n ser efectuadas por un electricista especializado En el caso de dispositivos fijos que no est n provistos de fusibles interruptor autom tico ni otros mecanismos de seguridad similares el circuito de alimentaci n debe estar protegido de modo que todas las personas que puedan acceder al producto as como el producto mismo est n a salvo de posibles da os Todo producto debe estar protegido contra sobretensi n debida p ej a una ca da del rayo mediante los correspondien
229. hwarz ist unter ande rem nach den Managementsys temen ISO 9001 und ISO 14001 zertifiziert Der Umwelt verpflichtet 1 Energie effiziente RoHS konforme Produkte 1 Kontinuierliche Weiterentwicklung nachhaltiger Umweltkonzepte 1 ISO 14001 zertifiziertes Umweltmanagementsystem Dear customer You have decided to buy a Rohde amp Schwarz product This product has been manufactured using the most advanced meth ods It was developed manufac tured and tested in compliance with our quality management and environmental manage ment systems Rohde 8 Schwarz has been certified for exam ple according to the ISO 9001 and ISO 14001 management systems Environmental commitment 1 Energy efficient products 1 Continuous improvement in environmental sustainability 1 150 14001 certified environmental management system Certified Quality System ISO 9001 Certified Environmental System ISO 14001 Cher client Vous avez choisi d acheter un produit Rohde 8 Schwarz Vous disposez donc d un produit fabriqu d apr s les m thodes les plus avanc es Le d velop pement la fabrication et les tests de ce produit ont t effec tu s selon nos syst mes de management de qualit et de management environnemental La soci t Rohde amp Schwarz a t homologu e entre autres conform ment aux syst mes de management ISO 9001 et ISO 14001 Engagement cologique 1 Produits efficience nerg tique 1 Am
230. i where e fc is the center frequency of the channel e fis the frequency span e s i is the i th element in the power scale function All the values of the power scale function must be within 0 2 e cis acorrection factor to equalize the impact of the weights on the measurement samples e Nis the number of points that define the power scale function This power scale function is the base for a channel filter In the figure below the basic principle is depicted All the values explained above are shown there again It is note worthy that the channel bandwidth for a channel is defined by the scaling function It can be calculated as 2 N Af p f Channel Filter s 0 s 2 eae Q SE se Figure 11 6 Channel filter definition For example if the center frequency is 935 2 MHz and there are 4 points spaced by 200 KHz the power scale function is applied to the incoming spectrum at frequencies 11 2 2 4 Architecture and Functionality of the RF Scan Technology 934 6 MHz 934 8 MHz 935 0 MHz 935 2 MHz 935 4 MHz 935 6 MHz and 935 8 MHz This approach can be used to make the center frequency dominant for example by setting the weight function to 2 at the center and to low values for the rest Another use case is that channels might overlap and consider parts of the neighbour channels as well Usually the pairs that define the power scale function frequency and weight don t map directly to the native measurem
231. iCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result WB RSRQ noise clip ped TX1 RX1 dBm Noise clipped RSRQ value based on the wide band reference signal power measurement in 0 01 dB For this value the measured RS CINR was taken into account to correct the RSRQ result regarding noise and interference Mea sured from R1 on Fron tend RF2 over the com plete system bandwidth sNoiseClippedRSR QinDB100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result WB RSRQ noise clip ped TX2 RX0 dBm Noise clipped RSRQ value based on the wide band reference signal power measurement in 0 01 dB For this value the measured RS CINR was taken into account to correct the RSRQ result regarding noise and interference Mea sured from R2 on Fron tend RF1 over the com plete system bandwidth sNoiseClippedRSR QinDB100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result Building a LTE TopN View Measurement Description ViCom Name Part of ViCom struc ture WB RSRQ noise clip ped TX3 RX0 dBm Noise clipped RSRQ value based on the wide band reference signal power measurement in 0 01 dB For this value the measured RS CINR was taken into account to correct the RSRQ result regarding noise and interference Mea sured from R1 on Fron tend RF3 over the com plete syst
232. idth measured on fron tend RF2 only in TDD DL frames psRssilnDBm100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask wRssiMeasMode ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SRssiAndSpectrum Result WB spectrum scan FDD Spectrum measurement over the LTE system bandwidth SSpectrumResult wRssiMeasMode ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SRssiAndSpectrum Result WB spectrum scan TDD DL Spectrum measurement over the LTE system bandwidth synchronized to the TDD DL SSpectrumResult wRssiMeasMode ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SRssiAndSpectrum Result WB spectrum scan TDD UL Spectrum measurement over the LTE system bandwidth synchronized to the TDD UL SSpectrumResult wRssiMeasMode ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SRssiAndSpectrum Result WB RS RSSI Rx0 dBm RSSI measurement taken according to 3GPP specification over the complete system band width only from OFDM symbols that contain ref erence symbols for RO measured on frontend RF1 sRsRssilnDBm100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SRssiAndSpectrum Result WB RS RSSI Rx1 dBm RSSI measurement taken according to 3GPP sRsRssilnDBm100 ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SRssiAndSpectrum d dwFrontEndSelection specification over the Mask Result complete system band width only from OFDM symbols that contain ref erence symbols for RO measured on frontend RF2 Values provided by the MIMO scanner Number of MIMO RX Nu
233. idually for each sub band The sub bands are identical to the sub bands used for the MIMO results CQI results give a basic indicator of the quality of the channel 9 1 6 2 Throughput Measurement Results The throughput results are estimates of the channel capacity in bits per second for each transmission scheme MIMO has a throughput estimate for each spatial layer As with CQI there are wide band and sub band throughput results The CQI results divide the channel quality into fifteen discrete values The code rate obtained from the CQI is then used to scale the output of a Shannon Capacity equation that approximates the bit rate for the particular modulation type for a given SINR The throughput estimates will vary not only when the CQI changes but as the channel con ditions vary within a single CQI value Throughput results give a more thorough indica tor of the quality of the channel for situations where a finer granularity is needed than what the CQI provides The UE category is not considered during the computation of the throughput estimate The maximum throughput values expected for each bandwidth and transmission scheme are shown in the following table User Manual 1505 1329 42 26 130 R amp S ViCom R amp S ViCom LTE Technology PE Maximum Throughput in Mbps Bandwidth in Resource SISO SIMO 1Tx SFBC MIMO Blocks 6 4 285997 4 092694 8 185388 15 12 184763 11 691506 23 383013 25 20 516794 19 69
234. ill then combine related channels and measurement modes appropriately to make the best use of the available processing time Single Channel Measurement The concept of the single channel measurement mode is very simple The internal hardware of the R amp S TSM Instruments is set to a specific frequency and a specific bandwidth which must not exceed 4 MHz Then the hardware measurement is per formed for a specific amount of time The results of this data lead to a whole bunch of IQ samples which in turn are then used to calculate the channel power The overall result is the sum of the squares of the real and imaginary part of the IQ samples This direct approach leads to very accurate results since the attenuator is set to best fit the measured channel and the IQ samples can be used directly and completely to calculate the power value All this has to be paid off by blocking the measurement unit for the measurement time where only one channel is measured even if the bandwidth is significantly smaller than the maximum In that way all channels have to be mea sured sequentially so that one sweep will last at least the sum of the measurement times there are additional costs because the equipment must be synchronized inter nally All this is depicted in the figure shown below Each of the three channels configured is measured on its own The read bar in the mid of the channels is the center frequency and the blue background shall indicate the
235. imation of PN arrival time delays Basestation identification The chapter is organized in three major sections First the different measurement modes and how they are configured are described The sample application is dis cussed in a separate section where a descriptive walk through example is given Last but not least the chapter closes with a small demo application showing how to use the API and how to set up a small measurement environment e Measuring of CDMA 2000 Signals ritmo eei erede 99 e Sample Application for CDMA 200O0IENDO 106 e Measuring of EVDO Signals 11 irre ti redet Forint KEEN 110 e EVDO BCGCH BemodMlalor toe et etna ener te texte dca 111 e Measurement Hates sse nene stent nnne n nnne enreer tese nnn 111 Measuring of CDMA 2000 Signals In the following a description of what kind of CDMA 2000 measurements is performed with the R amp S TSM Instruments is given What consequences arise from the implemen tation of these measurements are described too In comparison to other R amp S ViCom APIs the different measurement modes are not enabled or disabled directly The results are provided once they are available Measurement Types Basestation Identification For each measurement result an attempt is started to identify the transmitting unit as uniquely as possible Since it is not possible in all cases to do this automatically in an unambiguous way the R amp S TSM Instruments provide
236. ime R amp S ViCom is started the software automatically compares the firmware version of the connected R amp S TSME with the version currently available on the host PC If a newer version is available it is copied to and installed on the R amp S TSME Up to two previously installed firmware versions are stored as backups and maintained on the R amp S TSME Thus it is not necessary to perform firmware updates on the R amp S TSME manually Getting Started with R amp S TSME MIMO Measurements The chapter describes the first steps to do with the R amp S TSME Ultra Compact Drive Test Scanner MIMO 2x2 and 2x4 measurement mode using R amp S ViCom It is a sum mary of everything important to know to get the system running Connectivity The R amp S TSME receiver and the host computer are connected via 802 3 Gigabit Ethernet network Make sure the following requirements on your network configuration are met Host Computer Connectivity e Gigabit network interface card with Ok Jumbo Frame support 4 4 4 2 Getting Started with R amp S TSME Host computer operates in the 192 168 0 0 sub net having a different IP address than 192 168 0 2 which is the default address of the R amp S TSME Using up to two R amp S TSMEs in your application for LTE MIMO 2x2 operation is currently supported Disable the firewall In case of receiver and host computer are connected via network switch or hub these have to support 9k Jumbo Frames as well Enable flow
237. implemented e Simple ACD e Smart ACD This R amp S ViCom version does not support the R amp S TSMx R amp S ViCom ACD currently supports LTE UMTS CDMA and EVDO technologies LEM dori AAA 219 Ter AR EE 219 SUM CD t 220 e Performance REGQUINGIMEING EE 220 MN S c r 220 Programming The R amp S ViCom ACD interface can be programmed according to the R amp S ViCom pro gramming principles The installer provides a sample application SampleForViComACD cmd demonstrating the use of the ACD Simple ACD This mode simply tries scanner measurement on every possible channel of the selected frequency bands After the evaluation of all channels the ACD stops scanning and provides the results via the R amp S ViCom interface 14 1 3 General Operation This mode is useful to detect channels at one location and for starting a drive from that location assuming that the channel allocation will not change during the drive route If the primary goal of the measurement is the detection of cells and the speed of the measurement on already detected cells is of secondary interest running the ACD in simple mode is the best solution Smart ACD This mode uses the RF Power Scan The corresponding options for the R amp S TSMW R amp S TSME and R amp S ROMES have to be available The RF Power Scanner is running on Frontend 1 of the R amp S TSMW to do the spectrum measurements Based on the measured spectrum the ACD optimizes the search for c
238. ing Loading The buttons at the upper right corner are for setting saving loading serialization Press OK to save the configuration to the default configuration file LteScannerSettings bin which will be examined and loaded on program start up and dismiss the dialog box press Cancel to dismiss the dialog without saving the configurations The Load Save buttons are to load save the configurations from to a file whose path is chosen at the user s preference Request Scanner Settings Press the Request Scanner Settings button to refresh the text boxes with the current settings of the R amp S ViCom instance At the right side of the dialog box there are text boxes to configure some parameters of the scanning Request Scanner Settings Result Buffer Depth 1024 SNR threshold in dB 0 00 gt gt Additional Settings lt lt Result Buffer Depth This setting configures the maximum number of LTE measurement results The R amp S ViCom will buffer The results are buffered after the measurement is started and if they are not retrieved by any GetResult function calls and when the number of buffered results reach the number specified in this text box the earliest results will be discar ded The default value is 1024 Press the Set Result Buffer button will set this value for the R amp S ViCom SNR threshold in dB This setting specifies the SNR threshold for the demodulator Only when the calculated SNR of the signa
239. ing and the second frontend to demodulate the received WCDMA signals 5 2 Start Programming This section describes what a developer needs to do to control one R amp S TSM Instru ment unless otherwise mentioned All the functions and data structures mentioned in this section are also described in detail in the online reference manual that comes with the R amp S ViCom delivery R amp S ViCom interfaces include the following groups e Error functions common to every R amp S ViCom interface e Loader functions common to every R amp S ViCom interface e Basic functions common to every R amp S ViCom interface e Specific functions that belong to a particular R amp S ViCom interface e g the func tions of the class RohdeSchwarz ViCom WCDMA CViComWcdmaInterface User Manual 1505 1329 42 26 40 Start Programming The Error and Loader interface functions are used to manage the interface See the section On Startup for an explanation of how to use these functions The Basic and Specific interface functions carry out the tasks of setting parameters on the scanner and retrieving measurements Note that when a function returns a data structure this data is valid as long as no other interface function is called either to change settings or retrieve new information There are two mechanisms for programming e Retrieve Results via polling e Retrieve Results via callback Polling can be used in two ways You can call GetResults t
240. ing is active the first two external triggers are used to extrapolate the timestamp of the internal trigger This step is repeated when the next external triggers arrive In the sample the distance between the first and second internal trigger is increased because the third external trigger also is raised after a longer pause The fourth external trigger is fired faster and therefore the internal trigger also is fired nearly immediately In the last case a 2 1 triggering is shown The time delta between two subsequent external triggers is therefore doubled to calculate the internal trigger timestamp although the real algorithm is somewhat more complicated An interesting detail is that the fourth external trigger is ignored since the internal trigger calculated from external trigger two and three is after the one calculated from the third and fourth User Manual 1505 1329 42 26 211 Channel Power Measurements External External External External External External Trigger Trigger Trigger Trigger Trigger Trigger 1 1 Trigger External External External External External External Trigger Trigger Trigger Trigger Trigger Trigger 3 2 Trigger External External External External External External Trigger Trigger Trigger Trigger Trigger Trigger 2 1 Trigger Figure 13 5 Internal trigger calculation Until the first internal trigg
241. ion WB Highspeed 2 Frontends Activates the WB high dynamic measurements on frontend 2 only In this configuration narrowband measurements are performed on frontend 1 and wideband measurements on frontend 2 so the high est measurement rates can be achieved WB Highspeed 1 Frontend Activates only the WB high dynamic measurements on frontend 1 For scanners with a single Frontend only single R amp S TSME or R amp S TSMW with R amp S TSMW K71 single frontend option The usage of the time block depends on the scanner module so the number of output values per block depends on the module RSSI Reference Signals or MIMO Wideband Reference Signal Measurements Run on one frontend or both frontends measurements on two frontends can only be made with the R amp S TSMW K30 MIMO option The RS CINR module provides one set of measurement values per block The set can include sub band measurements and high dynamic wideband measurements Enable sub band measurements with wWidebandRsCinrMeasMode wWIDEBAND RS CINR wsub band MEASUREMENTS 1 Enable high dynamic measurements with wWidebandRsCinrMeasMode wWIDEBAND RS CINR The scanner module can measure the reference signal RO R1 R2 and R3 with either or both RF frontends of the scanner Which reference signals shall be measured can be configured with bTransmitAntennaSelectionMask This is a bitmask where each bit represents an eNodeB s antenna port Measuring of LTE
242. ion Embedded IDL Advanced Command Line Browse Information Build Events Custom Build Step Web Deployment Output File Override the default output file name JOUT File Abbrechen bemehmen Hilfe 5 5 4 Working with the Code The first steps when setting up a R amp S ViCom application is to select which technology you want to use depending on your scanner only some parts of the ViCom functional ity can be used and include the related header files In the automatically generated main cpp file you find a minimal R amp S ViCom sample program that you can use as starting point for a simple console application The code is shown here include stdafx h include lt windows h gt include ViComRS232Interface h J EKK K K k k k k K k k k k K k k k k k k k k k k k A k k k k k k k k k k k kk k k k kk k k k kk kk k k k kk kk k kk kk kkk kk kk kkk kkk f int _tmain int argc _TCHAR argv CViComError cError CViComLoader lt CViComRS232Interface gt cLoader cLoader Connect cError CViComRS232Interface pInterface cLoader GetInterface cError TODO specify measurement settings 5 5 5 5 5 6 Setting up a Custom Project TODO start measurement TODO stop measurement cLoader Disconnect cError return 0 Important things to notice are the header files that are included at the very beginning of the file The lt windows h gt file is required for the definition of th
243. ion of BTS synchronization and interference analysis Time msec e Figure 12 5 Power profile for a single base station in lab environment The blue line indicates the beginning of slot 0 The DwPTS burst level is approx 6 dB lower than the downlink slots The uplink slots are not used E a User Manual 1505 1329 42 26 204 R amp S ViCom R amp S ViCom TD SCDMA Technology Time msec Figure 12 6 Power profile from a live measurement with different levels for the slots User Manual 1505 1329 42 26 205 Channel Power Measurements 13 R amp S ViCom CW Technology 13 1 In this chapter the Receiver Channel Power measurement module is described Chan nel power measurement is similar to the inband power measurement available in the GSM network scanner but it can be configured in a more flexible way using the CW measurements API Like in the previous chapters this one begins with the description of the basic process ing and calculation issues that arise in the different measurement modes It is impor tant to understand these basics to make the best use of the capabilities of the device The two subsequent chapters cover the sample application deployed with the R amp S ViCom shipment The R amp S TSML model capable of performing channel power measurements is the R amp S TSML CW In the subsequent sections this CW module and the Receiver Chan nel Power Measurements API are used to describe the technology and progr
244. is described This must be seen as a quick reference on these topics For a more decent description of these issues the R amp S TSMW User Manual must be consulted see References 3 le ET EEN 251 e Option Handing iii tar rr tl da Dl rr 251 e Firmware Update rete rrt SEENEN NEES EE dE 253 R amp S TSMW Configuration 18 2 1 System Information If the web page can be opened it should look similar to the one depicted below There are several basic information like the software version numbers and the current IP configuration shown on the first page Within that page the IP address can be changed Please be aware that changing the IP address might require additional changes on the host PC resp might also disable the possibility to connect to the R amp S TSMW at all if the IP address is always in use for example v s x soos Go ERSTEN File Edit View Favorites Tools Help d d sep rau 1503 3001K02 100009 m d gt Ep Page Eh Toos gt R amp s TSMW R amp S TSMW 1503 3001K02 Serialnumber 100009 System Configuration Firmware Configuration Hardware Configuration MAC Address 9E 8F 19 B8 90 00 Firmware Version 01 07 Beta 13 Hardware Code 000 Calibration Version 01 01 Software Version 01 03 06 00 Change Index 01 05 Calibration Read Code 0102 FPGA Version 00 00 00 00 Production Date 2008 08 01 Calibration Date 2009 08 18 PCB Version 03 Network Configuration IP
245. is formula dPower i 100 0 pcMeasResult pSpectrumResult sMinPowerValueInDBm100 0 5 pcMeasResult pSpectrumResult pbBuffer i Measuring of GSM Signals pbBuffer ii E i a sMinPowerValuelnDBm100 10132 80 32 69 82 95 32 E 79 82 51 82 57 82 85 82 97 32 90 82 wSubSpectrumCount gt wCountOfPowerValuesPerSubSpec freq freq freq Figure 7 4 Spectrum Result Interpretation The sub spectrums contain the measured channels in the same order as they are given in the structure ListExecutedMeasSpec That means the first wCountOfPowerValuesPerSubSpec values in the buffer belong to the first entry in ListExecutedMeasSpec the second set to the second entry and so on 7 1 2 6 Channel Power Measurement The power measurement mode that is enabled per default calculates one characteristic power value per every 50 msec circa Another mode to measure much more such power values is the channel power measurement mode In this mode it is possible to get a very high resolution and therefore a big amount of data from the scanner A main concept in the channel power measurement mode is the reduction of the avail able signal bandwidth Instead of using all power values from the 200 kHz bandwidth of a GSM channel the GSM network scanner only uses the data from the 156 kHz inter val around the center frequency This approach removes the influence of adjacent channels on the channel th
246. ished regularly the safety instructions of the manufacturer of the hazardous substances or fuels and the applicable regional waste disposal regulations must be observed Also observe the relevant safety instructions in the product documentation The improper disposal of hazardous substances or fuels can cause health problems and lead to environmental damage For additional information about environmental protection visit the Rohde amp Schwarz website Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Es imprescindible leer y cumplir las siguientes instrucciones e informaciones de seguridad El principio del grupo de empresas Rohde 8 Schwarz consiste en tener nuestros productos siempre al d a con los est ndares de seguridad y de ofrecer a nuestros clientes el m ximo grado de seguridad Nuestros productos y todos los equipos adicionales son siempre fabricados y examinados seg n las normas de seguridad vigentes Nuestro sistema de garant a de calidad controla constantemente que sean cumplidas estas normas El presente producto ha sido fabricado y examinado seg n el certificado de conformidad de la UE y ha salido de nuestra planta en estado impecable seg n los est ndares t cnicos de seguridad Para poder preservar este estado y garantizar un funcionamiento libre de peligros el usuario deber atenerse a todas las indicaciones informaciones de seguridad y notas de alerta El grupo de empresas Rohde amp Schwarz est siempre a su disposici n en caso
247. k that the R amp S TSM Instrument has stopped measuring call the R amp S ViCom Basic interface function HasMeasurementStoppea In the following example HasMeasurementStopped is called with a timeout of 5 seconds The application thus checks to see if measurement stops within 5 seconds bool pbStopped myViComIF gt GetBasicInterface HasMeasurementStopped myViComError 5000 R amp S ViCom Programming with the R amp S ViCom Interface 5 2 6 Connect Disconnect Scanner The R amp S ViCom loader function Disconnect releases all resources used by R amp S ViCom and resets the R amp S TSM Instrument myViComLoader Disconnect myViComError 5 3 Differences between the R amp S TSMx Family and R amp S TSMW TSME The main interface functions can be used for all R amp S TSM Instruments supported by the R amp S ViCom However there are a few but subtle differences that are revealed here 5 3 1 Selecting Device The R8S TSMx Family models are identified by their position in the FireWire chain The SetReceiverIndex function can be used to load the R amp S TSMx Family model When working with the R amp S TSMW this function should not be used It will return an error code 129 if called in this case indicating that calling that function does not change anything This also applies to the SetConnectedReceivers method which only makes sense in the context of the R amp S TSMx Family The R amp S TSMW TSME on the other hand
248. l is higher than the value specified here the demodulator will demod ulate the signal The default value is 0 dB Press the Set BCH Demodulator button to set this value for the R amp S ViCom Additional Channel Settings Press the Additional Settings button to open the Additional Channel Settings dialog box This dialog box offers many additional settings for the channels The dialog box can be used to configure one single channel or all channels GUI Sample Application Additional Channel Settings Frequency Settings OFDM Symbols Per Slot perecer Average Meas Rate Hz ET UL DL Mask Mo Mi Saz Bo m E Signal Acquisition Time ms fin Bandwidth Control Mode Number of Resource Blocks 50 Rz S Sync to P Sync Ratios Type list m Count 2 List of Values 0 6000 0 0000 0 0000 1 0000 2 0000 3 0000 RS CINR Channel Model Delayed Spread ns 3000 Max Speed km h 100 Wideband RS CINR Settings Average Meas Rate Hz 1 000000 Resource Blocks in Subband pi IV Force No Gap Min No of Ref Symbols CON Max No of Accumulations A Max No of eNodeBs mmm Min Center RSRP dBm 1 00 Max RSRP Difference dB 100 00 Min S SYNC CINR dB 0 00 FE Mask vi Ta Transmit Antenna Mask ivo M1 M2 ma Dr Ts Do 17 RSSI Settings RSSI Meas Time ms i o Spectrum Meas Time ms all
249. lar basis to ensure that they are in proper operating condition By taking appropriate safety measures and carefully laying the power cable ensure that the cable cannot be damaged and that no one can be hurt by for example tripping over the cable or suffering an electric shock 1171 0000 42 08 Page 3 Basic Safety Instructions The product may be operated only from TN TT supply networks fuse protected with max 16 A higher fuse only after consulting with the Rohde amp Schwarz group of companies Do not insert the plug into sockets that are dusty or dirty Insert the plug firmly and all the way into the socket provided for this purpose Otherwise sparks that result in fire and or injuries may occur Do not overload any sockets extension cords or connector strips doing so can cause fire or electric shocks For measurements in circuits with voltages Vims gt 30 V suitable measures e g appropriate measuring equipment fuse protection current limiting electrical separation insulation should be taken to avoid any hazards Ensure that the connections with information technology equipment e g PCs or other industrial computers comply with the IEC 60950 1 EN 60950 1 or IEC 61010 1 EN 61010 1 standards that apply in each case Unless expressly permitted never remove the cover or any part of the housing while the product is in operation Doing so will expose circuits and components and can lead to injuries fire or dama
250. late to the result However this case may only occur rarely Most of the time the result will be created from a set of sweeps Since there is no unique algorithm to perform such a transformation the R amp S ViCom RF Scan Technol ogy interface provides many configuration options Data for a frequency spectrum may be requested when one of the conditions below is valid e No sweep data is available at the R amp S TSM Instruments In that case the response has to be postponed until data is available When another result is requested while the first one is waiting the second request will not be answered separately So one important consequence of this is that there might be fewer results that requests e One sweep is available This simple case can be translated easily into a result Nevertheless it s not that simple the frequency spectrum might be converted into a channel spectrum e Atleast two sweeps are available in the R amp S TSM Instrument cache In such a case all the raw measurements have to be combined into one spectrum There are several possible ways to do this so the user can choose how this actually done For example data for a single frequency can be the maximum of the set of power values All these scenarios are shown in the figure below On the left side four user requests are depicted in their order of occurrence An internal timer is started to issue all these requests in regular intervals On the right side sweep
251. less you do specific measurement value requests 11 3 1 5 Step 5 Define Specific Values For each logical receiver you can define up to ten different derived results from the scanning process Each of these derived results can be requested in parallel Such a result is called derived because the raw measurement values from the R amp S TSM Instrument can be post processed to filter reduce and prepare the measurement results in a more convenient form refer to Measurement Controls Sample Application Reqestidentfier fo y 0 Count of Requests DN Time Between in ms wo Freq Postprocess D Min Freq in MHz 800000000 Max Freq in MHz 2200000000 Count of Display Lines po Freq Detector 2 Filter Tag Io Figure 11 11 General derived result settings The figure above shows some of the settings you can specify for a derived request Each different post process is identified by the number shown in the combobox For our example we create two request identifiers for the first logical device Make sure that both the Power Scanner Identifier and the Request Identifier are set to zero Enter the values 2 1000 0 100 500 5 into the fields Count of Requests Time Between in ms Freq Postprocess Min Max Freq in MHz and Count of Display Lines Press the Request Specific Derived Result button to tell the scanner to record measurements and prepare them Switch the request identifier to 1 and enter 10 100 0 600 700
252. ll the installed OptionKeys and the expiry date of time limited keys If that list is empty and the program indicates No device key has been found circled in red in following figure all the available options are enabled with application file cod ing Instruments without installed device key require the installation of option keys Installed option files for measuring in different technologies using different R amp S TSMx Family instruments should be as follows Phylis modules R amp S TSML W R amp S TSMU W CDMA 3GPP measuring without BCH Demodulator ViComWCDMA dll 11 31 locked W CDMA 3GPP measuring with BCH Demodulator ViComWCDMA dll 11 14 31 34 locked UmtsDemodulator dll CDMA2000 measuring ViComCdma dll 12 32 locked GSM Network Scanner measuring ViComGsm dll 13 33 locked Program Exit The Disconnect TSMx button of the TsmxOptionKeyInstaller utility can be used to stop the connection with the connected instrument s This will initialize every connec ted R amp S TSMx Family instrument to reboot Afterwards press Exit to quit the program or Connect TSMx to connect the instru ments again Installing the R amp S TSMx Family Windows Driver Manually You need to install the Windows driver manually before a connection to an R amp S TSMx Family instrument can be made If the ViCom exe installer file was run onto your C drive the executable TSMXDriver
253. lowing safety instructions Using the product requires technical skills and in some cases a basic knowledge of English It is therefore essential that only skilled and specialized staff or thoroughly trained personnel with the required skills be allowed to use the product If personal safety gear is required for using Rohde amp Schwarz products this will be indicated at the appropriate place in the product documentation Keep the basic safety instructions and the product documentation in a safe place and pass them on to the subsequent users Observing the safety instructions will help prevent personal injury or damage of any kind caused by dangerous situations Therefore carefully read through and adhere to the following safety instructions before and when using the product It is also absolutely essential to observe the additional safety instructions on personal safety for example that appear in relevant parts of the product documentation In these safety instructions the word product refers to all merchandise sold and distributed by the Rohde amp Schwarz group of companies including instruments systems and all accessories For product specific information see the data sheet and the product documentation Safety labels on products The following safety labels are used on products to warn against risks and dangers Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning Notice general danger location O ON OFF Power Observe product documentation
254. ly named button If you now click the Get Result Counters button regularly you will find that new data is collected after the measurement has started e Fetch the results with Get 100 Results so that if one of the store options was selected and the Add SIB Text checkbox was marked Display the output file using the View button The file is stored in the ViCom root dir as C RuS ViCom_ lt version gt bin LogFiles ViComMeasurements txt In the opened text file there should be some decoded SIB 3 message that was defined above if the demodulation could be done within the 100 results You can search for L3 in the file to find demodulation results faster WCDMA BCH Demodulation El ViComMeasurements txt WordPad File Edit view Insert Format Help Dee 466 a e B TimeDelayInCirSamples 2980 PeakPower in 0 01dBm 8429 SCHPowerValues in O 01dBm sInbandPower 7622 PSCHPower 8909 SSCHPower 9043 TimeDelayInCirSamples 2984 PeakPower in O 01dBm 9495 MeasResult dwChannelIndex 3 dwPcTimeStamp 87955043ms PduResult SC 0x1030 259 0 PDU14 with 133 bits 0000100000011001000000011010011101000000000100000010001000011100000001000000100100010 011000000111101100101000001101011000010001100011 MeasResult ListOfCPichCirs dwCount O L3DecoderResulft value MasterInformationBlock mib ValueTag 2 plmn Type gsm MaP plmn Identity mec 2 6 2 Y mne D 7 A sibSb ReferenceList H H sibSb Type sysInfoTyp
255. m LTE SMeasRe sult SSignals TD LTE UL DL configu Optional Up Downlink pbUpDownLinkConfig ViCom LTE SMeasRe ration configuration used for sult SSignals SReferen the TD LTE RSRP mea ceSignal surement Configuration 0 to 6 are supported for TDD TD LTE Special sub The configuration of the pwSpecialSub ViCom LTE SMeasRe frame configuration special subframe in TD frame1 Config sult SSignals SReferen LTE is provided for sub ceSignal frame 1 TD LTE Special sub The configuration of the pwSpecialSub ViCom LTE SMeasRe frame configuration special subframe in TD frame6Config sult SSignals SReferen LTE is provided for sub ceSignal frame 6 Frame time of arrival off Time difference between pfFrameToaOffsetToP ViCom LTE SMeasRe set to PPS PPS and the start of a psinSec sult Ssignals LTE frame received by the scanner Antenna Port detection Detected transmit antenna ports of the eNodeB bDetectedTransmitAn tennaPorts ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SSignals SReferen ceSignal Measuring of LTE Signals 9 1 3 2 Channel Impulse Responses The channel impulse responses are always calculated for a 100ms block The signal processing performed on that timeframe may deliver any combination of the following two results if the signal is good enough CIR Peaks From a 100ms S Sync signal the processing algorithms in the LTE scanner module extract the CIR peaks The CIR Peaks also com
256. m RFPOWERSCAN STimeDetector etTimeDetectorType RFPOWERSCAN TIMEDET TYPE PEAK 0 the setting means that the reported value will be calculated by taking the peak over the measured values ViCom RFPOWERSCAN SFrequencyDetector eDetectorType RFPOWERSCAN FREQDET TYPE PEAK 0 the setting means that the reported value will be on the peak of the measured values ViCom REPOWERSCAN SSpectrumSettings eWindowType set this to RFPOWERSCAN WINDOWTYPE HANNING 1 This is the recommended setting for spectrum clearance General 12 R amp S ViCom TD SCDMA Technology COGS GA ean ccs m 201 e Measurement Conflgufation 5 2 2 2 c dad 202 Measurement Resulls 1 Ee tex ee REESEN AEN EE EEEE aA anna 202 12 1 General TD SCDMA is one of the third generation technologies used for mobile communication It is based on time division multiple access with downlink and uplink on the same fre quency and asymmetric configurable bandwidth distribution The chip rate is 1 28 MChip sec and the signal bandwidth approximately 1 6 MHz 12 1 4 Frame Structure The TDMA frame in the TD SCDMA System has duration of 10 ms and is divided in 2 subframes of 5 ms Frame structure for each subframe is the same amp 4 Subframe 5ms 6400chip Switching Point we fitit ite ov pig GP 96chips b p Switching Point 96chips 160chips Figure 12 1 Subframe struct
257. mber of receive bNumberOfReceiveAn ViCom LTE SMeasRe ports antenna ports used for tennas sult SMimoResult the MIMO measurement Number of MIMO TX Number of eNodeB bNumberOfTransmitAn ViCom LTE SMeasRe ports transmit antenna ports tennas sult SMimoResult used for the MIMO mea surement Building a LTE TopN View Measurement Description ViCom Name Part of ViCom struc ture LTE system bandwidth Number of resource block transmitted by the eNode or MHz wRBNumberOfBts The number of resource blocks transmitted from the eNodeB i e LTE system bandwidth in MHz when mulitplied with 200 ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SMimoResult MIMO rank 2x2 one value per RB rank of the channel matrix H matrix for MIMO 2x2 pbRankFor2x2Mimo ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SMimoRe sult SChannelMatrix MIMO rank 2x4 one value per RB rank of the channel matrix H matrix for MIMO 2x2 pbRankFor2x4Mimo ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SMimoRe sult SChannelMatrix MIMO 2x2 one value per RB channel matrix H matrix for MIMO 2x2 ber2x2MimoInDB100 Complex H matrix val Complex coefficient of pComplexCoefficient ViCom LTE SMeasRe ues h11 h12 h21 h22 the H matrix in sqrt mW dwCountOfComplex See one value per RB Coefficients SUL OU NAN METAL Channel Matrix RS RS sub band CINR psChannelMatrixCin ViCom LTE SMeasRe CINR measured combination rinDB100 sult
258. mea sured from R1 on Fron tend RF2 over the com plete system bandwidth sRSRPinDBm100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result WB RSRP TX2 RX0 dBm Wideband RSRP mea sured from R2 on Fron tend RF1 over the com plete system bandwidth sRSRPinDBm100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result 146 SSS SSS ae User Manual 1505 1329 42 26 Building a LTE TopN View Measurement Description ViCom Name Part of ViCom struc ture WB RSRP TX3 RX0 dBm Wideband RSRP mea sured from R3 on Fron tend RF1 over the com plete system bandwidth sRSRPinDBm100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result WB RSRP TX2 RX1 dBm Wideband RSRP mea sured from R2 on Fron tend RF2 over the com plete system bandwidth sRSRPinDBm100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result WB RSRP TX4 RX1 dBm Wideband RSRP mea sured from R3 on the Frontend RF2 The mea surement is performed over the complete sys tem bandwidth sRSRPinDBm100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result WB RSRP noise clip ped dBm WB RSRP noise clip ped TX0
259. measured A CDMA 2000 channel is defined by its center frequency in the R amp S ViCom API The set of PN offsets which shall be measured can be defined by enabled or disabling one of 512 boolean attrib utes in the configuration structure The PN offsets that are disabled are not used in the time estimation algorithm as potential candidates for a valid PN These settings do not influence the demodulation process so if a PN offset is not set to true in the array it might nevertheless be demodulated and reported later Velocity The R amp S TSM instruments use a fading correction algorithm that tries to minimize the effect of fading in a moving vehicle In order to make the algorithm does its job in the best way it can they need the maximum speed at which the instruments will operate The better this value will match the reality the better the algorithm will minimize the fading effects The maximum speed at which the R amp S TSM Instruments are able to operate is 300 km h or about 186 4 mph Using the SMaxVelocity structure the estimated maxi mum velocity can be set Calibration The R amp S ViCom API supports the initial calibration of the PPS Pulse Delay with R amp S TSM Instruments to improve detection speed and accuracy Therefore the value lMeasuredPPSDelayInNs parameter in the result structure can be used to specify the measured delay in the dDelayOfPPSFallingEdgeInSec configuration parame ter Such a calibration is recommended if
260. measurements In this case one measurement is provided per sub band The granularity of the sub band can be configured the finest granularity is one RB The following chart shows the concept of sub band measurements in a 3 MHz system Measuring of LTE Signals WB RS measurements per subband got 10ms 3MHz FOD S WB RS SINR Interference can be detected with WB measurements 1513 Tx Antenna 1 RO 1 Tx Antenna 2 R1 All RS measurements NB and WB separately for RO and R1 lt gt Full Bandwidth e g 3 MHz gt 180 SC RSSI WB RSRP WBRSRQ WBRS SINR Source of LTE grid http paul wad_homepage dk LTE Ite resource grid html Figure 9 2 sub band WB measuremnts The wideband sub band measurements allow to detect frequency selective interfer ence in a potential serving cell Since these measurements are done with a fine granularity e g 100 values per mea surement cycles in a 20MHz system they consume more receiver and processing resource and are therefore intended to be slower and done only on the stronger cells detected by the fast narrowband measurements Therefore some conditions can be specified to limit the measurement to stronger cells only These include e Maximum number of cells to measure on the specified channel e Minimum RSRP in dBm as reported by the narrowband scanner e Minimum RS CINR in dB reported by the narrowband scanner e Maximum RSRP difference i
261. med or can form in or on the product e g if the product has been moved from a cold to a warm environment Penetration by water increases the risk of electric shock Prior to cleaning the product disconnect it completely from the power supply e g AC supply network or battery Use a soft non linting cloth to clean the product Never use chemical cleaning agents such as alcohol acetone or diluents for cellulose lacquers Operation 1 Operating the products requires special training and intense concentration Make sure that persons who use the products are physically mentally and emotionally fit enough to do so otherwise injuries or material damage may occur It is the responsibility of the employer operator to select suitable personnel for operating the products 1171 0000 42 08 Page 4 Basic Safety Instructions 2 Before you move or transport the product read and observe the section titled Transport 3 As with all industrially manufactured goods the use of substances that induce an allergic reaction allergens such as nickel cannot be generally excluded If you develop an allergic reaction such as a skin rash frequent sneezing red eyes or respiratory difficulties when using a Rohde amp Schwarz product consult a physician immediately to determine the cause and to prevent health problems or stress 4 Before you start processing the product mechanically and or thermally or before you take it apart be sure to
262. ments are made in the R amp S ViCom is given After that the sample console application coming with the R amp S ViCom delivery for WiMAX is explained e Measuring of WiMAX Signals sss entere nnns 159 GUI ee DEE 164 10 1 Measuring of WiMAX Signals The WiMAX R amp S ViCom module offers a simple and straightforward interface to pro vide a fast synchronization if apriority knowledge about the signal is available Each result of WiMAX signals measurement is stored in some easy to understand structures for the client application to access Measuring of WiMAX Signals 10 1 1 Configuration The first step to do WiMAX measurements via the WiMAX R amp S ViCom module is to config its settings Once the WiMAX R amp S ViCom module is properly configured the cli ent application can then make subsequent API calls to retrieve the measurement results from the R amp S TSMW R amp S TSME scanner These configurations are stored in the SSettings structure which contains the following e Result Buffer Depth e Channel Settings e Demodulation Settings 10 1 1 1 Result Buffer Depth After the StartMeausrement function is called whenever there is some result sent from R amp S TSMW R amp S TSME the WiMAX ViCom module stores it into some internal FIFO First In First Out buffer Then only when the GetResult function is called the front earliest result is pop out from this buffer The size of this buffer which m
263. modulation measurements for the demodulators e g WCDMA technology SIB demodulation e Smaller management tasks e g attenuation adaption Since the R amp S TSM Instruments can be used to perform several measurement tasks in parallel and all these tasks have different timing constraints all these tasks have to be prioritized Periodic measurements have a configurable measurement rate that the scheduler tries to satisfy Until no demodulation task has to be performed the periodic measurements are done until their measurement rates have been satisfied A demodulation request overrides a periodic measurement if one is active Most demodulations have to be done at a certain time so it is necessary to perform the measurement then If nothing is left to do the receiver simply turns into idle mode until the next job is ready A sample configuration is shown in the following figure where GSM measurements have to be done at 3 Hz a WCDMA measurement at 1 Hz and 2 RF Power Scan mea Device Details surements in a second Additionally a GSM demodulation is requested during the measurement phase Periodic Measurements per second Decoder Jobs Measurement i i Figure 5 1 Scheduler Sample The scheduler performs the tasks in a sequence similar to the one depicted in the pre vious figure Since 3 GSM measurements have to be done the first one is started Next job is then to perform a RF Power Scan before a second GSM measu
264. mple of how to program a measurement appli cation Double click the SampleForViComWiMax exe file in the R amp S Vicom installation directory bin There is only one screen in the test application shown in the Figure 10 4 s SUN CONAM siii tt een ea dil teet dd Red ie n b dO e ERR RN 165 e Measurement COMMONS iia id ad 166 e View RESUS lt a ii 167 e Update GUI with Current Scanner Geitngs 168 Be ce ccr da cedo daa tad 169 EB enu iii DEORUM 169 10 2 1 GUI Sample Application Setup Connection The first action after starting the sample application should be to enter the receiver type and the IP address of the R amp S Instrument and click the Load WiMAX Scanner button highlighted below Load PN Scanner Receiver SETECUU me b s 7 Address 92 158 0 4 Figure 10 2 Dialog to load the scanner If the WiMAX scanner is connected and configured with an IP address clicking the Load WiMAX Scanner will cause the sample application to load the WiMAX R amp S ViCom Interface See Programming with the R amp S ViCom Interface for more explana tion about loading the interface If the scanner is loaded successfully information simi lar to that shown in the following figure will appear in the text box below the Demodu lator settings Note that the button is now greyed out to indicate that a device is now loaded Load WiMAX Scanner m Receiver Configuration Type rsww y Address 192 168
265. n that messages of when no RS232 API is active set this value in the R amp S TSMx Family model persistently enter mode press the Set Silent Mode button and Start Mea surement only if the measurement has been started once after the mode was changed the change will take effect The silent mode will be stored as setting in the R amp S TSMx Family model itself Even after releasing the R amp S ViCom interface or after switching the device off and on this setting is restored in the next session Therefore the value of O can be specified as well indicating that the current setting shall not be changed When the silent mode is activated the R amp S TSMx Family model indicates that mode by letting the Process State LED blink constantly when the interface is loaded and no measurement is active Overview of R amp S Remote ViCom Architecture 17 R amp S Remote ViCom Interface 17 1 e Overview of R amp S Remote ViCom Archtechre sess 232 e Usage of R amp S Remote ViCom Interface essen 233 e Example of R amp S Remote ViCom Application with R amp S TGMA 233 e Task Configuratio ssostni erret ina Std ee e ck degit eu p e on ERR TRE e RE ua xx ue 235 Overview of R amp S Remote ViCom Architecture The R amp S Remote ViCom allows the creation of applications running on measurement devices with different operating systems and programming languages Currently the R amp S Remote ViCom is only available together with a R amp
266. n SampleForViCom CDMA exe file The left side of the dialog shows a set of buttons used to perform the various operations on the R amp S TSM Instruments Many of them transfer a specific configuration setting that has been modified in the dialog to the device others control the current state i e measurement mode active or not On the right side some common settings and result viewing controls can be found Settings can be stored on the harddisk as well using the Load and Save mechanisms in that part of the dialog The biggest part of the dialog is occupied by controls that specify measurement set tings of the CDMA 2000 technology Besides the left most list of frequencies that shall be scanned a control that can be used to enable and disable the scanning of a specific PN Offset is the most obvious element 8 2 1 Sample Application for CDMA 2000 EVDO on for COMA EVDO Technology Freq MHz EVDO Index PN Offset limitation De Dum ze sl Selected Frequency index a AA E Type TSMx Address 192 168 0 2 Receiver Index 0 y Scanner Settings Scanner Frontend FE 1 7 TSMx Time Base 2 m Demodulator Settings DemodFrontend FE 1 v Result Buffer Depth 150 Measurement Rate 0 per 1000 Seconds Demodulation for CDMA S s e 3 Set Receiver Index e sn zu ELM Jes ES B EVDO Settings Aust Fading channel limitation
267. n dB to the strongest cell 2 High Dynamic wideband measurements These measurements have been introduced with ViCom 15 05 They require less receiver time and can therefore be provide at very fast speed The fastest results are achieved when the narrowband scanner runs on TSMW frontend 1 and the WB scan ner runs on TSMW frontend 2 only while sub band measurements are not active The following chart shows the concept of high dynamic WB measurements Measuring of LTE Signals 10 ms 3 MHz FDD High Dynamic WB RS measurement WB RS SINR RSRP RSRQ New in ViCom 15 05 Tx Antenna 1 RO Tx Antenna 2 R1 All RS measurements NB and WB separately for RO and R1 E GE SE pa Full Bandwidth e g 3 MHz gt 180 SC RSSI WB RSRP WB RSRQ WB RS SINR Source of LTE grid http paul wad homepage dK LTE Ite resource grid html Figure 9 3 High Dynamic WB measurements One RS measurement is provided over the complete system bandwidth This measure ment can be provided for all cells dynamic range to 20 dB while the dynamic range of the sub band measurements is limited For both modes the system will automatically calculate the required amount of signal With the functionality introduced in ViCom 15 05 the manual setting of several parame ters is no longer required As all wideband measurement relies results from the narrowband mode the narrow band mode has to be activated using the above menti
268. n the settings fields the white columns in the figure above These can be edited in the fields and sent to the scanner by clicking the corresponding Set button Note that the scanner has its own set of default values for all parameters except the frequencies The scanner will use its own default values unless they have been over ridden by interface function calls using the dialogue buttons Because there is no default value for the frequency in the scanner at least one frequency must be set using the Set Frequencies dialogue before any measurements can be made The scanner settings remain in the scanner until new interface functions are called The only exception is the settings for the BCH demodulator These settings are chan nel specific and reset to default values when the frequency settings are changed The other buttons in the figure above correspond to interface functions that deal with measurements and with unloading the scanner Start Measurement tells the system to start measuring Get Result Counters causes the current number of measurement results in the R amp S ViCom interface buffer to be displayed as well as the number of measurements that have been deleted if the buffer has overflowed GUI Sample Application Get next 100 causes the application to get the next 100 measurement results from the interface buffer The results will be written to the file VicomMeasurements in the C RuS ViCom_ lt version gt bin Lo
269. n with the acquisition time from the R amp S TSMW RSSI TS 0 Received signal strength averaged over TSO RSSI DwPTS Received signal strength averaged over the downlink sync interval RSSI UpPTS Received signal strength averaged over the uplink sync interval RSSI TS1 RSSI TS2 RSSI TS3 RSSI TS4 RSSI TS5 RSSI TS5 RSSI TS6 Receiver signal strengths averaged over the corresponding timeslots The RSSI values for different BTS s differ only in the time interval for averaging Perfectly Synchronized BTS s will have the same RSSI results The RSSI mea surement does not isolate the signal part from a single BTS RSCP PCCPCH Received code power for the PCCPCH RSSI PCCPCH Received signal strength for the PCCPCH ISCP PCCPCH Cumulated interference power for the PCCPCH C I PCCPCH Signal to Interference ratio for the PCCPCH Ec lo PCCPCH Ratio between the received signal strength averaged over the PCCPCH and PCCPCH code power RSSI Midamble RSCP Midamble Received signal strength averaged over the midamble of Slot 0 Code power in the midamble of slot 0 ISCP Midamble Cumulated interference power in the mid amble of slot 0 C I Midamble Signal to Interference ratio in the midam ble of slot 0 Ec lo Midamble Ratio between RSSI midamble and RSCP midamble Please note that for midambles there is no spreading gain
270. nano trn kann tran d doas 46 5 2 1 Prerequisites e Access to the receiver of an R amp S TSM Instrument that is the FireWire connection for the R amp S TSMx Family and LAN connection for the R amp S TSMW and R amp S TSME Visual Studio 2008 or newer Access to the header files the R amp S ViCom Interface header files that you will need to include in your project are found in the sub directory inc see the following fig ure Start Programming tete O di C OS p RuS ViCom 151 gt inc weltall Search inc D Organize v Include in library v Share with v Burn New folder v EN e ROMES Name 2 Date modified Type E Repository CNI L ViComAcdErrors h 18 12 2014 16 11 H File A dme ViComAcdInterface h 18 12 2014 16 11 H File ViComAcdlInterfaceData h 27 01 2015 09 22 H File mt ViComBasicErrors h 16 04 2015 14 44 H File r ViComBasicInterface h 26 09 2014 18 01 H File Weg ViComBasicinterfaceData h 08 06 2015 14 18 HFile e VC RED cab Li ViComCdmaErrors h 12 02 2014 15 11 H File Sy Fe QARSINT NERDAT L ViComCdmalnterface h 26 09 2014 18 01 H File i ViComCdmalnterfaceData h 12 03 2015 15 32 H File negated TM ViComCWErrors h 220330131315 HFile ViComCWinterface h 26 09 2014 18 01 H File d Gm ol o ViComCWiInterfaceData h 20 12 2013 14 15 H File GB S GR_IMAD QARSINT NET e ViComDataProcessor h 25 09 2013 18 01 HFile 06 EUR AARSINT NET ViComError h 02 06 2015
271. nce in 3GPP TS Corresponding PDU 25 133v5 x x 14 Parameters for common 10 2 48 8 17 32 and dedicated physical channel uplink outer loop power control informa tion to be used in both idle and connected mode SIB Number Contents Reference in 3GPP TS Corresponding PDU 25 133v5 x x 15 Assistance information 10 2 48 8 18 33 for UE based or UE assisted positioning methods 15 1 Assistance data for Dif 10 2 48 8 18 1 34 35 15 3 Assistance data for A GPS measurements 10 2 48 8 18 3 36 15 4 Ciphering information and assistance data for OTDOA positioning 10 2 48 8 18 4 37 15 5 Assistance data for OTDOA positioning 10 2 48 8 18 5 38 16 Radio bearer transport channel and physical channel parameters to be stored by UE in idle and connected mode for use during inter system handovers 10 2 48 8 19 39 17 fast changing parame ters for the configuration of the shared physical channels to be used in connected mode UMTS TDD systems only 10 2 48 8 20 40 18 PLMN identities of neighbouring cells used in idle mode as well as in connected mode 10 2 48 8 21 41 Index A ACD Configuration sei 221 ACD Measurements AA 222 Architecture and Functionality of the RF Scan Technology rater 174 B Building a LTE TopN View ees reri 140 D Debugging and Error Handling A 55 Debugging techniques Mess
272. nce signal RO on fron tend RF2 one value is provided per resource block pWidebandRsCinrVal ues dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result RS sub band CINR TX1 RX1 dB one value per RB RS sub band CINR measured from refer ence signal R1 on fron tend RF2 one value is provided per resource block pWidebandRsCinrVal ues dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result RS sub band CINR TX2 RX1 dB one value per RB RS sub band CINR measured from refer ence signal R2 on fron tend RF2 one value is provided per resource block pWidebandRsCinrVal ues dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result RS sub band CINR TX3 RX1 dB one value per RB RS sub band CINR measured from refer ence signal R3 on fron tend RF2 one value is provided per resource block pWidebandRsCinrVal ues dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result Number of eNodeB antenna ports Detect the number of ref erence signals transmit ted by the eNodeB up to 4 reference signals bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result WB RSSI Rx0 dBm RSSI measured over the complete system band width measured on fron
273. ncySetting SMimoSettings dwMIMO RES RANK The application provides several MIMO results per block In the TopN only one is nee ded use the following settings s MimoSettings wTimeResolutionInMs 0 Measuring of WiMAX Signals 10 R amp S ViCom WiMAX Technology WiMAX stands for Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access Based on the IEEE 802 16 standard WiMAX provides ubiquitous broadband communication ena bling cost effective access to multiple kinds of networks regardless of whether they are fixed or mobile and allowing high throughput rates by robust implementation The downlink and uplink frame structures of WiMAX are shown below OFDMA symbol number t kts 147 9 Les HK 914 30 4 32 DL burst 43 7 720 23 k 26 UL burst 1 Sin Zi Die zs EF E E subchannel logical number DL burst 6 UL burst 4 UL LLLLLLLLLELLLLLELELLLLLLELLL LLL LG G t O I l M DL TIG RIG Figure 10 1 WiMAX downlink uplink frame structures This R amp S ViCom Interface utilizes R amp S TSMW R amp S TSME to measure downlink WiMAX signals modulated using OFDMA Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access in TDD Time Division Duplex mode In the following sections the programming API Application Program Interface for R amp S TSMW R amp S TSME and the WiMAX specific measurement details are described Firstly a short introduction into which and how WiMAX measure
274. nd CINR measured from refer ence signal RO on fron tend RF1 one value is provided per resource block pWidebandRsCinrVal ues dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result RS sub band CINR TX1 RXO dB one value per RB RS sub band CINR measured from refer ence signal R1 on fron tend RF1 one value is provided per resource block pWidebandRsCinrVal ues dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result RS sub band CINR TX2 RX0 dB one value per RB RS sub band CINR measured from refer ence signal R2 on fron tend RF1 one value is provided per resource block pWidebandRsCinrVal ues dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result RS sub band CINR TX3 RX0 dB one value per RB RS sub band CINR measured from refer ence signal R3 on fron tend RF1 one value is provided per resource block pWidebandRsCinrVal ues dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result User Manual 1505 1329 42 26 154 R amp S ViCom R amp S ViCom LTE Technology Measurement Description ViCom Name Part of ViCom struc ture RS sub band CINR TXO RX1 dB one value per RB RS sub band CINR measured from refer e
275. ndId Frequency band id of the channel e pdwBandwidthInHz Bandwidth of the channel in Hz e pfRssiInDBm Last measured RSSI on this channel the value is updated each time a channel is found Only available in smart mode e pdwPcTimeStampInMs PC local time when this channel was measured the last time e bBandwidthConfirmed Status of detected bandwidth Sample Application 15 R amp S ViCom GPS As mentioned in previous chapters the R amp S TSMW R amp S TSME have a built in GPS module This chapter describes how to use this GPS receiver with the R amp S ViCom R amp S ViCom GPS implements functionality which e can retrieve data from the GPS device e send commands to the GPS device The messages from the GPS device can be interpreted to provide information such as e GPS time e Longitude e Latitude e Altitude e Satellite information Examples of the GPS functionality implemented in the R amp S ViCom are provided in this chapter The R amp S TSMW R amp S TSME should be connected and configured as described in the Appendix Appendix A R amp S TSMW Configuration No extra configuration for the GPS is required The GPS data is provided over the same IP connection as the scanner data e Sample ee en DEE 223 CMN E EE 224 15 1 Sample Application Below is a figure showing the R amp S ViCom GPS sample application As with other sam ple applications the layout consists of several parts On the left side are the gene
276. ndex the indicator of the SCH Info taken from the SCH demodulation result and the BTSs BSIC have to be given to the network scanner GSM BCH Demodulation The GSM network scanner has also the capabilities to demodulate System Information Type sent on BCH Therefore the R amp S ViCom provides an API to the demodulation functionality as described in the general section To show the usage of the API the demo application has been enhanced as shown in the Enhanced Sample Application GSM demodulator Following the description how to use the API a code listing completes the introduction into the usage of the GSM NWS API as it is the case in the other chapters The measurement results from the GSM technology demodulation process are derived using data from different time slots This is reflected in the start and stop time argu ments of the demodulation result structure T 3 1 e Sample Ap PICA e E 96 Sample Application In the middle column the two new lists can be used to enter the data requests for demodulation These lists are in System Information Type Demodulation Requests box in the following screenshot GSM BCH Demodulation r Sample Application for R amp S ViCom GSM Technology Load GSM NWS Receiver Selection Type TSMx m Address 192 168 0 2 Scanner Settings Frontend FE e Enter new line Ctrl Enter r Demodulator Settings Frontend FE 1 z Set Receiver Index Set TSMx
277. ndiente Guarde bien las informaciones de seguridad elementales as como la documentaci n del producto y entr guelas a usuarios posteriores Tener en cuenta las informaciones de seguridad sirve para evitar en lo posible lesiones o da os por peligros de toda clase Por eso es imprescindible leer detalladamente y comprender por completo las siguientes informaciones de seguridad antes de usar el producto y respetarlas durante el uso del producto Deber n tenerse en cuenta todas las dem s informaciones de seguridad como p ej las referentes a la protecci n de personas que encontrar n en el cap tulo correspondiente de la documentaci n del producto y que tambi n son de obligado cumplimiento En las presentes informaciones de seguridad se recogen todos los objetos que distribuye el grupo de empresas Rohde amp Schwarz bajo la denominaci n de producto entre ellos tambi n aparatos instalaciones as como toda clase de accesorios Los datos espec ficos del producto figuran en la hoja de datos y en la documentaci n del producto Se alizaci n de seguridad de los productos Las siguientes se ales de seguridad se utilizan en los productos para advertir sobre riesgos y peligros Conexi n a tierra El aparato est protegido en su totalidad por un aislamiento doble reforzado Conexi n a masa Distintivo de la UE para bater as y acumuladores S mbolo Significado S mbolo Significado Aviso punto de pelig
278. ned from the narrowband LTE scanner from the best received eNodeB to enable the sub band measurements Typical 10dB sMinRsCinrInDB100 The minimum required RS CINR value in 0 01 dB obtained from the narrowband LTE scanner for the eNodeB to enable the sub band measurements 9 1 2 2 d Measuring of LTE Signals Typical range 1dB or lower Wideband RSSI Module Runs on one frontend or both frontends measurements on two frontends can only be made with R amp S TSMW K30 MIMO option The RSSI module provides one measurement value per block 2 in TDD mode UL DL It is configurable if less amount of signal shall be used In addition the module provides a complete spectrum measurement of the LTE bandwidth Output RSSI Spectrum measurement for the LTE system bandwidth Enable this module with wRssiMeasMode to activate RSSI measurements for FDD TDD DL TDD UL or any combination Which scanner frontend shall be used for measurements can be configured with dwFrontEndSelectionMask see the previous section for details WB RSSI and MIMO measurements require WB RS measurements If WB RSSI or MIMO is switched on the WB RS measurements are automatically switched on as well 9 1 2 3 MIMO Scanner Configuration Measurements Using the R amp S TSMW K30 MIMO option both R amp S TSMW receive antenna ports can be utilized for Multiple Input Multiple Output MIMO LTE measurements All of the MIMO specific measurements are bas
279. ned in C RuS ViCom_ lt version gt tool TSME to check the con nectivity e The R amp S TSME does not provide a web interface like the R amp S TSMW instead use the R amp S TSME Device Manager tool If you encounter problems while connecting to the device with the R amp S TSME Device Manager tool check the firewall settings refer to troubleshooting section Guide to Solving instrument Connection Problems of the R amp S TSME User Man ual 4 4 2 R amp S ViCom Known Issues This section covers the known R amp S ViCom 15 issues workarounds and constraints e All R amp S TSME tools ViCom applications have to run in elevated mode e g the user needs administrator rights When upgrading to a new R amp S ViCom 15 package start the R amp S TSME Device Manager once which will trigger the instrument firmware update process e Do not open any R amp S TSME tools in parallel for example the R amp S TSME Device Manager and the R amp S ViCom applications e ViCom requires installed the voredist x86 2013 _0 exe Microsoft Visual C redistributable SW 4 4 3 R amp S TSME Diagnosis and Updates The R amp S TSME Device Manager allows you to do a complete diagnosis of the R amp S TSME device and to perform updates if necessary All new devices are preconfigured and specified technology and band options are already installed Only if you obtain additional software options later you have to enable the options with the corresponding software lic
280. nel is specified in addition to the EVDO channels this method is used In this way the time relationship between the different PN offsets is resolved If no additional CDMA 2000 measurements have to be performed the CDMA 2000 measurement can be disabled after the first successful demodulation This is done by setting the bStopCdma2000AfterSync attribute to true If no CDMA channel is specified another method is used to find the correct timing for EVDO measurement In this case the bStopCdma2000AfterSync attribute must not be used Time offset estimation is done in a quite different way compared to the CDMA 2000 measurements and three of the five attributes of the structure are dealing with that subject Once the signals of a basestation has been detected the scanner knows in principle when the arrival of the next information can be expected and only processes that subrange of the incoming data to find new information In regular intervals the subrange has to be extended to either find signals from new basestations or to com pensate shifts due to fading or movement of the measurement device In these cases the processing overhead is increased To save processing time two different types of subrange extensions are done A short sync and a full sync The short sync also only uses a subset of chips that are part of a PN offset timeslot The size of the subrange is specified by the dwShortSyncRangeInChips parameter and the frequency of the sho
281. ng Maybe you have not set the bUseRequestForMarker variable explicitly of the interface class In some situations this may be set to true and therefore you won t get the number of results configured in dwCountOfLinesRequested or the number of channels S User Manual 1505 1329 42 26 195 Using R amp S TSMW RF Power Scan in a Typical Drive Test Use Case 2 enabled the marker tool on my channel filtered data The marked frequency is always in the first group of channels that configured What s wrong here This is a bug in current version and will be fixed in one of the next releases If there are several sub groups configured in the channel filter that are not equidistant the marker tool will only work on the first group configured the frequency detector to return 124 lines but get sometimes multiples like 248 lines How can calculate which value belongs to which frequency then This case might occur if the time detector is configured to return all samples with ViCom RFPOWERSCAN SSpecificParameters eTimeDetector TD ALL In that situa tion there might be data from more than one sweep returned since no time aggregation is done The result therefore consists of sequences of the output of the frequency detector So the frequency of the nth entry in the result is freq n dMinFrequencyInMHz n dwCountOfDisplayLines dMaxFrequencyInMHz dMinFrequencyInMHz 11 6 Using R amp S TSMW RF Power
282. ng the buffer state with Get Result Counters the number of results specified in Result Count To Read can be removed from the buffer by pressing Get Results If the Store Results radio button is active when fetching the results they are written into the ViComMeasurements txt file stored in the C RuS ViCom_ lt version gt bin LogFiles directory The content of the file looks similar to the one shown in the following figure Sample Application File Edit View Insert Format Help De Sh 4 e 8 wFrequencyIndex wFrequencyIndex wFrequencyIndex wFrequencyIndex wFrequencyIndex wFrequencyIndex wFrequencyIndex wFrequencyIndex wFrequencyIndex MeasResult dwPcTimeStamp 378617765ms u64TSMxTimeIn40ns wFrequencyIndex wFrequencyIndex wFrequencyIndex wFrequencyIndex wFrequencyIndex wFrequencyIndex wFrequencyIndex wFrequencyIndex wFrequencyIndex wFrequencyIndex wFrequencyIndex wFrequencyIndex wFrequencyIndex wFrequencyIndex wFrequencyIndex wFrequencyIndex wFrequencyIndex wFrequencyIndex wFrequencyIndex wFrequencyIndex vFrequencyIndex wFrequencyIndex u64TSMxTimeIn40ns u64TSMxTimeIn40ns u64TSMxTimeIn40ns u64TSMxTimeIn40ns u64TSHxTimeIn40ns u64TSMxTimeIn40ns u64TSMxTimeIn40ns u64TSMxTimeIn40ns u64TSMxTimeIn40ns 26292207616 MeasResult ListOfCPichCirs dwCount 280 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 ONDAKRKHSYONHO m m Jis4TSMxTimeIn40ns
283. nna ports of the eNodeB bDetectedTransmitAn tennaPorts ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SSignals SReferen ceSignal Values provided by the wideband Scanner LTE system bandwidth Number of resource block transmitted by the eNode or MHz wRBNumberOfBts The number of resource blocks transmitted from the eNodeB i e LTE system bandwidth in MHz when mulitplied with 200 ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result WB RSRP dBm Wideband RSRP com bined from RO and R1 over the complete sys tem bandwidth sRSRPinDBm100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result WB RSRP TXO0 RXO0 dBm Wideband RSRP mea sured from RO on Fron tend RF1 over the com plete system bandwidth sRSRPinDBm100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result WB RSRP TX1 RX0 dBm WB RSRP TXO RX1 dBm Wideband RSRP mea sured from R1 on Fron tend RF1 over the com plete system bandwidth Wideband RSRP mea sured from RO on Fron tend RF2 over the com plete system bandwidth sRSRPinDBm100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort sRSRPinDBm100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result WB RSRP TX1 RX1 dBm Wideband RSRP
284. nnaPort pWidebandsub bandRSRPinDBm100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result R amp S ViCom R amp S ViCom LTE Technology Measurement Description ViCom Name Part of ViCom struc ture WB sub band RSRP TXO RX1 dBm RSRP per RB mea sured from RO on Fron tend RF2 over the com plete system bandwidth pWidebandsub bandRSRPinDBm100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result WB sub band RSRP TX1 RX1 dBm RSRP per RB mea sured from R1 on Fron tend RF2 over the com plete system bandwidth pWidebandsub bandRSRPinDBm100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result WB sub band RSRP TX2 RX0 dBm RSRP per RB mea sured from R2 on Fron tend RF1 over the com plete system bandwidth pWidebandsub bandRSRPinDBm100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result WB sub band RSRP TX3 RX0 dBm WB sub band RSRP TX2 RX1 dBm RSRP per RB mea sured from R3 on Fron tend RF1 over the com plete system bandwidth RSRP per RB mea sured from R2 on Fron tend RF2 over the com plete system bandwidth pWidebandsub bandRSRPinDBm100 dwFrontEndSel
285. not be satisfied with data from the data cache the processing is delayed until one sweep has been done and data is available again If there is a new request put into the queue the old request is cancelled and no result will be generated R amp S ViCom R amp S ViCom RF Scan and RF Power Scan Technology 11 2 Architecture and Functionality of the RF Scan Tech nology This section describes the architecture of the R amp S ViCom RF Power Technology Inter face along with the details of how the different post processing units work The main goal during the design phase was to have a simple and efficient way to make the R amp S TSM Instruments perform multiple different measurement tasks in parallel Another requirement was to provide the developer with a highly configurable system that can be used to get exactly those results one would expect without doing complex calculation manually All the abstraction layers described below were introduced to meet these goals The next section describes the system components and abstraction layers This is followed by a detailed analysis of what kind of post processing capabilities are offered e System Layers ce cech ec aoc EE ucc E Ae Y Re Aa EY ue 174 e The Post Processor Challi eet a E TEA 175 11 2 1 System Layers As mentioned above one design goal was to make parallel measurements easy and manageable So there had to be some kind of middle tier between the physical R amp S TSM Instrume
286. nstall utility R amp S TSMx OptionKeyInstaller utility The R amp S ViCom depends on the Microsoft Visual C runtime libraries for Visual Stu dio 2008 SP1 and Visual Studio 2013 The required redistributable files are located in tools vcredist x86 2013 0 exe The R amp S ViCom Interface for R amp S TSM Instruments manual and other manuals can be accessed via a shortcut in the Windows start menu Start Programs R amp S ViCom gt ViCom lt version gt With an internet browser the internal configuration web page of the R amp S TSMW can be viewed using the IP address default is 192 168 0 2 See appendix for more details 4 1 3 Installing the R amp S ViCom Interface Dataset and Demo Applications Double click the executable file RS ViCom lt version gt exe file you find in the instal lation directory e g C ViCom The setup installs the R amp S ViCom Interface dataset available test application s and instrument utilities including the OptionKeylnstaller and IEEE 1394 device driver instal ler If the standard instructions are followed a RuS directory will be created 4 1 3 1 R amp S ViCom Interface Files C Namespaces are used for the R amp S ViCOm interface in general and for each tech nology interface in particular The ViCom interface is inside the RohdeSchwarz ViCom namespace with nested namespaces for every specific interface All data structures contained in interface classes are part of the RohdeSch
287. nt e Allocation Start Time e No OFDMA Symbols UL MAP also contains some lEs of which we are interested in the CDMA BR CDMA ranging whose UIUC is 12 It contains the following information e OFDMA Symbol Offset e Subchannel Offset e No OFDMA Symbols e No Subchannels e Ranging Method e Dedicated Ranging Indicator Compressed Map In addition to the standard DL MAP and UL MAP formats described above there are also Compressed Maps The presence of the Compressed DL MAP format is indicated Measuring of WiMAX Signals by the contents of the most significant three bits of the first data byte When this combi nation of three bits is set to 110 an invalid combination for a standard header in the downlink the compressed DL MAP format is present A compressed UL MAP shall only appear after a compressed DL MAP The presence of the compressed UL MAP is indicated by a bit in the compressed DLMAP data structure Compressed DL Map The Compressed DL MAP presents the same information as the standard format with one exception In place of the DL MAP s 48 bit Base Station ID parameter the com pressed format provides a subset of the full value i e Operator ID and Sector ID The Operator ID holds the 8 LSBs of the 24 MSBs of the 48 bit Base Station ID parameter and the sector ID holds the 8 LSBs of the 48 bit Base Station ID parameter When the compressed format is used the full 48 bit Base Station ID parameter shall be pub lished in
288. nt and the object that can be used to retrieve measurements For each physical R amp S TSM Instrument multiple logical devices in the software can exist These logical devices are called RF Power Scan Technology They all run in their own designated thread in which they process the incoming results from the R amp S TSM Instrument RF Power Scan Technology has some basic configuration attributes among them the frequency range that is scanned and the derived result buffer Once a RF Scan Technology object has started communication with the R amp S TSM Instrument it is able to process the incoming measurement results To prepare the raw measurement data for analysis developer must use a so called derived result to request data Such a derived result monitors the data in the RF Scan Technology over some defined time interval It extracts and processes those measurement data that is required to fulfil the request constraints Once a raw measurement data called sweep has been pro cessed the result is stored in the RF Power Scan Technology result buffer From there you can get them via the R amp S ViCom API asynchronously Since there might be different measurement task at one time one RF Power Scan Technology object can handle up to ten derived result requests in parallel The figure below shows this system architecture and the interaction Note that you can also have more than one RF Power Scan Technology object running in the so called Sweep
289. nt values from which one must be chosen have the same frequency The following algorithms are available in brackets numerical values are given to use them in the sample application Max Peak 0 The maximum value from all power values inside the data set for the frequency channel e Auto Peak 2 Maximum and minimum value are used So the result of the request will be twice the number of values from the spectrum channel filter e Min Peak 3 The minimum value is used analogue to the Max Peak e RMS 1 The root mean square value is calculated of all input values to retrieve one output value The original power values have to be converted into Watt internally to do this calcula tion This conversion might result in small numerical errors e All 5 All values are used and returned as a list of measurement values in one chunk So if data is available from more than one sweep the result consists of a series of single results For example the output of a frequency detector post proc ess might be doubled etc when two sweeps were made and all raw data shall be used e Histogram 4 The RF Power Scan Technology interface provides the possibility to return a histogram where for each frequency power value or channel power value the number of occurrences in a set of measurements is returned The result has to be interpreted as a two dimensional array where the columns reflect the fre quencies or channels and the rows spe
290. nter in the display or a key on the device or on a keyboard Key to Technical Terms 2 Important Notes In this document the name R amp S TSM Instruments stands for e R amp S TSMx Family R amp S TSML models R amp S TSMM R amp S TSMQ R amp S TSMU e R amp S TSMW e R amp S TSME Differences in handling between the R amp S TSMW and R amp S TSME and the R amp S TSMx Family on the another hand are mentioned in the chapters directly 2 1 References The R amp S TSM Instruments manuals may be found on the CD ROM accompanying the instrument 1 R amp S TSML Operating Manual R amp S TSMU Q Operating Manual R amp S TSMW Operating Manual R amp S TSME User Manual 2 3 4 5 R amp S TSMA User Manual 6 R amp S ROMES Coverage Measurement Software Online Help 7 3GPP TS 21 905 v5 x x Technical Terms and Abbreviations 8 3GPP TS 24 008 Mobile radio interface Layer 3 specification 9 3GPP TS 25 101 v5 x x User Equipment Radio Transmission and Reception FDD 10 3GPP TS 25 105 Base Station BS radio transmission and reception TDD 11 3GPP TS 25 215 v5 x x Physical Layer Measurements FDD 12 3GPP TS 25 331 v5 x x Radio Resource Control Protocol Specification 13 3GPP TS 36 331 E UTRA Radio Resource Control RRC 14 IEEE Std 802 16 2009 Air Interface for Broadband Wireless Access Systems 2 2 Key to Technical Terms Abbreviation Meaning A GPS Assisted GPS BCD Binary Coded Decimal Key to Technical Te
291. nts as PN Scanner trying to initialize the R amp S ViCom in the second application it will fail So be sure no other program uses the WCDMA R amp S ViCom Interface in paral lel 6 3 3 Frequently Asked Question This section explains some of the most common questions that arise when using the ViCom BCH demodulator They don t have any particular order so skip through them when you encounter a problem maybe it s one of the problems other people already had Arethere any other representation layouts other than the string format Which ones are ASN 1 compli ant The ViCom API returns a string formatted version of the data according to the formatting rules defined in ASN 1 specification Additionally some prefixes are used to distinguish different versions of the UMTS RRC message standard r3 for Release 99 r5 or r6 when necessary There is no other mean ingful form of the data returned from the ViCom library except the raw byte stream Is the LAC parameter in the SBchCellIdentification structure filled at any time Itis only provided if SIB 1 has been demodulated which contains the LAC don t get any results although configured some PDUs to be demodulated Even the MIB is not repor ted What s wrong WCDMA BCH Demodulation Please check that your configuration allows the reporting of SIB 3 for that channel You can verify this by checking if a PDU 17 is set either to mode 0 or 2 in the demo application If n
292. o requiere instrucciones especiales y una alta concentraci n durante el manejo Debe asegurarse que las personas que manejen el producto est n a la altura de los requerimientos necesarios en cuanto a aptitudes f sicas ps quicas y emocionales ya que de otra manera no se pueden excluir lesiones o da os de objetos El empresario u operador es responsable de seleccionar el personal usuario apto para el manejo del producto Antes de desplazar o transportar el producto lea y tenga en cuenta el cap tulo Transporte Como con todo producto de fabricaci n industrial no puede quedar excluida en general la posibilidad de que se produzcan alergias provocadas por algunos materiales empleados los llamados al rgenos p ej el n quel Si durante el manejo de productos Rohde amp Schwarz se producen reacciones al rgicas como p ej irritaciones cut neas estornudos continuos enrojecimiento de la conjuntiva o dificultades respiratorias debe avisarse inmediatamente a un m dico para investigar las causas y evitar cualquier molestia o da o a la salud Antes de la manipulaci n mec nica y o t rmica o el desmontaje del producto debe tenerse en cuenta imprescindiblemente el cap tulo Eliminaci n protecci n del medio ambiente punto 1 Ciertos productos como p ej las instalaciones de radiocomunicaci n RF pueden a causa de su funci n natural emitir una radiaci n electromagn tica aumentada Deben tomarse todas las medidas necesarias
293. o retrieve results on the R amp S ViCom interface The measurements of the R amp S TSM Instruments may be retrieved regularly from the R amp S ViCom buffer The requesting function is able to sleep for up to a specified timeout period in case no results are available in the buffer When measurements are being made and read regularly this has the effect of synchronizing the measurement requests to the incoming data Another way of polling is to call GetResultCounters and results are available to call GetResult repeatedly for the number of results reported The calling thread will be blocked while R amp S ViCom waits for the measurement func tion to return but CPU resources will not be used up by repeated function calls To use callback you have to use RegisterResultDataListener to connect a callback function to the mechanism which provides any kind of measurement results directly All functions are provided in two variants with or without an explicit CViComError parameter Functions without error parameter throw an exception which provides the CViComError o gelu EDITO DII LL LLLI 41 On Startup EE 42 e R amp S TSM Instruments Management FuUNcCtiONS ccconoocicccnnnocnnncnnnncnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnn nos 44 e Reading and Changing E e EE 44 e Getting Measurements ccccceccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaneaeeeeeeeeseeeesecqqeaeeaeeeeeeeeeneeseeees 44 e Connect Disconnect Scanner eee ceseeseeeee e
294. od ulation section The value 4 allows fast and highly sensitive detection of pilots and might therefore be a good default setting Performing Measurements To perform measurements with the demo application some steps must be performed in a specific sequence If you follow the list of actions described below this should help you to circumvent pitfalls when programming your own applications with the API 1 Load the R amp S TSM instrument by clicking the Load PN Scanner button Assure that the driver is loaded successfully and information from the loaded instrument is shown in the box below Click the buttons Set Receiver Index Set TSMx Time Base Set Result Buffer and Set Rate to apply the related settings shown on the right hand side of the dialog Change them before clicking the buttons if you want different values than the defaults to be applied Enter the frequencies that shall be measured in the appropriate list You can add multiple frequencies by pressing lt Ctrl gt lt Enter gt to add a new line to the list The channel indices are optional you can omit them to let the sample application cre ate them automatically In the same step you have to define which PN offsets shall be detected using the time estimation result This does not influence demodulation so if you choose that all pilots shall be demodulated setting 4 in the related field then each PN offset should at some point be the result of a successful demod
295. ode of the RS232 API might still be turned on In that case a firmware update can be started R amp S TSMW Configuration 7 Press the installation button showing the selected firmware version A progress view window is shown r E z FT TSMx Firmware Installation 3 TSMx Firmware Installation Trying TSMx connection TSMx connection successful Firmware 12 72 selected located in C RuS ViCom_14 40 Tools TSMxFirmwarelnstall Firmware 12 72 Firmware file check OK Firmware now is being installed Do NOT interrupt until complete Installation File stored on TSMx flash memory File stored on TSMx flash memory 8 When the installation is finished reboot your R amp S TSMx Family instrument man ually to really apply the update to all parts of the software It is essential to reboot the R amp S TSMx Family instrument after the firmware udgrade Otherwise some new functionality might not work correctly 18 2 R amp S TSMW Configuration The R amp S TSMW does not come with a desktop utility to install software options on the device or to perform firmware updates It offers a configuration web page similar to the configuration tools of DSL routers for example That page can be found when entering the IP address of the device into the address bar of a web browser 192 168 0 2 is the default address In the following sections a short overview of the functionality and information offered within that web page
296. of accidents must be observed in all work performed 1 Unless otherwise specified the following requirements apply to Rohde amp Schwarz products predefined operating position is always with the housing floor facing down IP protection 2X use only indoors max operating altitude 2000 m above sea level max transport altitude 4500 m above sea level A tolerance of 10 shall apply to the nominal voltage and 5 to the nominal frequency overvoltage category 2 pollution degree 2 2 Do not place the product on surfaces vehicles cabinets or tables that for reasons of weight or stability are unsuitable for this purpose Always follow the manufacturer s installation instructions when installing the product and fastening it to objects or structures e g walls and shelves An installation that is not carried out as described in the product documentation could result in personal injury or even death 3 Do not place the product on heat generating devices such as radiators or fan heaters The ambient temperature must not exceed the maximum temperature specified in the product documentation or in the data sheet Product overheating can cause electric shock fire and or serious personal injury or even death Electrical safety If the information on electrical safety is not observed either at all or to the extent necessary electric shock fire and or serious personal injury or death may occur 1 Prior to switching on the product always ensur
297. om struc ture WB RSRP noise clip ped TX0 RX1 dBm Noise clipped RSRP value based on the wide band reference signal power measurement in 0 01 dB For this value the measured RS CINR was taken into account to correct the RSRP result regarding noise and interference Mea sured from RO on Fron tend RF2 over the com plete system bandwidth sNoiseClippedRSR PinDBm100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result WB RSRP noise clip ped TX1 RX1 dBm Noise clipped RSRP value based on the wide band reference signal power measurement in 0 01 dB For this value the measured RS CINR was taken into account to correct the RSRP result regarding noise and interference Mea sured from R1 on Fron tend RF2 over the com plete system bandwidth sNoiseClippedRSR PinDBm100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result WB RSRP noise clip ped TX2 RX0 dBm Noise clipped RSRP value based on the wide band reference signal power measurement in 0 01 dB For this value the measured RS CINR was taken into account to correct the RSRP result regarding noise and interference Mea sured from R2 on Fron tend RF1 over the com plete system bandwidth sNoiseClippedRSR PinDBm100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Resul
298. omputer Settings for the connection are Baud rate 115200 8 bit no parity 1 stop bit 8 N 1 A stream of log information comes automatically when the R amp S TSMx Family instru ment is running It can be read with a third party application like HyperTerminal or savedin a log file by your application 4 3 2 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 2 Diagnostics Information Managing more than one R amp S TSM Instrument R amp S TSMx Family Receivers Up to 3 R amp S TSMx Family receivers may be connected in series via the 2 IEEE 1394 connectors on the rear panel and used to take simultaneous measurements For example one instance of the connected R amp S Instruments could be used as a GSM network scanner one as a PN scanner and one as a CW receiver The position of an instance in the cascade is irrelevant for its use just check whether the instance is equipped with the required options R amp S TSMx 1 R amp S TSMx 2 R amp S TSMx 3 receiver receiver receiver N t Firewire connections Figure 4 1 Three R amp S TSMx Family receivers connected to one control PC Short interruptions of the IEEE1394 connection are tolerated However if new R amp S TSMx Family instruments are connected to the FireWire or if an instance of the R amp S TSMx Family instrument is switched off then the R amp S ViCom interface must be re loa ded While the interface is loading the connected R amp S TSMx Family instruments must not be switched off disconnected or reor
299. on below for a more detailed discussion By default only SCH measurements are enabled e By pressing Start Measurement the measurement starts e To fetch some results check the number of result available and transfer some of them to the PC using the Get Result Counter and Get Results buttons 7 2 2 Specifying Measurement Details Most of the settings necessary to define the different measurement tasks which have been explained in the previous chapter must be setup in a special dialog that is shown in Measurement details dialog The same dialog is used to initialize the measurement details before a measurement is started and when the measurement configuration is changing while the R amp S TSM Instruments are active Slight differences concerning the buttons at the bottom of the dialog can be seen when comparing the dialogs but the major part of the dialog is consistent To show the dialog press Setup measurement details for start of measurement before you press the Start Measurement button Once the measurement is active the button Redefine measurement details during measurement can be used The configuration should be straightforward after the previous chapter has been read The input fields reflect the fields in the C structures for many parts of the SMeasurementDetails Besides the settings for the spectrum and channel power measurement modes the dialog also provides a way to enable and disable the mea surement tasks On
300. on settings before a measurement is started using the upper list in the BCH DemodulationSettings panel e Define demodulation commands during measurement in the lower list How to use that controls see Chapter 6 2 Sample Application on page 60 and Chapter 7 3 GSM BCH Demodulation on page 96 Read these sections to find out the demodulator configuration R amp S ViCom R amp S ViCom CDMA EVDO Technology 8 3 Measuring of EVDO Signals 8 3 1 The EVDO measurement capabilities are embedded within the R amp S ViCom API CDMA 2000 EVDO technology measurements Only a few additional control settings are required in order to do a proper setup of an EVDO measurement The basic initialization has to be done as shown in the CDMA 2000 example However there are two major differences e Frequencies that shall be interpreted as EVDO for measurement have to be marked as such Therefore the bIsEvdoFrequency attribute has to be set to TRUE e Due to the fact that the measurement is done in a different way compared to the CDMA 2000 measurement the EVDO settings that control the measurement algo rithms slightly differ A special settings structure is available to control all EVDO related parameters Users should specify the content of the SEvdoControlSettings structure The SEvdoControlSettings Structure The correct timing for EVDO measurement can be found by synchronizing to a CDMA channel If at least one CDMA chan
301. oned settings 9 1 2 Wideband Measurements Configuration The WB measurements offer the possibility to activate independently several measure ments RSSI Reference Signals and MIMO The WB measurements work on blocks of automatically configured length see before of received signal that is processed by the scanner module for RSSI Refer ence Signals and MIMO To adjust the speed of the measurement the number of blocks per 1000 seconds can be configured dAvgBlockCountPer1000Sec The maximum rate is limited to 100000 corresponding to 100 measurements per second Note that the rate config ured here is the target rate the achievable speed strongly depends on the settings 9 1 2 1 Measuring of LTE Signals The following use cases can be implemented in a drive test SW for example as mea surement modes or templates selectable by the user depending on the measurements that the user wants to achieve Usecase Meaning NB only No wideband measurements focus on cell detection only narrowband RS measurement sufficient MIMO Activate all possible measurements on both fron tends MIMO sub band in finest resolution high dynamic Provides the most detailed insight to the network but is slowest WB sub band Activates all possible measurements but no MIMO sub band in finest resolution high dynamic Useful for single RX scanner like single R amp S TSME or R amp S TSMW with R amp S TSMW K71 single receiver opt
302. onexi n se debe poder alcanzar f cilmente y debe estar siempre bien accesible Si p ej el enchufe de conexi n a la red es el dispositivo de desconexi n la longitud del cable de conexi n no debe superar 3 m Los interruptores selectores o electr nicos no son aptos para el corte de la red el ctrica Si se integran productos sin interruptor en bastidores o instalaciones se deber colocar el interruptor en el nivel de la instalaci n No utilice nunca el producto si est da ado el cable de conexi n a red Compruebe regularmente el correcto estado de los cables de conexi n a red Aseg rese mediante las medidas de protecci n y de instalaci n adecuadas de que el cable de conexi n a red no pueda ser da ado o de que nadie pueda ser da ado por l p ej al tropezar o por un choque el ctrico 1171 0000 42 08 Page 10 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Solamente est permitido el funcionamiento en redes de alimentaci n TN TT aseguradas con fusibles de 16 A como m ximo utilizaci n de fusibles de mayor amperaje solo previa consulta con el grupo de empresas Rohde 8 Schwarz Nunca conecte el enchufe en tomas de corriente sucias o llenas de polvo Introduzca el enchufe por completo y fuertemente en la toma de corriente La no observaci n de estas medidas puede provocar chispas fuego y o lesiones No sobrecargue las tomas de corriente los cables alargadores o las regletas de enchufe ya que esto podr a causar fuego o c
303. or GUI Sample Application Figure 10 6 Result viewer A sample of a measurement file is shown in the following figure For an explanation of the fields listed see section 5 ViComdata fields and the SMeasResult structure ViComWiMax GUI Measurements txt Notepad Log File of vicom wimax scanner Measurement Result 1 Channel Index Center Frequency Nominal Bandwidth D 2 657e 009 HZ 10000000 Hz FFT size 1024 ICP Ratio 8 Frame Rate 200 Hz Segment Measurement 0 Preamble Index 60 1 28 31 93 dBm 26 4 dB Measurement Result 2 0 2 657 009 HZ 10000000 Hz 1024 Nominal Bandwidth FFT size CP Ratio 8 Frame Rate 200 Hz Segment Measurement 0 Preamble Index 60 segment 1 uum 28 32 02 dem 6 4 dB Measurement Result 3 Result t tttttttttttttt Ox3f 1 2 10 PDU Result 0 18945521 0 60 1 Oxffffffffffff 192 2 2 240 tream OxDO1A04A87FBAECO2CO1D01FF303303007000005 878125 3EAAAE4FFFFFFFF POU Decoded Contents Downlink Access Definition WIMAX Compressed Map with Header MESSAGE HEADER No of IE Extension 0 SubDL UL Map Length 65536 WIMAX Compressed Map Compressed MAP Indicator MAC Header Figure 10 7 Example of a measurement file 10 2 4 Update GUI with Current Scanner Settings The Request Scanner Settings button is shown below and when clicked displays the values of all settings which are in use in the scanner at that moment This button can
304. or exam ple if it is useful to use only every 10th trigger this can be configured It is even possi ble to specify non integers as trigger filter as long as the rational does not get less than 1 As a consequence it is not possible to create more internal trigger signals by software than actually fired by hardware In the subsequent sections the trigger events from the trigger device are called external triggers and the calculated ones are called internal triggers As soon as the trigger factor is set to a value that is not equal to 1 i e every external trigger is exactly the same as an internal trigger for the result creation the CW module must extrapolate the timestamp when the output trigger has to be generated based on the history of the last input triggers raised in that way might differ from the ones really measured especially when integer multiples are used For example if the factor is set to 2 it is not necessarily true that each second input trigger leads to an output trigger since the calculation based on the time intervals of the trigger history might be different see figure below o This extrapolation step is of course not a 10096 exact replacement and the triggers In the figure below several examples are shown how the internal triggers are derived from the external triggers In the simplest case the external triggers exactly match the internal ones which is the case when 1 1 triggering is active If a 3 2 trigger
305. or more directories to add to the include path use semi colon delimited list if more than one I path Abbrechen Obemshmen Hilfe The second important change in the default project settings is the output file The appli cation executable is required to run a specific environment to use the R amp S ViCom functionality The phylis kernel and its configuration as the central element in the R amp S ViCom libraries must be found in the same directory resp in the directory PhylisKer nelRouting folder Therefore the output file is set in the sample project to be placed into the bin folder In the property pages this can be specified in the section Linker General as shown in the screenshots below One important thing to know is that the R amp S ViCom API does not require any addi tional linkage specifications The complete API is made of dynamically loaded DLLs and the interface header files so no settings have to be changed in the Linker Input tab Setting up a Custom Project new Property Pages Configuration active Debug y Platform active win32 y Configuration Manager amp Configuration Properties Output File Abin amp new debug exe General Show Progress Not Set Debugging Version Ga C C Enable Incremental Linking Yes INCREMENTAL Linker Suppress Startup Banner No Ignore Import Library No Input Register Output No Debugging Additional Library Directories System Optimizat
306. ot configure the SIB 3 to be decoded in your start measurement setting SIB10 and 16 are not enumerated in the ViCom etPDU How can we select them their corresponding PDUS for decoding in ViCom particularly SIB16 SIB 10 is not demodulated because it is only used in FDD and has been omitted completely as of UMTS TS25 331 Rel 5 Currently SIBs which carry information in multiple occurrences are not demodulated in general This is the reason why SIBs 15 2 15 3 and 16 have no related PDUs in the interface BCH Ec IO threshold IEcToloThresholdInDB 100 is the Ec IO threshold for which physical channel P CCPCH or CPICH tis the Ec IO of the P CPICH The data needed for demodulation are requested when the Ec IO of the P CPICH is exceeding the given threshold The CPICH is used as the scanner monitors all Node Bs by means of C PICH Ec IO measurements and there is no extra measurement of the P CCPCH Ec I0 dur ing the monitoring phase But both values should be in a fix ratio per node B anyway And actually both the P CPICH and the P CCPCH signals will be used for demodulation as the channel estimation as a part of demodulation is done by the P CPICH Whatis the minimum configuration of decoded PDUs that have to be set to make the decoder work You must request at least SIB3 No SIB PDU result will be provided until SIB3 has been decoded because the BCH Demodulator provides each SIB PDU together with CI Cell Identity from SI
307. para la protecci n de las mujeres embarazadas Tambi n las personas con marcapasos pueden correr peligro a causa de la radiaci n electromagn tica El empresario operador tiene la obligaci n de evaluar y se alizar las reas de trabajo en las que exista un riesgo elevado de exposici n a radiaciones Tenga en cuenta que en caso de incendio pueden desprenderse del producto sustancias t xicas gases l quidos etc que pueden generar da os a la salud Por eso en caso de incendio deben usarse medidas adecuadas como p ej m scaras antig s e indumentaria de protecci n Los productos con l ser est n provistos de indicaciones de advertencia normalizadas en funci n de la clase de l ser del que se trate Los rayos l ser pueden provocar da os de tipo biol gico a causa de las propiedades de su radiaci n y debido a su concentraci n extrema de potencia electromagn tica En caso de que un producto Rohde amp Schwarz contenga un producto l ser p ej un lector de CD DVD no debe usarse ninguna otra configuraci n o funci n aparte de las descritas en la documentaci n del producto a fin de evitar lesiones p ej debidas a irradiaci n l ser Clases de compatibilidad electromagn tica conforme a EN 55011 CISPR 11 y en analog a con EN 55022 CISPR 22 EN 55032 CISPR 32 Aparato de clase A Aparato adecuado para su uso en todos los entornos excepto en los residenciales y en aquellos conectados directamente a una red de distri
308. plays the configured preferences for the WCDMA scan Status Task Configuration Displays the measurement duration and the measurement rate The status button dis plays the colored statuses previously mentioned see Chapter 17 4 1 GSM RSSI Scan on page 236 17 4 3 LTE Scan In order to start a LTE scan the following steps must be performed 1 Choose a frequency band The minimum EARFCN of this band will be set automatically 2 If necessary change the EARFCN according to your needs ROHDERSCHWARZ Set scan preferences e e Step 4 4 Frequency band Band IIl 1800 EARFCN 1200 Start scan Figure 17 9 Setting the LTE Preferences 3 Click Start scan to start the scan 4 n order to stop the scan use Stop scan in the menu inflator in the top right cor ner E Due to processing issues it is not possible to select more than one EARFCN In the menu inflator on top of the right corner templates for existing preferences e g Munich and surrounding areas can be selected The LTE scan result graph displays one column for each PCI found by the measure ment The height of a column represents the PBCH RSRP value in dBm Task Configuration LI ROHDESSCHWARZ D H Set scan preferences Bluetooth ViComServerApplication inknown 80 86 F2 BA 70 38 PBCH RSRP dBm ASAP Week ASAP medam PClaRSRP svn Parameters Status Lte Scan Band Ill 1800 1300 2 meas second Figure
309. r In the same way it is done for wideband RS CINR The basic step to activate MIMO is to set the ViComLteInterfaceData SFrequencySetting SMimoSettings wMimoMeasMode parameter to either wMIMO MODE 2x2 for 2x2 MIMO configurations orto wMIMO MODE 2x4 for 2x4 MIMO respectively The measurements rely on the H channel matrix which is calculated per cell and per resource block This enables further drill down to determine factors such as interfer ence multipath fading antenna correlation and noise in relation to their spectral posi tion The scanner can provide the following measurements H channel matrix condition number CN and rank or any combination of them With dwMimoResultMaskFor2x2 it is defined what information the MIMO scanner will provide dwMimoResultMaskFor2x2 1 H matrix binary 0000 0001 dwMimoResultMaskFor2x2 2 CN binary 0000 0010 dwMimoResultMaskFor2x2 4 rank binary 0000 0100 Also bit combinations are possible The default is 7 1 2 4 7 in this case the scan ner measures H matrix CN and rank The MIMO module can provide several results per block The wTimeResolutionInMs defines the time interval between MIMO measurements which are calculated per resource block at a given time position within the captured IQ data For example wTimeResolutionInMs of 1 ms 5ms and 50ms of captured IQ data leads to up to 10 results For TDD the time resolution has to be a multiple of the 10 ms LTE frame dura
310. r Scan e Wireless interface throughput tests More details concerning the usage of the measurement tasks of the sample application can be found in chapter Example of R amp S Remote ViCom Application with R amp S TSMA It is recommended to use the Google Android Studio IDE for developing and modifying source code The structured source code of the sample app can be imported to this IDE It can be downloaded from following URL http www rohde schwarz com en software tsma The current version of Google Android Studio IDE is 1 1 The supported programming language on the Remote ViCom client is Java The supported operating systems for the Remote ViCom client are the following e Android Version gt 4 4 2 API level 19 e Windows The source code of the sample application can be divided in an Android specific part and an R amp S Remote ViCom specific part In order to develop own applications it is recommended to check the R amp S Remote ViCom specific parts and adapt this code according to your own needs Example of R amp S Remote ViCom Application with R amp S TSMA Requirements The following requirements must be fulfilled in order to use this app successfully e An Android device with at least Android 4 4 2 Android 4 4 4 is recommended e Possibility to establish connections via WLAN and or Bluetooth e R amp S TSMA or a R amp S TSME connected to a PC with a running version of the Remote Vicom Server Before starting a scan
311. r diagnostics an RS232 cable with adapter if necessary to con nect to the control computer null modem cable not included Optional Synchronizing the R amp S TSM Instruments internal clock from an external source via the 1PPS input connector An appropriate connection cable divider is needed that will output 1PPS not included e g R amp S accessory TS PNSYNC Ident Nr 1114 4817 02 see the following chapter e R amp S TSMW and R amp S TSME with OEM option s requirements A Gigabit Ethernet min Cat5 cable to connect PC and R amp S TSMW or R amp S TSME Power supply Optionally a GPS antenna 4 1 1 1 What you need e Antenna or standard RF connection Synchronizing the R amp S TSM Instruments Internal Clock from an External Source The R amp S TSM Instruments have an internal clock However the instruments will nor mally try to synchronise to an external source to improve the accuracy of measure ments If a GSM WCDMA signal is available the R amp S TSM Instruments will normally syn chronise to this via its antenna However if the scanner is being used with a signal generator or if a high precision GPS PPS reference is available the R amp S TSM Instru ments may be synchronised via the PULSE IN connector on the back panel R amp S TSM Instruments accept an incoming frequency reference of 1 pulse per second PPS via the PULSE IN connector The reference frequency of the signal generator is typically
312. ral user controls used to control the application The panel at the top allows the user to send commands to the GPS module and the middle panel shows the results The following section describes how to make measurements using the sample applica tion and explains which R amp S ViCom functions are being used Measurements UBlox C Both M PPS Output r Received data None C cPIO1 Host Timestamp 18614788 ms Message list cus Deuce este re GPZDA 133956 00 30 07 2015 00 00 6F E z us SGPRMC 133957 00 A 480 d 7 59544 N 01136 78886 E 0 015 300715 A 70 PS Time E GPVTG T M 0 015 N 0 028 K A 2D r Interface Control H SGPGGA 133957 00 4807 59544 N 01136 78886 E 1 10 1 13 572 3 M 46 2 M 59 Longitude GPGSA A 3 18 26 27 31 20 29 16 22 21 05 1 92 1 13 1 55 08 Load interface Latitude SGPGSV 3 1 12 05 05 028 40 08 10 278 16 56 300 29 18 29 144 29 76 SGPGSV 3 2 12 20 35 070 49 21 76 085 49 22 07 175 29 25 00 143 79 Set settings GPGSV 3 3 12 26 74 228 33 27 27 281 26 29 27 086 47 31 13 209 26 76 SGPGLL 4807 59544 N 01136 78886 E 133957 00 A A 6D Stop measurement Figure 15 1 R amp S ViCom GPS sample application 15 2 Measurements Perform the following steps to make a GPS measurement e R amp S TSMW R amp S TSME Address 224 e Message Format TE 224 o Med MEE RIT EM mm 225 E el EE 225 Ending thie e EE 226 e
313. re 16 1 RS232 system configuration In this chapter the API of the R amp S ViCom package is described that covers the area of communicating with the connected device Since there are no special measurement modes in general that can be described this chapter only contains two sections The next section contains a brief walk through example of the sample application which is part of the delivery Family model You can do this in the sample application after the device has been loa ded Check the Firmware version property shown in the list below the Load Device button o Make sure that the firmware version 12 xx or higher is installed on the R amp S TSMx Firmware versions less than 12 xx do not support the RS232 API In the sample appli cation you encounter a Selected R amp S TSMx does not support the desired measure ment message when clicking on the Start Measurement button Refer to R amp S TSMx Family Firmware Upgrade for a description how to update the R amp S TSMx Family firm ware 16 1 Sample Application Below you can a screenshot of the RS232 sample application Its layout structure is taken from the other sample applications The left side contains the general control Sample Application buttons that are used to set the R amp S TSMx Family model in a desired state or to apply settings As in the other applications the center of the dialog is consumed by the technology specific elements In this case this is only
314. re all chan nels must be within 2 MHz This is done to use the capabilities of the R amp S TSM Instru ments hardware as efficiently as possible If there is only a subset of channels to be measured the group can contain less than 10 channels The better the groups are filled the higher measurement rates are possible The R amp S TSMQ can measure up to 100 channels per second when most of the groups are filled For the R amp S TSML the maximum reduces to about 20 channels per second 7 1 1 3 Result Details Some data in the result structure is not directly related to one single measurement task but common to more than one or all These are explained in the subsequent paragraphs Split Scans One measurement result that is requested can contain many different types of results depending on which measurement tasks are currently activated Besides this one measurement result must not necessarily contain all the data made in one scan as explained above It is possible that the data of one scan is not completely put into one result structure Therefore the result contains a scan index and a flag whether it is the last structure holding data for that scan index In the result structure the pdwScanCount member is a pointer where number of the current scan is found This is an increasing value for each scan this will be incremen ted by one With this attribute the split results can be grouped again to form a com plete scan result Freq
315. re returned as part of the measurement result and may be reused in further measurements The actual power ratios between the S SYNC and P SYNC are specified in dB If for example the emitted power of the S SYNC is 4 times higher than that one used for the P SYNC the value 6 must be set in the RatioList afSSyncToPSyncRatioInDB respectively Measuring of LTE Signals RatioRange fLowerRatioInDB RatioRange fUpperRatioInDB of the ViCom LTE SFrequencySetting SSyncToPSyncRatioSettings structure A range from 0 to 6 dB is allowed To calculate the value the following formula can be used Ps syne P syne WV The figure below visualizes shows some calculation examples for simple relations between S SYNC and P SYNC power r dB 10 log Ratio 1 2 3 dB p f Ratio 1 1 0 dB P SYNC W S SYNC P SYNC S SYNC Ratio 4 1 6 dB p f Ratio 10 1 10 dB W S SYNC Figure 9 1 S Sync to P Sync ratios Some standard values are listed in the table below The S Sync and P Sync weighting refers to the power values in Watt If the power values of S Sync and P Sync are given in dBm the ratio is simply the difference between those values S Sync P Sync Value dB 10 1 10 5 1 6 99 4 1 6 02 Measuring of LTE Signals S Sync P Sync Value dB 1 2 3 01 1 4 6 02 1 5 6 99 1 10 10 9 1 1 3 Reference Signal Measurements RSRP RSRQ and RS C
316. read and pay special attention to the section titled Waste disposal Environmental protection item 1 5 Depending on the function certain products such as RF radio equipment can produce an elevated level of electromagnetic radiation Considering that unborn babies require increased protection pregnant women must be protected by appropriate measures Persons with pacemakers may also be exposed to risks from electromagnetic radiation The employer operator must evaluate workplaces where there is a special risk of exposure to radiation and if necessary take measures to avert the potential danger 6 Should a fire occur the product may release hazardous substances gases fluids etc that can cause health problems Therefore suitable measures must be taken e g protective masks and protective clothing must be worn 7 Laser products are given warning labels that are standardized according to their laser class Lasers can cause biological harm due to the properties of their radiation and due to their extremely concentrated electromagnetic power If a laser product e g a CD DVD drive is integrated into a Rohde amp Schwarz product absolutely no other settings or functions may be used as described in the product documentation The objective is to prevent personal injury e g due to laser beams 8 EMC classes in line with EN 55011 CISPR 11 and analogously with EN 55022 CISPR 22 EN 55032 CISPR 32 Class A equipment Equipment sui
317. rement has its turn The following WCDMA measurement is stopped since a GSM demodulation request has arrived and must be done immediately The paused WCDMA measure ment is then resumed once the demodulation request has been satisfied In the sample the second RF Power Scan measurement started with an ADC over flow which causes the attenuation to be modified and the measurement to be restar ted This adds some extra time overhead for the justification and therefore takes this time from the idle pool above The R amp S TSM Instruments are capable of doing more measurements than shown in this example but for simplicity the sample has been chosen as described In principle more measurements are possible than the number depicted in the figure above o Note that the block sizes have no relation to the actual execution times in the picture 5 1 1 1 Automatic Load Handling If the requested measurement tasks exceed the receiver s capacity all tasks are slowed down by the same percentage R amp S ViCom Programming with the R amp S ViCom Interface EH Prioritization of specific tasks has to be done by controlling the measurement rates i e the user application has to compare the configured measurement rate with the mea sured measurement rate provided by the receiver and to adapt the settings if neces sary It is recommended to allow the user of the drive test SW to configure the measurement rate The SW should report the achieved mea
318. rent measurement functional test This helps ensure the continued safety of the product Batteries and rechargeable batteries cells If the information regarding batteries and rechargeable batteries cells is not observed either at all or to the extent necessary product users may be exposed to the risk of explosions fire and or serious personal injury and in some cases death Batteries and rechargeable batteries with alkaline electrolytes e g lithium cells must be handled in accordance with the EN 62133 standard 1 2 Cells must not be taken apart or crushed Cells or batteries must not be exposed to heat or fire Storage in direct sunlight must be avoided Keep cells and batteries clean and dry Clean soiled connectors using a dry clean cloth Cells or batteries must not be short circuited Cells or batteries must not be stored in a box or ina drawer where they can short circuit each other or where they can be short circuited by other conductive materials Cells and batteries must not be removed from their original packaging until they are ready to be used Cells and batteries must not be exposed to any mechanical shocks that are stronger than permitted If a cell develops a leak the fluid must not be allowed to come into contact with the skin or eyes If contact occurs wash the affected area with plenty of water and seek medical aid Improperly replacing or charging cells or batteries that contain alkaline electrolytes e g
319. results SMeasResult can be classified into two e WiMAX Scan Results e WiMAX Demodulation Results e WIMAX Scam EE 161 WiMAX Demodulation Results 164 WiMAX Scan Results WiMAX Scan Results contain information about the Channel Quality RSSI and CINR and Serving Cell Preamble Index Segment and ID Cell Channel Quality e RSSI The received signal strength indicator is the received wide band power in dBm including thermal noise and noise generated in the receiver e CINR The ratio of carrier interference plus noise in dB RSSI and CINR are calculated from the power parameters of the Power Delay Profile inside the Channel Impulse Responses For more details on CIR please refer to the Channel Impulse Responses section in the LTE chapter Serving Cell e Preamble Index Downlink Preamble Index of the Base Station It varies from 0 to 113 according to standard IEEE 802 16 e Segment A cell site can be divided up into three different segments Thus segment number can be 0 1 or 2 ID Cell ID of the cell ranges from 0 to 31 Downlink Frame Prefix The downlink DL frame in WiMAX starts with preamble as its first symbol In the DL symbols followed by preamble the initial four subchannels are allocated for the Frame Control Header FCH The Downlink Frame Prefix DLFP is a data structure that con tains information regarding the current frame and is mapped to the FCH More specifi cally the DLFP contains the following info
320. rmation The downlink DL frame in WiMAX starts with preamble as its first symbol In the DL symbols followed by preamble the initial four subchannels are allocated for the Frame Control Header FCH The Downlink Frame Prefix DLFP is a data structure that con Measuring of WiMAX Signals tains information regarding the current frame and is mapped to the FCH More specifi cally the DLFP contains the following information e Bitmap of Used Subchannels e Length of Downlink Map DL MAP that immediately follows the DLFP e DL MAP Repetition Coding 0 2 4 or 6 e DL MAP Encoding such as CC BTC CTC ZT CC CC with interleaver and LDPC The FCH is always coded with the QPSK rate 1 2 mode with four repetitions to ensure maximum robustness and reliable performance even at the cell edge Downlink Map The Downlink Map DL MAP message Management Message Type 2 defines the access to the DL information It contains the following information e DCD Count e No OFDMA Symbols DL MAP also contains some IEs of which we are interested in the Downlink Burst Pro file whose DIUC is between 0 and 12 both inclusive It contains the following infor mation e OFDMA Symbol Offset e Subchannel Offset e Boosting e No OFDMA Symbols e No Subchannels e Repetition Coding Uplink Map The Uplink Map UL MAP message Management Message Type 3 allocates access to the UL channel It contains the following information e UCD Cou
321. rms Abbreviation Meaning BCH Broadcast Channel See Reference 4 on CD ROM BTS Base Transciever Station CDMA Code Division Multiple Access CIR Channel Impulse Response C PICH See Reference 4 on CD ROM DLL Dynamic Linked Library EVDO Evolution Data Optimized E UTRA Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access FDD Frequency Division Duplex Firewire See IEEE1394 FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array GSM Global System for Mobile communications GPS Global Positioning System IEEE1394 Used interchangeably with Firewire Fast connection specified by IEEE 1394 LTE Long Term Evolution OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer OHCI Open Host Controller Interface OTDOA Observed Time Difference Of Arrival PPS Pulse Per Second P SYNC Primary Synchronisation code transmitted on the UMTS Primary Synchronization Channel PSCH PSCH Primary Synchronisation Channel RMS Root Mean Square R amp S Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG R amp S TSME Ultra Compact Drive Test Receiver R amp S TSME R amp S TSML CW Radio Network Analyzer R amp S TSML CW RF Con tinuous Wave measurements CW R amp S TSML G Radio Network Analyzer R amp S TSML G GSM R amp S TSML C Radio Network Analyzer R amp S TSML C IS95 CDMA 2000 R amp S TSML E Radio Network Analyzer R amp S TSML E CDMA2000 EV DO R amp S TSML W Radio Network Analyzer R amp S TSML W WCDMA R amp S
322. rn power val Set res buff depth a po 00 Marker result Frequency MHz Start measurement Level dBm Stop measurement Get result counter len TOUS Recent 4 999 Hz Get result 130 4 Subtotal 4 999 Hz Ee Total 4 999Hz Result viewer Release interface Write exe Terminate interface Browse Cancel View Figure 11 13 RF Power Scanner instance 0 In the field Settings the front end of the selected instrument for the measurement is defined The display field shows samples status messages Settings Frontend FE 1 ei Start meas ok Set settings ok Interface loaded User Manual 1505 1329 42 26 193 RF Power Scan Technology The channel filter mode is activated by checking the Enable sequence box Channel Filter Sequence Setup Enable sequence There is a special dialog window for the filter setup The channel filter setup consists of two parts e The list of subsequences defines the frequency ranges that will be analyzed e The passband shape of the filter is defined for individual points or ranges beginning at 0 center frequency The filter is symmetrical to the center All frequency entries have to match the common frequency spacing Channel filter sequence KM y Subsequences Filter definition Start MHz Stop MHz Step MHz asa spacing Hz 1000 0 0 936 000 960 000 0 200 1 1805 000 1870 000 0 200 D 0 0 120000 0 1 000 A
323. ro general O Tensi n de alimentaci n de PUESTA EN MARCHA PARADA Observar la documentaci n del producto Atenci n en el manejo de dispositivos de peso D Indicaci n de estado de espera standby elevado Peligro de choque el ctrico Corriente continua DC d Advertencia superficie caliente TL Corriente alterna AC Q Conexi n a conductor de protecci n AS Corriente continua Corriente alterna DC AC M s informaci n en la secci n Eliminaci n protecci n del medio ambiente punto 1 1171 0000 42 08 Page 8 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Simbolo Significado Simbolo Significado Aviso Cuidado en el manejo de dispositivos Distintivo de la UE para la eliminaci n por sensibles a la electrost tica ESD separado de dispositivos el ctricos y electr nicos M s informaci n en la secci n Eliminaci n protecci n del medio ambiente punto 2 Advertencia rayo l ser M s informaci n en la secci n Funcionamiento punto 7 Palabras de se al y su significado En la documentaci n del producto se utilizan las siguientes palabras de se al con el fin de advertir contra riesgos y peligros A PELIGRO Indica una situaci n de peligro que si no se evita causa lesiones graves o incluso la muerte Indica una situaci n de peligro que si no se evita puede causar lesiones graves o incluso la muerte lesiones leves o moderadas Indica informaci n que s
324. rom To Type Temporary 2010 2011 not yet in 02 24 02 24 activation Date From To Valid Time To Expiration m Reason New options can be installed when either an option file or an option key is available This can be done in the Install Option Key section shown in the following figure E http 192 168 0 2 go m x File Edit View Favorites Tools Help o rase rw 1503 3001K02 100009 Install Option Key S elm Oe xmi file enter manually R amp S TSMW option order s are shipped as xml files on a CD ROM For option installation insert the CD ROM into the computer drive press the L En Emm Browse button select the corresponding option file on the CD ROM and press Install Alternatively to xml file input th After finishing installation this page is beeing updated automatically and the added option should be listed in the instrument options section e option key could be entered manually Frequently Asked Questions 18 2 3 Firmware Update The R amp S TSMW firmware can be updated using the same HTML page where the options can be queried The Browse button in the section Firmware Update can be used to search for the firmware file containing the new firmware code Once the path to the file is visible in the text field the Install button can be used to start the update of the R amp S TSMW firmware
325. rresponding antenna connection on the rear panel RF1 and RF2 The user can also make use of the built in GPS receiver by connecting a GPS antenna to the R amp S TSMW R amp S TSME using the connector on the rear panel These connections for R amp S TSMW case are shown in the following figure R amp S ViCom General Description E E a 2 E F4 a g SMART CARD Ext REF 1 PULSE IN OUT 2 Figure 3 3 R amp S TSMW Rear Panel The R amp S TSME has one frontend with a corresponding antenna connection on the rear panel RF1 see the following figure Figure 3 4 R amp S TSME Rear Panel The R amp S TSMW has the default IP address 192 168 0 2 The R amp S TSME is identified similar to the R amp S TSMx Family i e by using the receiver index to get an IP address from the list of available IP addresses To connect to the R amp S TSMW R amp S TSME a network connection on the PC should be configured with a suitable host IP address e g 192 168 0 1 However if several R amp S Instruments are connected to the same host PC in a network each instrument must have unique IP address After connecting the R amp S TSMW R amp S TSME and configuring the host the connection can be checked by opening a web browser and entering the IP address of the R amp S TSMW R amp S TSME A HTML page will be displayed showing details of the R amp S TSMW R amp S TSME the current firmware etc a AE E RNC NU MN ND NN UU User Manu
326. rt sync dwShortSyncRateInmHz in milliHertz The full sync is normally done less frequently and uses all the available data for signal recognition The frequency of that task is specified in the dwFullSyncRateInmHz attribute Finally the measurement rate of the overall EVDO measurement scan can be set using the dwMeasRateInmHz Note that this parameter specifies the frequency for a User Manual 1505 1329 42 26 110 Measurement Rates full scan of all the EVDO channels specified upfront The more channels are specified the less often they will be measured when the same measurement rate is used Once the settings have been done the structure can be set in the ViCOM API using the SetEvdoSettings method of the CviComCdma2000Interface In the following a short example is shown that can be inserted into the CDMA 2000 sample at line 98 In that case at least one frequency should be set to be measured as EVDO frequency SEvdoControlSettings cEvdoSettings cEvdoSettings dwMeasRateInmHz 10000 cEvdoSettings dwFullSyncRateInmHz 1000 cEvdoSettings dwShortSyncRateInmHz 5000 cEvdoSettings dwShortSyncRangeInChips 160 EXEC VICOM Configuring EvDO scanner pcC2kScanner SetEvdoSettings cError cEvdoSettings 8 4 EVDO BCH Demodulation The BCH Demodulation part allows requests for CDMA and EVDO BCH Demodula tion The message IDs are unique therefore it is clear if CDMA or EVDO BCH demod ulation is requested Of cour
327. s Interface functions that are common to all R amp S ViCom interfaces and are part of the Basic Interface set are accessed via the GetBasicInterface function For exam ple when working with the R amp S TSMx Family bool success myViComIF GetBasicInterface SelectReceiver myViComError mySettings dwReceiverIndex The R amp S ViCom Reference manual lists the functions that belong to a single technol ogy interface and those that belong to the BasiclInterface 5 2 3 5 2 4 5 2 5 Start Programming R amp S TSM Instruments Management Functions GetConnectedReceivers is a basic interface function available in all R amp S ViCom Interfaces that returns details of all the R amp S TSM Instruments connected to the control computer in the structure SConnectedReceiverTable For example SConnectedReceiverTable myReceivers myViComIF GetBasicInterface GetConnectedReceivers myViComError where myViComlF is a pointer to a ViCom object Note that GetConnectedReceivers is accessed via the GetBasiclnterface function When a function that takes a ViComError reference as a parameter returns success fully the ViComError code will be 0 If an error is returned the programmer can read the error code from myViComError using the function GetErrorCode as follows DWORD myErrorCode myViComError GetErrorCode A standard ViCom error message with more information can be read from myViComEr ror by calling
328. s is the default way of measuring power of a channel After a channel has been measured for about 50 ms the R amp S TSM Instrument searches for the part of the signal that covers highest power and lasts as long as a timeslot 50 msec p t sw t Timeslot Figure 7 1 Total Channel Inband Power Calculation Measuring of GSM Signals Power of the SCH When the scanner is synchronised on a channel it can measure the SCH power time slot 0 There are several modes for SCH power measuring which are also returned in the result e ETS only The extended training sequence burst has been found and the power of burst is returned e SCH Demodulation An SCH demodulation attempt was successful and the power value is derived from that burst Once such a demodulation was successful the BTS found is managed in so called Active Set containers When a later SCH demodulation fail it is then possible to relate the signal to a formerly demodulated BTS using cross correlation algorithm The SCH of a BTS is demodulated success fully if the ratio of the SCH power to the total inband power is greater than 6 dBm There are two Active Set containers that are used in different ways Active Set 1 The SCH signal has been demodulated in the last 5 minutes The drift of the incoming signal is within 16us and 35us to be able to process reflected and faded signals as well The incoming signal must then have Pscu Piot of at least 11 dBm Acti
329. s reg Used to clear the registry from all previously made settings Message Handler Underneath the surface the R amp S ViCom API utilizes a Rohde amp Schwarz internal mech anism the so called PhylisKernel This message dispatching mechanism is mostly used in graphical environments which makes it use the possibility to get feedback from the user in some way especially when it comes to error handling User Manual 1505 1329 42 26 55 5 6 2 1 Debugging and Error Handling This may not be the desired behavior when the R amp S ViCom API is used Usage sce narios may contain environments were no user feedback is possible or where software components have to run in an unattended way For such cases the PhylisKernel supports a mechanism to overwrite the default behavior of asking the user for confirmation in several ways Error Handling Mechanism The error handling mechanism in the Phylis Kernel is designed to be extensible by pro viding a new DLL with a specific API R amp S ViCom itself ships with a default Error Han dler that supports the configuration of the error handling as described below In case that a message box shall be shown the kernel checks if it can load a user defined DLL see below If such a DLL is found and it exports a function named DumpLowLevelErrorMessage with the signature shown below then it calls that function to take care about the error message The DLL can handle the error message in any way it wan
330. sage type PDU System Type Information etc is demodulated on a specific channel Several modes are available to do the actual demodulation some performing their job automatically some requiring additional user input Some of the so called demodulation modes require a timeout value as additional parameter In summary there are up to five arguments that have to be specified e Channel Index Frequency Index e Message Type PDU ID System Information Block Type etc e Demodulation Mode see below e Timeout only required for special modes e BTS reference only required for special modes during measurement Using the Demodulators R amp S ViCom uses the GSM term BTS in general to indicate a mobile base station although there are different terms for different technologies e g NodeB for WCDMA or eNodeB for LTE 5 4 1 1 Demodulation Modes The demodulator API allows you to specify in detail when and how often a message type shall be decoded The available options depend on whether the decoding is defined at start of the measurement or if a single demodulation request is issued dur ing the measurement Demodulation Modes at the Start of Measurement When a measurement is started for each channel and message type the following demodulation modes can be set Demodulate ONCE 0 Each message type is only decoded one time for each basestation After a decod ing result is available the message type is never update
331. se only if CDMA and EVDO channels are configured for measurement the corresponding BCH demodulation is available There are some general parameters for BCH demodulation the CPU Load and the Ec lo Threshold These parameters must be specified for CDMA and for EVDO as appropriate The CPU Load for CDMA and EVDO BCH demodulation together shall not exceed 50 of the full CPU load utilized by ViCom Therfore one ViCom instance can allocate from 1096 up to 5096 for CDMA or for EVDO BCH demodulation only If CDMA and EVDO BCH demodulation are requested only 1096 up to 4096 can be assigned to CDMA or EVDO and the other one is limited to the difference to 5096 See Chapter 5 4 Using the Demodulators on page 47 8 5 Measurement Rates The maximum measurement rates are different for CDMA and EVDO and they depend highly on the PC performance Up to 80 Hz are possible for CDMA only measurments and up to 30 Hz are possible for EVDO only measurments For combined measurments one or more CDMA channels and at least one EVDO channel measured in parallel up to 30 Hz are possible S O 9 1 Measuring of LTE Signals R amp S ViCom LTE Technology The 3rd generation network technologies like WCDMA and EVDO are the first step into solely IP based data exchange The first real network technology that is completely based on the transmission of IP packets is LTE The R amp S TSMW or R amp S TSME can be used to perform LTE related measurements
332. sed to get an IP address from the list of available IP addresses Type TSMW Address 192 168 0 4 Scanner Settings Scanner Frontend FE 1 v Demodulator Settings Demod Frontend FE 1 v Figure 5 2 R amp S TSMW Settings 5 4 Using the Demodulators Many of the technologies supported by the scanners can additionally demodulate infor mation sent on specific channels of the underlying RAT It is even possible to receive a textual representation of the information in most cases as long as the internal decoder supports the appropriate standard In each chapter special constraints of the specific implementations are described besides the usage of the sample application and a coding example Refer to the appro priate chapter to learn more about the implementation e General Conco OE aminas tee ner ee tti liada 47 5 4 1 General Concept The API provides two ways to configure the demodulation process depending on the current state of an R amp S TSM Instrument When there is no measurement active at the moment the initial configuration is made In that phase many parameters of the demodulation process can be specified During the measurement different commands can be used to change the demodulation For example internal results can be reset to enforce another demodulation of a message already decoded The demodulator is configured by specifying a set of data records Each data record is used to define how a specific mes
333. sed to simulate some noise Both were connected using a multiplexer to connect to the R amp S TSMU The Ec lo threshold P CCPCH was required to be at most 18 dB With these con straints 17915 PDUs were decoded correctly compared to 18045 received packets That results in a block error rate of 0 72 which is a reasonable value Additionally measurements for lower Ec IO were made The R amp S CMU signal was decreased by 2 resp 3 dBm to produce the results summarized in the table below Table 6 1 Laboratory BLER Results for R amp S CMU SMIQ Test Environment Ec lo P CCPCH BLER 18dB 0 72 20 dB 40 21 dB 75 Field Measurements To get results under drift additional measurements were done in a real network envi ronment The results are shown in following Table 3 The results were produced in an urban area with a maximum delay of 2 seconds between the Ec IO measurement and the demodulation attempt It can be observed that with Ec IO falling below 11 dB the demodulation probability decreases below 80 With an Ec IO value of 13 to 14 2 3 of the demodulation attempts still succeed which should result in a fairly stable demodulation User Manual 1505 1329 42 26 69 WCDMA BCH Demodulation Table 6 2 Field Measurement Results Ec I0 dB Attempts Successful Success Rate Attempts 1 2 4 4 100 96 2 3 66 66 100
334. sen to best fit the maximum measurement time of the included channels For example if the measure ment times for channels 1 2 and 3 are 300 200 and 500 us then the data used to calculate the channel powers for those channels is taken from raw measurements received within about 500 us Channel Power Aggregation In case that multiple channel power values have to be merged to create one final result because more than one raw measurement chunk shall be used to calculate the overall power for a channel channel group a strategy must be chosen how this can be done From the raw measurement data i e either the subset of spectrum lines from the FFT in case that the Multi Channel measurement mode was active or the IQ samples from the IQ down converter in case of the Single Channel measurement mode power val ues are calculated for each raw power value group If more than one group of 512 power values is within the measurement time for a chan nel in the figure depicted below there are four such chunks from which four power val ues are created then from the set of these values one result has to be calculated for the channel for which the measurement was configured Channel Power mA e Peak 9 E H Jt Power gt Average Channel gt Na ul D au mg m Power gt RMS m Power A XQ rr at Each time 512 raw measurement values gathered Figure 13
335. set is assigned to the newly found basestation In that phase the scanner reports Inband power CIR values and a total power for the signal RSCP From these values the Ec IO can be calculated for the basestation reported Once the content of the F SYNC gets demodulated the PN offset must not be guessed any more but can be confirmed The demodulation for a signal can be done in several different ways see the section below on F SYNC demodulation settings for more details The demodulation also is not necessarily performed for all new pilots so it might be the case that this state is never reached As an additional result the content of the F SYNC is returned by the R amp S ViCom API Measuring of CDMA 2000 Signals Signal Measurement Demodulation GPS Pulse Offset Estimation None Time Based Demodulated Method PN Offset invalid PN Offset PN Offset 65535 ee irom me PN Offset PN Offset Invalid offset found found Inband Power Results Inband Power F PICH CIR values RSCP F SYNCH Transmit content Time correct Figure 8 1 N offset estimation method 8 1 1 3 Channel Impulse Response One operating mode in the CDMA 2000 scanner is to perform CIR measurements on the F PICH In that measurement mode the R amp S TSM Instruments attempt to demod ulate a signal and detect the F PICH content sent by a basestation on the CDMA chan nel When the demodulation and correlation is successful the R amp S TSM Instruments measure at a
336. shed the development of your application The folders are shown in the following figure f AE gO Ui COS Rus ViCom_15 51 gt y 47 Search ViCom 15 51 p Organize v Include in library v Share with w Burn New folder SR e Le Perflogs 2 EI Name E Date modified Type A PLM Storage d bin 27 07 2015 14 39 File folder A Prograrn Files doc 27 07 2015 14 39 File folder A Program Files x86 De inc 27 07 2015 14 39 File folder A Rational preserve P do src 27 07 2015 14 39 File folder Lo ROMES i Bins 3 Le tools 27 07 2015 14 39 File folder e Uninstall exe 21 07 2015 14 39 Application A Software Repository CMW Synch temp A Users WW iscoso lt u L bh 6 items The content of the folder can be moved and copied to any location on your computer and should still work It is not necessary to keep it where it has been created 5 5 2 Create the Project Environment To compile your demo project you need the R amp S ViCom header files to run the appli cation you need a set of DLLs and other files In the Project folder of the R amp S ViCom installation directory you can find a script called createProject cmd Run this script providing it with a command line argument that holds the name of the project folder to create For example run the following command line to get the same result as shown in the screenshot above C RuS ViCom Project gt createProject new 5 5 3 Project Settings
337. signals It runs very fast 200Hz SYNC signal measure ments and allows to find all LTE cells check if the UE can synchronize to the cell and decide if a cell is a possible server or a possible interferer Based on the results from the narrowband scanner additionally scanner modules wideband and MIMO can be performed to further analyze the network e The Wideband scanner takes Reference Signal measurements and power mea surements over the complete LTE system bandwidth up to 20 MHz The actual System bandwidth can be configured in the SW or detected by the scanner from the MIB The wideband scanner can provide detailed sub band measurements to check the quality of a cell in more detail 9 1 1 9 1 1 1 9 1 1 2 Measuring of LTE Signals e The MIMO scanner takes Reference Signal measurements over the complete sys tem bandwidth and provides the MIMO results In contrast to other interfaces the configuration mainly concerns the way how the receiver synchronizes to the LTE signal and helps providing a fast synchronization when the apriority knowledge about the signal is available The R amp S ViCom is preparing for eMBMS measurements see the note in Reference Signal Measurements Narrowband Measurements Configuration For each frequency additional information can be provided to improve the synchroni zation performance during the measurement One of that additional information concerns the number of OFDM symbols per slot use
338. stancias peligrosas polvos con contenido de metales pesados como p ej plomo berilio o n quel Por eso el producto solo debe ser desmontado por personal especializado con formaci n adecuada Un desmontaje inadecuado puede ocasionar da os para la salud Se deben tener en cuenta las directivas nacionales referentes a la eliminaci n de residuos En caso de que durante el trato del producto se formen sustancias peligrosas o combustibles que deban tratarse como residuos especiales p ej refrigerantes o aceites de motor con intervalos de cambio definidos deben tenerse en cuenta las indicaciones de seguridad del fabricante de dichas sustancias y las normas regionales de eliminaci n de residuos Tenga en cuenta tambi n en caso necesario las indicaciones de seguridad especiales contenidas en la documentaci n del producto La eliminaci n incorrecta de sustancias peligrosas o combustibles puede causar da os a la salud o da os al medio ambiente Se puede encontrar m s informaci n sobre la protecci n del medio ambiente en la p gina web de Rohde 8 Schwarz 1171 0000 42 08 Page 14 Quality management and environmental management Sehr geehrter Kunde Sie haben sich fur den Kauf eines Rohde amp Schwarz Produk tes entschieden Sie erhalten damit ein nach modernsten Fer tigungsmethoden hergestelltes Produkt Es wurde nach den Regeln unserer Qualitats und Umweltmanagementsysteme entwickelt gefertigt und gepruft Rohde amp Sc
339. support Host computer operates in the 192 168 0 0 subnet having a different IP address than 192 168 0 2 which is the default address of the R amp S TSME e Using more than one R amp S TSME in this application is currently not supported e Disable the firewall e If the receiver and host computer are connected via network switch or hub these have to support 9k Jumbo Frames as well e Enable flow control for Rx amp Tx path R amp S TSME Connectivity e Default IP address 192 168 0 2 Even if you change the R amp S TSME IP address the default address will still be active as a fallback option You can change the R amp S TSME IP address using the R amp S TSME Device Manager tool which is a part of the R amp S ViCom package To install the tool run the C NRuSNViCom version NtoolsNTSMEN setup RS TsmeTools lt version gt exe file e In order to interact with the R amp S ViCom interface the corresponding scanner options must be installed on the device Open the R amp S TSME Device Manager to find out which scanner options are instal led on the device see R amp S TSME Device Manager window For more details refer to Installing and Managing Software License Keys of the R amp S TSME User Manual You can find the manual in the R amp S ViCom package in C NRuSNViCom version NdocNTSME User Manual pdf Getting Started with R amp S TSME e Ifthe R amp S TSME does not answer to ICMP echo requests PING use the TsmeP ing tool contai
340. surement rate by the scanner to the user All scanners are reporting the achieved measurement rate as part of the measurement results In case only a single measurement is started on the device the device will perform measurements up to the maximum possible rate In case several measurements are started on the device it will try to perform measurements at the requested rates but if these rates are not possible the rates will be reduced and resources will be shared equally between the scanning tasks In such a case the user of the SW can see what is the specific achievable measurement rate for the desired configuration and therefore can balance the rates between the tasks by tuning the configured measurement rate per task When programming with ViCom please check carefully the definition of the measure o ment rate for some technologies the measurement rate is the single channel mea surement rate i e how often one channel is measured for some scanners the total measurement rate is configured 5 1 2 Resource Allocation on the R amp S TSMW The R amp S TSMW provides two separate receiver frontends which can be used inde pendently This is especially useful for separation of scanning and demodulation mea surement because demodulation can then be done without interrupting the scanning For example if you want the R amp S TSMW to do WCDMA measurement and demodula tion it is possible to dedicate the first frontend to WCDMA scann
341. t WB RSRP noise clip ped TX3 RX0 dBm Noise clipped RSRP value based on the wide band reference signal power measurement in 0 01 dB For this value the measured RS CINR was taken into account to correct the RSRP result regarding noise and interference Mea sured from R3 on Fron tend RF1 over the com plete system bandwidth sNoiseClippedRSR PinDBm100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result Building a LTE TopN View Measurement Description ViCom Name Part of ViCom struc ture WB RSRP noise clip ped TX2 RX1 dBm Noise clipped RSRP value based on the wide band reference signal power measurement in 0 01 dB For this value the measured RS CINR was taken into account to correct the RSRP result regarding noise and interference Mea sured from R2 on Fron tend RF2 over the com plete system bandwidth sNoiseClippedRSR PinDBm100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask bTransmitAntennaPort ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SWidebandRsCinr Result WB RSRP noise clip ped TX3 RX1 dBm Noise clipped RSRP value based on the wide band reference signal power measurement in 0 01 dB For this value the measured RS CINR was taken into account to correct the RSRP result regarding noise and interference Mea sured from R3 on Fron tend RF2 over the com plete system bandwidth sNoiseClippedRSR PinDBm100
342. t on the left side e System Information Type The type id of the message that shall be demodulated This is not necessarily a number valid values are also 2bis 2ter etc besides the numbered messages e Demodulation Type Can be either 0 1 or 2 0 means that the demodulation for the system information shall be done until it has been performed successfully for one time 1 should be used when the demodulation shall be requested dynamically using the right list 2 means that the demodulation shall be performed in regular intervals This value corresponds to the values defined in etSIType DEMOD MODE e The last value is only used when the third value was set to 2 This value defines the delay that the demodulator delays the next demodulation attempt once the message has been decoded successfully There can be any number of such rows in the list When pressing the Set SI Type Demodulation Setting button these values are used to configure the scanner Besides the configuration defined in the list the two values entered in the text fields below are transferred to the scanner GSM BCH Demodulation You can NOT use the SI Type Demodulation together with the automatic demodulation of System Information Type 1 to 4 The new demodulation algorithm can fully replace the formerly used configuration and provides better performance and more configuration options Make sure fully to migrate existing software when using the ne
343. t the specified IP address and assign the front ends load accordingly If the connection is successfully established some information about the R amp S TSMW R amp S TSME will be displayed in the read only text box at the middle left of the dialog box 9 3 1 2 Configure the R amp S ViCom Interface Frequency Channel Settings Channel Frequency amp Mode Settings Freq MHz Duplex NB CINR WB CINR RSSI MIMO Channel This text box specifies the frequency channel settings Each line configures one chan nel and consists of seven numbers The meanings of these parameters are shown in the following table Press Enter to create a new line in the text box and configure another channel the channel number Seq Label Meaning 1 Freq MHz Channel Frequency in MHz 2 Duplex Duplex Mode 1 FDD 2 TDD GUI Sample Application Seq Label NB CINR Meaning Narrow Band RS CINR Mode This is a bit flag please refer to SFrequencySetting wNarrowban dRefSignalMeasMode inside ViComLtelnterfaceData h for more information The default value is 67 WB CINR Wide Band RS CINR Mode Set to 1 to enable wide band RS CINR measurement set to 0 to disable it RSSI Reference Signal Measurement modes The default is 1 for RSSI Normal Mode MIMO MIMO mode 0 No MIMO mea surement 1 2 x 2 MIMO mea surement 2 4 x 4 MIMO mea surement
344. t the table using the Set Frequencies button In the table space delimited pairs of a frequency and a channel index can be defined WCDMA BCH Demodulation For a simpler editing it is also possible to add the frequencies only one per line a new line is started with Ctrl Enter The channel indices will be added automati cally when Set Frequencies is pressed For example the mid frequencies 2167 2 2112 8 2132 6 and 2157 2 MHz can be entered These are the downlink frequencies of the UMTS channels in Germany if you perform tests in another county enter the according values Frequencies MHz Start new line Ctrl Enter Chant new li 2167 200000 0 0 2112 800000 1 1 2132 600000 2 2 2157 200000 3 3 Figure 6 3 Sample Frequency Settings for Germany Figure 12 Sample Frequency Settings for Germany e As next step press Set Mode and Rate button This applies the values stored in Measurement Rate and Measurement Mode text fields shown on the right side to the internal data model e Mark the Add SIB Text checkbox and make sure that the Store Mode is set to one of the Store Results radio buttons Otherwise no demodulation result will be stored in the output file Store Mode C Throw Results Away Store Results tore Results without P Sync CIR wem Layer 3 Decode last PDU Figure 6 4 Layer 3 Decoder Options in Sample Application e Specify the demodulation settings Each line in the central
345. t values which are difficult to display on a monitor given the pixel count available Spectrum Clearance Use Case with RF Power Scan Therefore the Frequency Detector is able to aggregate several measurement values into one value on the frequency axis Using a user configurable frequency resolution for the display of the results the SW can automatically scale the amount of values reported in the frequency axis The following settings are recommended for drive test ViCom RFPOWERSCAN STimeDetector eDetectorType RFPOWERSCANTSMW FREQDET TYPE RMS 1 the setting means that the reported value will be the quadratic mean root mean square of the measured values dwCountOfLines resolution of the spectrum window in the drive test SW This could also depend on a zoom factor in the visualization window or input by the user To avoid interpolation this value should not exceed dStopFrequencyInHz dStartFrequencyInHz 20MHz 1 15 FFT size With our recommended settings this is dStopFrequencyInHz dStartFrequencyInHz 22460 Hz 11 6 4 3 Other Settings ViCom REPOWERSCAN SMarker bUseMarker set this to 0 Other settings are expert mode 11 7 Spectrum Clearance Use Case with RF Power Scan The aim of spectrum clearance is to find any power in the measured bandwidth There fore the data aggregation methods should be set to use the peak value instead of the mean value These settings should be used ViCo
346. tMessagesDuringStartMeasurement returns a list of messages which may be Information warnings or errors SViComList lt CViComBasicInterface SMessage gt myMessageList pViComIf GetBasicInterface GetMessagesDuringStartMeasurement myViComError After StartTakingMeasurements has returned successfully measurements can be retrieved from R amp S ViCom s result buffer It may be useful to know how many mes sages are in the buffer whether it has overflowed and if so how many measurements have been lost Do this by calling the R amp S ViCom Basic interface function GetResultCounters CViComBasicInterface SResultCounters myResultCounters myViComIF GetBasicInterface GetResultCounters myViComError The measurements can be retrieved from the result buffer by repeatedly calling the R amp S ViCom Interface function GetResult which returns a single measurement result in the SMeasResult structure For example to read a hundred measurements for DWORD i 0 i lt 100 i CViComWcdmaInterface SMeasResult myResult myViComIF gt GetResult myViComError myTimeOutInMs Do something with the results here myTimeOutInMs is the time in milliseconds that the function should wait if no results are available To stop taking measurements call the R amp S ViCom Basic interface function StopMeasurement myViComIF gt GetBasicInterface StopMeasurement myViComError To chec
347. table for use in all environments except residential environments and environments that are directly connected to a low voltage supply network that supplies residential buildings Note Class A equipment is intended for use in an industrial environment This equipment may cause radio disturbances in residential environments due to possible conducted as well as radiated disturbances In this case the operator may be required to take appropriate measures to eliminate these disturbances Class B equipment Equipment suitable for use in residential environments and environments that are directly connected to a low voltage supply network that supplies residential buildings Repair and service 1 The product may be opened only by authorized specially trained personnel Before any work is performed on the product or before the product is opened it must be disconnected from the AC supply network Otherwise personnel will be exposed to the risk of an electric shock 1171 0000 42 08 Page 5 Basic Safety Instructions Adjustments replacement of parts maintenance and repair may be performed only by electrical experts authorized by Rohde amp Schwarz Only original parts may be used for replacing parts relevant to safety e g power switches power transformers fuses A safety test must always be performed after parts relevant to safety have been replaced visual inspection protective conductor test insulation resistance measurement leakage cur
348. tend RF1 not synchron ized to TDD framstruc ture psRssilnDBm100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask wRssiMeasMode ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SRssiAndSpectrum Result WB RSSI Rx1 dBm RSSI measured over the complete system band width measured on fron tend RF2 not synchron ized to TDD framstruc ture psRssilnDBm100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask wRssiMeasMode ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SRssiAndSpectrum Result WB RSSI TDD UL Rx0 dBm WB RSSI TDD UL Rx1 dBm RSSI measured over the complete system band width measured on fron tend RF1 only in TDD UL frames RSSI measured over the complete system band width measured on fron tend RF2 only in TDD UL frames psRssilnDBm100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask wRssiMeasMode psRssilnDBm100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask wRssiMeasMode ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SRssiAndSpectrum Result ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SRssiAndSpectrum Result SSE ae User Manual 1505 1329 42 26 155 Building a LTE TopN View Measurement Description ViCom Name Part of ViCom struc ture WB RSSI TDD DL Rx0 dBm RSSI measured over the complete system band width measured on fron tend RF1 only in TDD DL frames psRssilnDBm100 dwFrontEndSelection Mask wRssiMeasMode ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SRssiAndSpectrum Result WB RSSI TDD DL Rx1 dBm RSSI measured over the complete system band w
349. tes sistemas de protecci n Si no el personal que lo utilice quedar expuesto al peligro de choque el ctrico No debe introducirse en los orificios de la caja del aparato ning n objeto que no est destinado a ello Esto puede producir cortocircuitos en el producto y o puede causar choques el ctricos fuego o lesiones Salvo indicaci n contraria los productos no est n impermeabilizados ver tambi n el cap tulo Estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento punto 1 Por eso es necesario tomar las medidas necesarias para evitar la entrada de l quidos En caso contrario existe peligro de choque el ctrico para el usuario o de da os en el producto que tambi n pueden redundar en peligro para las personas No utilice el producto en condiciones en las que pueda producirse o ya se hayan producido condensaciones sobre el producto o en el interior de ste como p ej al desplazarlo de un lugar fr o a otro caliente La entrada de agua aumenta el riesgo de choque el ctrico Antes de la limpieza desconecte por completo el producto de la alimentaci n de tensi n p ej red de alimentaci n o bater a Realice la limpieza de los aparatos con un pa o suave que no se deshilache No utilice bajo ning n concepto productos de limpieza qu micos como alcohol acetona o diluyentes para lacas nitrocelul sicas 1171 0000 42 08 Page 11 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Funcionamiento 1 El uso del product
350. that is shipped with the R amp S ViCom delivery is called PhylisLowLevelErrorMessageHandler dll or PhylisLowLevelErrorMessageHandlerd dl1l in debug mode and can be used to control the behavior using the registry In the key HKCU SOFTWARE Rohde amp Schwarz PhylisModules the two values DisableLowLevelMessages and DisableLowLevelMessageLogFile can be used to control if the message shall be written to a file and if the message boxes shall be displayed If the first value is set to a value not equal to 0 the message will not be written to a file named LowLevelPhylisMessage XXX txt where XXX is replaced by a time stamp If the second value is specified and set to a value not equal to 0 no message boxes are shown Measuring of WCDMA Signals 6 R amp S ViCom WCDMA Technology 6 1 Measuring of WCDMA Signals lorte diei ec dte Perd AA 58 Sample Applicaton P 60 e WCDMA BCH Demodulaton dai 66 Measuring of WCDMA Signals The R amp S TSM Instruments can measure the basic RF parameters of any Node B which is transmitting within a range For the Primary and Secondary Synchronisation Channels P SCH and S SCH this includes Correlation result of all P SCHs found at the requested frequency Relative power of detected peaks in dB Time delay of detected peaks in us For each Primary Common Pilot Channel P CPICH found at the requested frequency this includes e Scrambling Code Total Po
351. the DCD Compressed UL Map The Compressed Uplink Map UL MAP format may only appear after a compressed DL MAP message to which it shall be appended The message presents the same information as the standard format with the exception that the generic MAC header is omitted DL Channel Descriptor amp UL Channel Descriptor A DL Channel Descriptor DCD is transmitted by the BS at a periodic interval to define the characteristics of a DL physical channel A UL Channel Descriptor UCD is trans mitted by the BS at a periodic interval to define the characteristics of a UL physical channel They contain information described below DCD e Configuration Change Count UCD e Configuration Change Count e Ranging Backoff Start e Ranging Backoff End e Request Backoff Start e Request Backoff End Both DCD and UCD may contain optional TLV fields some of them are described as follows DCD e Transmit Receive Transition Gap TTG e Receive Rransmit Transition Gap RTG e BS EIRP in dBm e EIRxPIR max e Base Station ID in case of compressed DLMAP e MAC Version GUI Sample Application 10 1 2 2 WiMAX Demodulation Results The WiMAX demodulation results are the decoded contents of the PDU of MAC Man agement message To get demodulation results the client application first needs to check to make sure that pPduResult field of SMeasResult is no NULL i e it con tains valid PDU data And then it uses this PDU data to fill the SL3Decod
352. the appropriate container of the Scrambling Code Both scrambling codes 312 and 13 are found for the first time so the aforementioned indicator is set to 0 for each see the number after the scrambling code in the figure User Manual 1505 1329 42 26 67 WCDMA BCH Demodulation Once all required information is available a decoding result is generated and made available to the caller In the example after the first 8 frames have been dispatched SIB 13 1 and 3 are ready to be demodulated for the Node B with SC 312 To com pletely decode the SIB 11 some elements are still missing these are marked as red element d 6 3 1 1 Note that the Master Information Block is always decoded since it is necessary to get information from the MIB to decode other SIBs In some networks the Scheduling Information Blocks also contain data that is required to decode the SIBs correctly They are implicitly decoded as well if required Frame 10ms SC 312 0 MIB MIB M SC 13 0 Figure 6 1 BCH Demodulator Measurements Demodulation Modes The demodulation settings described in the general chapter apply to the WCDMA demodulation as well but there are some special constraints when it comes to demod ulation of the WCDMA messages These are described below The MIB handling differs from the default handling two ways e The MIB cannot be requested explicitly even if it was defined with demodulation mode ON_C
353. the others R amp S ViCom R amp S ViCom GSM Technology EH using the time slot detection task Therefore the R amp S TSM Instruments software tries to detect many different information streams on the signal and synchronize on the time slots If the synchronisation process is successful the software is able to identify the Training Sequence Code This TSC and the timing information are used to build a so called cluster In such a cluster data from one BTS is gathered with a high certainty To get to this point several time slot measurements are combined This is also necessary to reduce the presence of ghost codes The Time Slot Measurement does not support any specialized configuration You can simply enable or disable it in the measurement details structure and will receive results accordingly Results made in this mode are returned in two different lists The first list contains the different clusters measured Each cluster is made up of a back reference to the fre quency index and the following attributes e Minimum power value sMinPowerInDBm100 for a cluster and the total power range wPowerRangeInDB100 In combination both values specify the value range interval sMinPowerInDBm100 sMinPowerInDBm100 wPowerRangeInDBm100 in which the power values in the associated list are e Slot alignment of the timeslots refer to the subsection Slot Alignment below for more information on that subject e Training Sequence Code and the type o
354. these values come from the high dynamic measurement If only sub band measurement have been activated these values come from the sub band measurements and are therefore not available for weak cells e RS CINR TX0 RXO dB e RS CINR TX1 RXO dB e RS CINR TX2 RXO dB e RS CINR TX3 RXO dB e RS CINR TXO RX1 dB e RS CINR TX1 RX1 dB e RS CINR TX2 RX1 dB e RS CINR TX3 RX1 dB If sub band measurement have been activated in addition RS CINR is available as sub band values e g one value per resource block in pwidebandRsCinrValues e sub band RS CINR TXO RXO dB e sub band RS CINR TX1 RXO dB e sub band RS CINR TX2 RXO dB e sub band RS CINR TX3 RX0 dB e sub band RS CINR TXO RX1 dB e sub band RS CINR TX1 RX1 dB e sub band RS CINR TX2 RX1 dB e sub band RS CINR TX3 RX1 dB 9 1 4 2 Wideband RSSI Measurement Results The results are available in ViCom LTE SMeasResult SRssiAndSpectrumResult RSSI Measurement Measuring of LTE Signals Two different RSSI measurements over the complete system bandwidth are provided e sRsRssiInDBm100 is a power measurement according to the definition in 3GPP 36 214 Received signal strength indictor RSSI using only OFDM symbols that contain reference signals This RSSI value is different per PCI psRssiInDBm100 is a total power measurement over the complete bandwidth not synchronized The value is the same for each PCI
355. tion Furthermore wTimeResolutionInMs must be less or equal to dwSignalAquisitionInMs Setto 0 for only one result per IQ acquisition 9 1 3 Narrowband Measurement Result Once the measurement has been set up the measured power values are returned when requested using GetResult as shown in the other R amp S ViCom applications Measuring of LTE Signals There are up to two different result structures returned in the measurement mode The channel impulse responses and the power values combined with the related CINR val ues of the S SYNC channel GSI A M 122 e Channel impulse ResporSsBS tenore dette cote tet cen ree dla ted rn eh 123 e SYNC Signal Power amp CINE Values count 124 e Reference Signal Measurement esent nnne ns 125 9 1 3 1 General The narrowband scanner finds the individual PCIs in the measured signal and pro vides the following general measurements Table 9 1 General measurements Measurement Description ViCom Name Part of ViCom struc ture PCI The physical Cell ID wPhysicalCellld ViCom LTE SMeasRe which can take one from sult SSignals the values defined by ViCom LTE SMeasRe 0 503 sult SWidebandRsCinr Result ViCom LTE SMeasRe sult SMimoResult Cyclic Prefix 7 means normal 6 bNumberOfSymbolsPer ViCom LTE SMeasRe means extended Slot sult SSignals Frame structure FDD or TDD enFrameStructureType ViCo
356. ts to extern C declspec dllexport int DumpLowLevelErrorMessage LPCSTR lpszText LPCSTR lpszCaption UINT nType To extend the default behavior you have to put a DLL named UserLowLevelErrorMessageHandler dll resp UserLowLevelErrorMessageHandlerd dll in Debug Mode if there is any differ ent reaction required in these two modes otherwise on of the two is enough into the Application folder of the R amp S ViCom installation directory R amp S ViCom is shipped with a default handler DLL that supports disabling the message logging using the registry see Registry You can use the SampleForErrorHandler sample project as a base for you own DLL This project contains a configuration which shows the above mentioned message box in case of a Phylis Kernel error The R amp S ViCom setup package supplies this sample only as source code Therefore have to build the project if you want to use the UserLowLevelErrorMessageHandler dll include stdafx h include afxwin h extern C declspec dllexport int DumpLowLevelErrorMessage LPCSTR lpszText LPCSTR lpszCaption UINT nType TODO Integrate your personal error handling routines here CString csMsg csMsg Format _T Module s nMessage s n CString lpszCaption CString lpszText AfxMessageBox csMsg MB OK MB ICONINFORMATION Debugging and Error Handling return 0 5 6 2 2 Registry The default error handler DLL
357. ttings regarding e Which reference signals to measure RO R1 R2 R3 e On which frontends to measure FEO or FE1 From the values of bTransmitAntennaPort and dwFrontEndSelectionMask it is known which path has been measured dwFrontEndSelectionMask 0 means frontend 0 was used dwFrontEndSelectionMask 1 means frontend 1 was used bTransmitAntennaPort is a bitmask where each bit represents an eNodeB antenna port Bit 0 RO Bit 1 R1 Bit 2 R2 Bit 3 R3 RSRP RSRQ The scanner provides combined RSRP RSRQ values according to 3GPP 36 214 where If the UE can reliably detect that R1 is available it may use R1 in addition to RO to determine RSRP To indicate this case both bit O and bit 1 in bTransmitAntennaPort are set R2 and R3 are never used for a combined RSRP RSRQ The scanner also provides RSRP RSRQ for each path In this case only one bit in bTransmitAntennaPort is set Measuring of LTE Signals Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Decimal Meaning 1 Single path Only RO was used for the measurement Single path Only R1 was used for the measurement Combination of RO and R1 was used for the measurement RSRP and RSRQ values are provided as one value over the complete system band width in sRSRPinDBm100 and sRSROinDB100 If the high dynamic WB measurement have been activated these values come from the high dynamic measurement If only sub band measurement have been activat
358. u64TSMxTimeIn40ns u64TSMxTimeIn40ns u64TSMxTimeIn40ns u64TSMxTimeIn40ns u64T3MxTimeIn40ns u64TSMxTimeIn40ns u64TSMxTimeIn40ns u64TSMxTimeIn40ns u64TSMxTimeIn40ns u64T3MxTimeIn40ns u64T3MxTimeIn40ns u64TSMxTimeIn40ns u64TSMxTimeIn40ns u64T3MxTimeIn40ns u64T3MxTimeIn40ns u64T3MxTimeIn40ns u64TSMxTimeIn40ns u64TSMxTimeIn40ns u64TSMxTimeIn40ns u64TSMxTimeIn40ns u64TSMxTimeIn40ns 26291972608 26291972608 26291972608 26291972608 26291972608 26291972608 26291972608 26291972608 26291972608 26292207616 26292207616 26292207616 26292207616 26292207616 26292207616 26292207616 26292207616 26292207616 26292207616 26292544512 26292544512 26292544512 26292544512 26292544512 26292544512 26292544512 26292544512 26292544512 26292544512 26292544512 26292544512 sPowerInDBmi00 sPowerInDBm100 sPowerInDBm100 sPowerInDBm100 sPowerInDBmi00 sPowerInDBmi00 sPower InDBmi00 sPowerInDBmi00 sPowerInDBmi00 sPowerInDBmi00 sPowerInDBmi00 sPowerInDBmi00 sPowerInDBmi00 sPowerInDBmi00 sPowerInDBm100 sPowerInDBmi00 sPowerInDBmi00 sPowerInDBmi00 sPowerInDBmi00 sPowerInDBmi00 sPowerInDBmi00 sPowerInDBmi00 sPowerInDBmi00 sPover InDBmi00 sPowerInDBmi00 sPowerInDBmi00 sPower InDBmi00 sPowerInDBm100 sPowerInDBmi00 sPowerInDBmi00 sPowerInDBmi00 e ttMode eittMode eittMode edttMode edttMode eldttMode elttMode eittMode elttMode e ttMode e ttMod
359. ua sue d ve ved abia 236 RE Ce RI EE 237 174 3 LTE SCAN DEE 239 1744 Throughput KT 240 TLAS IRF Power SCAN DEE 241 ME uci EE 243 18 1 R amp S TSMx Family Option Handling eene nnn 243 18 1 1 Ee UE 243 16 412 Program Staats TTT 244 18 1 3 Display Contents of the R amp S TSMx Family Info Tab 244 18 1 4 Display Contents of the R amp S TSMx Family Options Tab 245 18 1 5 Installing the R amp S TSMx Family Windows Driver Manually esses 246 18 1 6 R amp S TSMx Family Firmware Upgrade 248 189 2 R amp S ISMW Configutation rennen nente hne inda sena xe Pera nas 250 18 2 4 System Information 251 18 2 2 Option Handling 251 18 2 3 Firmware Update eer emeret nene iaaa a Eadan anaoa 253 18 3 R amp S TSME Configutratlon uenerit cenae eerie trit uie ro kai een na aen ranas 253 18 4 Frequently Asked Questions eeseeseeseeeessesseeene eene nennen nnne nnn nnn 253 18 5 Technical Notes inire orn cie 254 18 5 1 UMTS Technical Notes 254 j ea t 258 1 Conventions Used in the Documentation The following conventions are used throughout the R amp S ViCom Interface Operating Manual Typographical conventions Convention Description Graphical user interface elements All names of graphical user interface elements both on the screen and on the front and rear panels such as dialog boxes soft k
360. uctor de protecci n medici n de resistencia de aislamiento medici n de la corriente de fuga control de funcionamiento Con esto queda garantizada la seguridad del producto Bater as y acumuladores o celdas Si no se siguen o se siguen de modo insuficiente las indicaciones en cuanto a las bater as y acumuladores o celdas pueden producirse explosiones incendios y o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte El manejo de bater as y acumuladores con electrolitos alcalinos p ej celdas de litio debe seguir el est ndar EN 62133 1 2 No deben desmontarse abrirse ni triturarse las celdas Las celdas o bater as no deben someterse a calor ni fuego Debe evitarse el almacenamiento a la luz directa del sol Las celdas y bater as deben mantenerse limpias y secas Limpiar las conexiones sucias con un pa o seco y limpio Las celdas o bater as no deben cortocircuitarse Es peligroso almacenar las celdas o bater as en estuches o cajones en cuyo interior puedan cortocircuitarse por contacto rec proco o por contacto con otros materiales conductores No deben extraerse las celdas o bater as de sus embalajes originales hasta el momento en que vayan a utilizarse Las celdas o bater as no deben someterse a impactos mec nicos fuertes indebidos En caso de falta de estanqueidad de una celda el l quido vertido no debe entrar en contacto con la piel ni los ojos Si se produce contacto lavar con agua abundante la zona afectada
361. uency Index The channels are referenced in the result structures as index that can be used to refer to the frequency settings table configured before the measurement is started The index is called wFrequencylIndex inside the structures User Manual 1505 1329 42 26 78 7 1 2 1 Measuring of GSM Signals List of Executed Measurements In some cases there is no frequency index given directly For these results there is a way to match the result data onto the frequencies specified in the ListExecutedMeasSpec structure of the result This list provides the frequency indi ces of all measured data in the result Note that the order is important here when it comes to match the indices to the result data Details are explained in the related sec tions Measurement Tasks Different types of measurement tasks that the GSM technology can handle are descri bed In this section The short code fragments are shown to demonstrate the usage of the API in more details Power Measurement This measurement is the one which is enabled per default for every frequency that is being measured It cannot be disabled and will deliver results in every scan One scan contains a complete set of power values for all configured channels The GSM technology measurement is capable of measuring different types of power Which type is actually used for a power value is specified as part of the result and explained below Total Channel Inband Power Thi
362. ula N 5 F Forse The frequency offset FOffset is defined in Reference 6 for each UMTS band as well as for the extra frequencies assigned in Band Il The downlink and uplink channels assigned in the operating Bands I Il and III are lis ted in the tables below Note in operating band Il the 12 additional centre frequencies that are specified shifted by 100 kHz relative to the normal raster The uplink and downlink channels assigned in the operating Bands I II and III are listed in the follow ing tables Note that in operating Band II 12 additional center frequencies are speci fied These additional channels are shifted by 100 kHz relative to the normal raster and not calculated according to the previously given formula Table 18 1 UTRA operating bands and channel numbers Uplink Technical Notes Operating Band UL Frequency Frequency offset Assigned Chan Assigned Center Band FOffset nels Frequencies 1920 MHz to 1980 0 9612 to 9888 1922 4 MHz to MHz 1977 6 MHz in steps of 02 MHz ll 1850 MHz to 1910 0 9262 to 9538 1852 4 MHz to MHz 1907 6 MHz in steps of 0 2 MHz Extra uplink chan as for Band Il 1850 1 12 37 62 87 112 1852 5 1857 5 nels of Band II 137 1862 5 1867 5 162 187 212 237 1872 5 1877 5 262 287 1882 5 1887 5 1892 5 1897 5 1902 5 1907 5 Hl 1710 MHz to 1785 1525 937 to 1288 1712 4 MHz to MHz 1782 6 MHz in steps of 0 2 MHz Table 18 2 UTRA oper
363. ula tion even if the field was disabled in the matrix Click the Set Frequencies to fin ish that step Apply the CDMA 2000 measurement specific settings using the buttons Set PPS Synchronisation Set max Velocity and Set Sync Channel Demod Mode Do your modifications to these settings before for example perform a measurement calibration to put a meaningful value into the Delay of PPS falling edge field Start the measurement using Start Measurement button Choose whether you want to store the results in a text file and what kind of infor mation shall be saved Then you can click Get Results to write 100 measurement results into the file When this is done the application is blocked until 100 results have been measured unless older results are still in the buffer User Manual 1505 1329 42 26 108 Sample Application for CDMA 2000 EVDO 7 Once you have all your data click the Stop Measurement button to stop the mea surement again You can then either change the settings steps 2 3 and 4 or you can unload the R amp S TSM instrument Release PN Scanner and quit the applica tion 8 2 4 Sample Application The sample application as shown in the previous section has been extended to also support the demodulation request configuration before and during the measurement Structure and usage is very similar to the demodulator extensions described in Chap ter 6 R amp S ViCom WCDMA Technology on page 58 and t
364. ulated and how the decoding process is con trolled In the measurement configuration for each channel a list of PDUs can be defined that shall be decoded When the measurement is started the scanner analyses the signals that are found and extracts information about the Node Bs on air The demodulator then first tries to synchronize on the master information block sent After the MIB has been decoded the remaining frames are analyzed The frames contain parts of or complete System Information Blocks For each Node B that is found the frame data is accumulated until all required frames have been found to start the demodulation of that SIB if enabled To separate frames from different cells the Scrambling Code is demodulated from the incoming signal and used as a key to store the PDUs in different frame containers Since the SC is not a unique identifier the system uses an additional indicator if the Scanner is not sure if a SC belongs to an already measured cell or not This indicator increases each time such an uncertainty makes it necessary to split the data This uncertainty can be resolved by decoding the SIB 3 and investigating the Cell ID In the figure below an example of that process is shown Let s assume that it was requested to decode SIB 1 3 11 and 13 The upper stream is sent by a Node B that has the SC 312 the lower on uses a SC of 13 The BCH demodulator then extracts and saves the PDUs that were configured each in
365. um delay and the delay to the impulse peak as well as the code power to inband power ratio Ec lo The RMS delay spread S measures the standard deviation of the delay spread Delay spread is an indication of the average drift of signals Delay spread is a common prob lem and is very important for optimisation High delay spreads mean that more fingers are needed in a rake receiver to make a connection between a mobile and a NodeB For each CPICH signal found the R amp S TSM Instruments also return the Received Sig nal Code Power RSCP and the Interference Signal Code Power ISCP The RSCP is the average power of the received signal after dispreading and combining The ISCP User Manual 1505 1329 42 26 59 R amp S ViCom R amp S ViCom WCDMA Technology 6 2 is the interference on the received signal in the given timeslot that cannot be eliminated by the receiver Together with the spreading factor SF these two values can be used to calculate the Signal to Interference Ration SIR SIR RSCP ISCP SF The ratio Ec lo the average chip energy divided by the total inband energy per chip duration may be calculated by subtracting the inband power from the absolute code power both reported in the measurement result structure The R amp S TSM Instruments return a time drift for each CPICH measurement They also return a standard deviation for an approximated Gaussian distribution of time drifts of the PDPs The
366. ure according to ETSI TS 125 221 The subframe consists of 7 slots denoted TSO to TS6 and a synchronization part TSO has fixed allocation to downlink and TS1 to uplink The allocation of the other timeslots depends on the traffic load on downlink and uplink In the shown example 3 timeslots are used for uplink and 4 for downlink The synchronization part consists of the downlink pilot timeslot DWPTS and the uplink pilot timeslot UpPTS separated by a guard period On downlink the DwPTS is one of 32 different sync codes The DwPTS is used for rough frame synchronization and coarse BTS identification R amp S ViCom R amp S ViCom TD SCDMA Technology EH 12 1 2 Slot Structure The standard timeslot is structured into two data fields and a midamble section At the end of the slot is an empty guard period Data symbols Midamble Data symbols 4 352 chips 144 chips 352 chips CP 864 T e a Figure 12 2 Timeslot structure according to ETSI TS 125 221 The data fields carry scrambled information symbols The scrambling has a fixed length of 16 chips Different channels are separated by orthogonal spreading The midamble part is a combination of several periodically continued sequences of a basic midamble code with length 128 chips The offset from the basic code identifies the transport channel Scrambling code and basic midamble code are connected and BTS specific There are 128 different code sets 12 2 Measurement Configuration
367. ust be between 1 to 1024 results is configurable in the SResultBufferDepth structure within SSettings 10 1 1 2 Channel Settings The Channel Settings SChannelSettings mainly consists of a list of up to 32 center frequencies and the corresponding bandwidths to be scanned Another informa tion it holds is the R amp S TSMW frontends The R amp S TSMW contains two frontends that can be used to perform measurements on different channels in parallel The measure ment can be run on either one The resourceHandleForScanner and resourceHandleForDemodulator variable hold the handles to the front end used for scan and demodulation correspondingly You can refer to the Frontend allocation section for more info 10 1 1 3 Demodulation Settings The Demodulation Settings SBchDemodulationSettings specifies CINR thresh old the load percentage on R amp S TSMW R amp S TSME to be used for demodulation maximum value is 50 and the PDU Request Settings to start the measurement PDU Request Settings The PDU Request Settings SDemodRequests specifies the following e On which channel to request PDU decode result dwChannel Index e The type of PDU to be decoded ePDU e PDU demodulation mode eDemodulationMode and its related parameters Measuring of WiMAX Signals 10 1 2 Measurement Result 10 1 2 1 Once the measurement has been set up the measurement results are returned when requested using GetResult The WiMAX measurement
368. vaci n utilizado Si se utiliza el producto dentro de un veh culo recae de manera exclusiva en el conductor la responsabilidad de conducir el veh culo de manera segura y adecuada El fabricante no asumir ninguna responsabilidad por accidentes o colisiones No utilice nunca el producto dentro de un veh culo en movimiento si esto pudiera distraer al conductor Asegure el producto dentro del veh culo debidamente para evitar en caso de un accidente lesiones u otra clase de da os Eliminaci n protecci n del medio ambiente 1 Los dispositivos marcados contienen una bater a o un acumulador que no se debe desechar con los residuos dom sticos sin clasificar sino que debe ser recogido por separado La eliminaci n se debe efectuar exclusivamente a trav s de un punto de recogida apropiado o del servicio de atenci n al cliente de Rohde 8 Schwarz Los dispositivos el ctricos usados no se deben desechar con los residuos dom sticos sin clasificar sino que deben ser recogidos por separado Rohde 8 Schwarz GmbH 8 Co KG ha elaborado un concepto de eliminaci n de residuos y asume plenamente los deberes de recogida y eliminaci n para los fabricantes dentro de la UE Para desechar el producto de manera respetuosa con el medio ambiente dir jase a su servicio de atenci n al cliente de Rohde amp Schwarz Si se trabaja de manera mec nica y o t rmica cualquier producto o componente m s all del funcionamiento previsto pueden liberarse su
369. ve Set 2 The SCH signal has been demodulated in the last 30 seconds The drift of the incoming signal is within a range of 6us The power ratio must not be less than 9 dBm in that case to perform a correlation to the origi nal BTS The code below is an example how the maximum power value in a scan result can be found The result normally contains a whole bunch of that power values double dMaxPower 9999 0 long nFrequency 0 SViComList SMeasResult SPowerResult SLinkedObject pcPowerResult pcMeasResult gt ListPowerResults pFirst while pcPowerResult if dMaxPower lt 0 01 pcPowerResult gt sPowerInDBm100 dMaxPower 0 01 pcPowerResult gt sPowerInDBm100 nFrequencyIndex pcPowerResult wFrequencyIndex pcPowerResult pcPowerResult gt pNext cout lt lt Max pow lt lt dMaxPower cout lt lt Frequency lt lt ptFrequencySettings nFrequencyIndex dCenterFrequencyInHz cout endl 7 1 2 2 SCH Measurement Report Data Once a SCH has been demodulated the GSM technology measurement can report the content of the data sent in the SCH burst This data consists of the BSIC of the BTS and the frame number in which that specific SCH was sent The information is espe 7 1 2 3 7 1 2 4 Measuring of GSM Signals cially important to start a specific demodulation request of System Information Type messages Such command can be answered only after the scanner an R amp S TSM
370. w modes The list on the right side is used to define the demodulation tasks during the measure ment The content can be defined upfront but pressing the Send SI Type Demod Request button is only supported when a measurement is active The main differences to the left list are listed below e The records are defined related to a specific basestation The third column in the list should be an entry formerly measured with the scanner and can be taken from the standard measurement results the internal basestation id that is assigned by the scanner must be used here e The demodulation types are now restricted to values 3 to 8 which correlate to the remaining definitions from the et SIType_DEMOD_ MODE enumeration Additionally the request identifier can be specified to distinguish different requests when the results are processed since they may occur in any order 8 8 1 8 1 1 1 Measuring of CDMA 2000 Signals R amp S ViCom CDMA EVDO Technology The R amp S ViCom API CDMA EVDO technology measurements support measuring dif ferent parameters of a CDMA 2000 EVDO network Such parameters are listed below e For the F PICH The Channel Impulse Response Absolute Inband Power of the Channel and the Pilot to calculate Ec IO values Automatic peak detection for the CIR measurements e For the F SYNC Configurable demodulation of information sent on the F SYNC e General measurement results Time Est
371. wer UL DL en Figure 7 13 Measurement mode specification 7 2 3 Requesting System Information Type Once a measurement has been started you can request the System Information type 1 to 4 for a specific BTS Therefore the lower part of the main dialog offers the appro priate controls Before such a request is sent it is required that the SCH has been demodulated suc cessfully This is due to the fact that the SCH contains information required to syn chronise and demodulate the BCCH namely the BSIC For each message type a user managed request id can be specified This helps iden tifying to which request a result belongs The dialog also allows setting a timeout after which the demodulation request is stopped A currently active demodulation request can also be cancelled again The related checkbox has to be selected when the request is sent 7 3 GSM BCH Demodulation m Selective Demodulaion Requests for SYSTEM INFO TYPE 1 4 during measurement I STi Own Request Id E Timeout ms 10000 Cancel IW 5T2 Own Request Id fo Timeout ms fo Iw Cancel ST3 Own Request Id o Timeout ms o Cancel ST4 Own Request Id o Timeout ms o Cancel BTS parameters sd Frequency Index Indicator of SCHInfo 297312 Send Request BSIC octal 5 Figure 7 14 System Info type demodulation request For all requests the channel identified by its center frequency i
372. wer Scan Results Following additional information is displayed Parameters e Start Displays the start frequency e End Displays the end frequency Status Displays the measurement duration and the measurement rate The status button dis plays the colored statuses previously mentioned see Chapter 17 4 1 GSM RSSI Scan on page 236 R amp S TSMx Family Option Handling 18 Appendix 18 1 18 1 1 e R amp S TSMx Family Option HANGING EENS ANEN NEE 243 e R amp S TSMW Configuration nce neem aaa 250 e RSS Eet ULC EE 253 e Frequently Asked Questions cccsccccceeeeeccnaeeeeeecctaeeaeeeecnseaeeeeceaneeseeecsanenssnetas 253 e Technical Notes Gre aaa EEN 254 R amp S TSMx Family Option Handling With the TsmxOptionKeylnstaller utility it is possible to check the IEEE1394 connec tion and check the instrument data set Additionally the program displays all the enabled options for a certain instrument and can be used to install new options The instrument specific Device Identification file can be read out This tool can be started from the Windows Start menu R amp SViCom gt ViCom version gt Tools gt TsmxOptionKeyInstaller If the log messages of the OptionKeylInstaller show that a connected R amp S TSMx Fam ily instrument has been found this means that the IEEE1394 connection is working and that the R amp S ROMES demo or the test application can be run The Option Keylnstaller utility can also be used
373. wer of the CPICH For each Scrambling Code e CPICH Channel Impulse Response CIR measurements Received Signal Code Power RSCP and Interference Signal Code Power ISCP e Time drift of C PICH CIR measurements giving an indication of Node B timing drift e Root Mean Square RMS of delay spread related to Chip e Optionally frequency Doppler drift of the Node B signal For each peak within the CIR measurement of one Scrambling Code e Power of the identified peak e Relative time of arrival To support the above measurements and when this option is present the R amp S TSM Instruments use the synchronisation channels to synchronise to the Broadcast Chan nel BCH of the same network and decode System Information Broadcasts SIBs SIB information is available across the R amp S ViCom Interface in the measurement result structure A complete list of information available in each SIB is given in Table 18 3 e CPICH Channel Impulse Response CIR Measurements ss 59 LEE ZZ dino rm 60 R amp S ViCom R amp S ViCom WCDMA Technology 6 1 1 CPICH Channel Impulse Response CIR Measurements The R amp S TSM Instruments return a CIR measurement for each Common Pilot Channel CPICH that was found during the measurement time on the requested frequency This will include the C PICHs transmitted by different NodeBs belonging to the same network in the reception area Each NodeB broadcasts the CPICH with a
374. y avisar a un m dico En caso de cambio o recarga inadecuados las celdas o bater as que contienen electrolitos alcalinos p ej las celdas de litio pueden explotar Para garantizar la seguridad del producto las celdas o bater as solo deben ser sustituidas por el tipo Rohde amp Schwarz correspondiente ver lista de recambios Las bater as y celdas deben reciclarse y no deben tirarse a la basura dom stica Las bater as o acumuladores que contienen plomo mercurio o cadmio deben tratarse como residuos especiales Respete en esta relaci n las normas nacionales de eliminaci n y reciclaje Transporte 1 El producto puede tener un peso elevado Por eso es necesario desplazarlo o transportarlo con precauci n y si es necesario usando un sistema de elevaci n adecuado p ej una carretilla elevadora a fin de evitar lesiones en la espalda u otros da os personales 1171 0000 42 08 Page 13 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Las asas instaladas en los productos sirven solamente de ayuda para el transporte del producto por personas Por eso no est permitido utilizar las asas para la sujeci n en o sobre medios de transporte como p ej gr as carretillas elevadoras de horquilla carros etc Es responsabilidad suya fijar los productos de manera segura a los medios de transporte o elevaci n Para evitar da os personales o da os en el producto siga las instrucciones de seguridad del fabricante del medio de transporte o ele

R&S®ViCom User Manual - Rohde & Schwarz Österreich

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&amp;S&reg;ViCom User Manual - Rohde &amp; Schwarz &Ouml;sterreich

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&S®ViCom User Manual - Rohde & Schwarz Österreich